QASHQAI
OWNER'S MANUAL
Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle has been delivered to you with confidence. It has been produced using the latest techniques
and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometres (miles) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information & Maintenance Booklet explains in detail the warranty coverage that applies to your vehicle.
Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, your NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive
resources available for you.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for
you and your passengers!
•
NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
•
ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for condi-
tions.
•
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems.
Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.
•
ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety fea-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle.
•
ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all options available on this model. There-
fore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect
at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or
designs at any time without notice and without obligation.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modifications could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be cov-
ered under NISSAN warranties.
READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Before driving your vehicle, read this Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe
operation of your vehicle.
Throughout this manual the following symbols and words are used:
WARNING
Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious per-
sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures described must be
followed precisely.
CAUTION
Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate per-
sonal injury, or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures described must be followed carefully.
NOTE
Indicates additional helpful information.
The Blue Citizenship symbol indicates environmentally friendly information and
best practices.
This symbol means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these point to the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the
illustration.
“NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.”
Be sure to read the “Airbag warning labels” description in the Safety section of
this manual; and the “Airbag label” description at the end of this manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING (4WD models)
This vehicle will handle and manoeuvre differently from an ordinary passenger
vehicle, because it has a higher centre of gravity. As with other vehicles with fea-
tures of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions” and “Four-
wheel drive (4WD)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual.
BATTERY DISPOSAL
CAUTION
An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
Examples of the batteries that the vehicle contains:
•
Vehicle battery
•
Remote controller battery (for Intelligent Key and/or Remote keyless entry
system)
•
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor battery
•
Remote controller battery (for Mobile Entertainment system)
If in doubt, contact your local authority, or a NISSAN dealer, or a qualified work-
shop for advice on disposal.
m
Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
m
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
m
Gracenote® and CDDB are registered trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc. The Gracenote logo and logo type, and
the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
Safety — Seats, Seat belts and Supplemental
Restraint System
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and
audio system
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8
Technical information
9
Index
10
0 Illustrated table of contentsIllustrated table of contents
Seat belts and supplemental restraint system ........... 0-2
Exterior front............................................................ 0-3
Exterior rear............................................................. 0-4
Passenger compartment .......................................... 0-5
Cockpit ................................................................... 0-6
Left hand drive.................................................... 0-6
Right hand drive ................................................. 0-7
Instrument and control layout ................................... 0-8
Left hand drive.................................................... 0-8
Right hand drive ................................................. 0-9
Meters and gauges.................................................. 0-10
Engine compartment................................................ 0-11
HRA2DDT engine............................................... 0-12
MR20DD engine................................................. 0-12
K9K engine......................................................... 0-13
R9M engine........................................................ 0-14
1.
Supplemental front-impact air bags (P. 1-29)
2.
Supplemental curtain side-impact air bags
(P. 1-29)
3.
Front seat belts (P. 1-8)
4.
Head restraints (P. 1-6)
5.
Supplemental side-impact air bags (P. 1-29)
6.
Rear outboard seat belts (P. 1-8)
7.
Rear centre seat belt (P. 1-8)
8.
ISOFIX child restraint system (P. 1-21)
9.
Rear seats (P. 1-5)
— Child restraints (P. 1-15)
10.
Front seats (P. 1-3)
11.
Front passenger air bag switch* (P. 1-35)
* where fitted
NPA1244
SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
1.
Bonnet (P. 3-14)
2.
Windscreen wipers and washers
— Switch operation (P. 2-32)
— Blade replacement (P. 8-24)
— Window washer fluid (P. 8-15)
— Windscreen deicer (P. 2-35)
— ThermaClear* (P. 2-34)
3.
Power windows (P. 2-48)
4.
Towing eye (P. 6-16)
5.
Headlights, front side lights, turn signal lights
(Switch P. 2-36, Location and bulb replace-
ment P. 8-27)
6.
Tyres (Tyres and wheels P. 8-33, P. 9-5, Flat
tyre P. 6-3), Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) P. 6-4)
7.
Outside rear-view mirrors (P. 3-19)
Side turn signal light (P. 2-36, Location and
bulb replacement P. 8-27)
8.
Doors (Keys P. 3-2, Door locks P. 3-8,
Remote keyless entry system P. 3-4)
* where fitted
NPA1245
EXTERIOR FRONT
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
1.
Rear window (Defogger switch, P. 2-35)
2.
Rear wiper and washer
— Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-32)
— Wiper replacement (P. 8-24)
— Washer fluid (P. 8-15)
3.
High-mounted stop light (P. 8-27)
4.
Antenna (P. 8-23).
5.
Tail light and brake light
— Switch location (P. 2-36)
— Bulb replacement (P. 8-27)
6.
Rear turn signal light
— Switch location (P. 2-36)
— Bulb replacement (P. 8-27)
7.
Doors
— Keys (P. 3-2)
— Door locks (P. 3-8)
— Child safety lock (P. 8-11)
8.
Fuel filler cap (P. 3-15)
9.
Reversing light (P. 8-27)
10.
Rear fog light* (P. 8-27)
11.
Towing eye (P. 6-16)
12.
Rear view camera*
— Rear-View Monitor* (P. 4-2)
— Around View Monitor* (P. 4-4)
13.
Number plate lights (P. 8-27)
14.
Back door
— Door locks (P. 3-11)
— Remote keyless entry system (P. 3-4)
* where fitted
NPA1246
EXTERIOR REAR
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
1.
Inside rear-view mirror (P. 2-18)
2.
Map light (P. 2-50)
3.
Sun visors (P. 2-50)
4.
Inside door handle (P. 2-18)
— Outside mirror folding switch* (P. 3-20)
— Outside mirror remote control (P. 3-19)
5.
Door armrest
— Power windows controls (P. 2-48)
— Power door lock switch (P. 2-10)
6.
Interior (room) light (models without fixed glass
roof)* (P. 2-51)
7.
Interior (reading) light (models with fixed glass
roof)* (P. 2-51)
8.
Luggage (boot) compartment
— Parcel shelf (P. 2-45)
— Luggage floor (P. 2-47)
— Luggage hooks (P. 2-47)
9.
Fuse box (P. 8-25)
* where fitted
NPA1247
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
LEFT HAND DRIVE
1.
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-32)
2.
Steering wheel switches
— Cruise control* (P. 5-36)
— Speed limiter* (P. 5-38)
— Mobile phone integration for FM-AM radio
with CD player without navigation (P. 4-39)
— Mobile phone integration for
NissanConnect* *
1
3.
Steering wheel
— Electric power steering system (P. 5-57)
— Horn (P. 2-41)
— Driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag
(P. 1-29)
4.
Steering wheel switches
— Vehicle information display switches
(P. 2-13)
— Audio switches* (P. 4-38)
5.
Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-36)
6.
TRIP/RESET/brightness switches
— Instrument brightness switch (P. 2-3)
— TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer
(P. 2-2)
7.
Switch panel
— Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF
switch* (P. 5-60)
— ECO mode switch* (P. 5-65)
— Stop/Start System OFF switch* (P. 5-22)
— Ultrasonic Parking Sensor switch* (P. 5-45)
— Headlight aiming control switch* (P. 2-39)
— 2WD/4WD switch* (P. 5-26)
— Headlight cleaner switch* (P. 2-40)
8.
— Fuel filler lid release handle (P. 3-15)
— Bonnet release handle (P. 3-14)
9.
Front cup holders (P. 2-44)
10.
Electric parking brake (P. 3-16)
11.
Shift lever (P. 5-17)
12.
Power outlet (P. 2-42)
* where fitted
*
1
Refer to the separately provided NissanConnect
Owner’s Manual.
NPA1268
COCKPIT
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
RIGHT HAND DRIVE
1.
Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-36)
2.
Steering wheel switches
— Vehicle information display switches
(P. 2-13)
— Audio switches* (P. 4-38)
3.
Steering wheel
— Electric power steering system (P. 5-57)
— Horn (P. 2-41)
— Driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag
(P. 1-29)
4.
Steering wheel switches
— Cruise control* (P. 5-36)
— Speed limiter* (P. 5-38)
— Mobile phone integration for FM-AM radio
with CD player without navigation* (P. 4-39)
— Mobile phone integration for
NissanConnect* *
1
5.
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-32)
6.
TRIP/RESET/brightness switches
— Instrument brightness switch (P. 2-3)
— TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer
(P. 2-2)
7.
Switch panel
— Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF
switch* (P. 5-60)
— ECO mode switch* (P. 5-65)
— Stop/Start System OFF switch* (P. 5-22)
— Ultrasonic Parking Sensor switch* (P. 5-45)
— Headlight aiming control switch* (P. 2-39)
— 2WD/4WD switch (P. 5-26)
8.
— Fuel filler lid release handle (P. 3-15)
— Bonnet release handle (P. 3-14)
9.
Front cup holders (P. 2-44)
10.
Electric parking brake (P. 3-16)
11.
Shift lever (P. 5-17)
12.
Power outlet (P. 2-42)
* where fitted
*
1
Refer to the separately provided NissanConnect
Owner’s Manual.
NPA1248
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
LEFT HAND DRIVE
1.
Left and right side vents (P. 4-14)
2.
Front passenger’s supplemental front-impact
air bag (P. 1-30)
3.
Centre vents (P. 4-14)
4.
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
5.
Audio system* (P. 4-23)
— NissanConnect* *
1
(P. 4-38)
— without navigation* (P. 4-24)
6.
Ignition switch (behind steering wheel)
(P. 5-11)
— Push Button ignition switch* (P. 5-12)
7.
Steering wheel switches
— Cruise control* (P. 5-36)
— Speed limiter* (P. 5-38)
— Mobile phone integration for FM-AM radio
with CD player without navigation* (P. 4-39)
— Mobile phone integration for
NissanConnect* *
1
(P. 4-38)
8.
Meters, gauges, warning/indicator lights,
vehicle information display (P. 2-2, P. 2-4,
P. 2-13)
9.
Steering wheel switches
— Vehicle information display switches
(P. 2-13)
— Audio control* (P. 4-38)
10.
Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-15)
11.
Glove box (P. 2-42)
* where fitted
*
1
Refer to the separately provided NissanConnect
Owner’s Manual.
NPA1269
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL LAYOUT
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
RIGHT HAND DRIVE
1.
Left and right side vents (P. 4-14)
2.
Front passenger’s supplemental front-impact
air bag (P. 1-30)
3.
Centre vents (P. 4-14)
4.
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
5.
Audio system* (P. 4-23)
— NissanConnect* *
1
(P. 4-38)
— without navigation* (P. 4-24)
6.
Ignition switch (behind steering wheel)
(P. 5-11)
— Push Button ignition switch* (P. 5-12)
7.
Steering wheel switches
— Vehicle information display switches
(P. 2-13)
— Audio control* (P. 4-38)
8.
Meters, gauges, warning/indicator lights,
vehicle information display (P. 2-2, P. 2-4,
P. 2-13)
9.
Steering wheel switches*
— Cruise control* (P. 5-36)
— Speed limiter* (P. 5-38)
— Mobile phone integration for FM-AM radio
with CD player without navigation* (P. 4-39)
— Mobile phone integration for
NissanConnect* *
1
(P. 4-38)
10.
Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-15)
11.
Glove box (P. 2-42)
* where fitted
*
1
Refer to the separately provided NissanConnect
Owner’s Manual.
NPA1249
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
1.
Tachometer (P. 2-2),
— Warning/indicator lights (P. 2-4)
2.
Vehicle information display (P. 2-13)
3.
Speedometer (P. 2-2)
— Warning/indicator lights (P. 2-4)
4.
Fuel gauge (P. 2-2)
5.
Engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 2-3)
NPA1250
METERS AND GAUGES
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
HRA2DDT ENGINE
1.
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
2.
Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)
3.
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (RHD) models) (P. 8-14)
4.
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
5.
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
6.
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (LHD) models) (P. 8-14)
7.
Battery (P. 8-16)
8.
Air cleaner filter (P. 8-23)
9.
Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-25)
NPA1285
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Illustrated table of contents 0-11
MR20DD ENGINE
1.
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
2.
Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)
3.
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (RHD) models) (P. 8-14)
4.
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
5.
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
6.
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (LHD) models) (P. 8-14)
7.
Battery (P. 8-16)
8.
Air cleaner filter (P. 8-23)
9.
Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-25)
NPA1286
0-12 Illustrated table of contents
K9K ENGINE
1.
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
2.
Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)
3.
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
models), (P. 8-14)
4.
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
5.
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
models), (P. 8-14)
6.
Battery (P. 8-16)
7.
Air cleaner filter (P. 8-23)
8.
Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-25)
NPA1283
Illustrated table of contents 0-13
R9M ENGINE
1.
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
2.
Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)
3.
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (RHD) models) (P. 8-14)
4.
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
5.
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
6.
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (LHD) models) (P. 8-14)
7.
Battery (P. 8-16)
8.
Air cleaner filter (P. 8-23)
9.
Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-25)
NPA1284
0-14 Illustrated table of contents
1 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats....................................................................... 1-2
Front seats ......................................................... 1-3
Seat heater (where fitted) ................................... 1-4
Rear seats .......................................................... 1-5
Armrests (where fitted) ....................................... 1-5
Head restraints ........................................................ 1-6
Adjustable head restraint components................. 1-6
Non-adjustable head restraint components.......... 1-6
Remove .............................................................. 1-7
Install.................................................................. 1-7
Adjust................................................................. 1-7
Seat belts ................................................................ 1-8
Precautions on seat belt usage ........................... 1-8
Child safety ........................................................ 1-9
Pregnant women ................................................ 1-10
Injured persons................................................... 1-10
Seat belt warnings.............................................. 1-10
Three-point type seat belt.................................... 1-11
Seat belt maintenance ........................................ 1-12
Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................................. 1-13
Child safety ............................................................. 1-14
Infants ................................................................ 1-14
Small children..................................................... 1-14
Larger children ................................................... 1-15
Legal requirements ............................................. 1-15
Child restraints ........................................................ 1-15
Precautions on child restraints ............................ 1-15
Child restraint and ISOFIX information................ 1-16
ISOFIX child restraint system.............................. 1-21
Child restraint anchorage.................................... 1-22
Child restraint installation using ISOFIX .............. 1-23
Child restraint installation using three-point
type seat belt ...................................................... 1-25
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..................... 1-29
Precautions on Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)..................................................... 1-29
Supplemental air bag systems ............................ 1-33
Repair and replacement procedure ..................... 1-37
WARNING
•
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.
The shoulder belt will not be against your
body. In an accident, you could be thrown into
it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
•
For the most effective protection when the
vehicle is in motion, the seat should be up-
right. Always sit well back in the seat with
both feet on the floor and adjust the seat prop-
erly. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
later in this section.
•
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
The seat may move suddenly and could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
•
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to
make sure it is securely locked.
•
The seatback should not be reclined any more
than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most
effective when the passenger sits well back
and upright in the seat. If the seatback is re-
clined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt
and being injured is increased.
•
When returning the seatbacks to the upright
position, be certain that they are completely
secured in the latched position. If they are not
completely secured, passengers may be in-
jured in an accident or sudden stop. When
operating the seatback release always rock
the seatback afterward to check that it is
locked.
•
When the vehicle is being used to carry cargo,
properly secure all cargo to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could cause per-
sonal injury.
•
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area
or on the rear seat when it is in the folded-
down position. Use of these areas by passen-
gers without proper restraints could result in
serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to
contact any moving parts to avoid possible inju-
ries and/or damage.
SSS0133Z
Sit upright and well back
SEATS
1-2 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
FRONT SEATS
Manual seat adjustment
Forward and backward:
Pull the lever
j1 up and hold it while sliding the seat
forward or backward to the preferred position. Re-
lease the lever to lock the seat in position.
Reclining:
To recline the seatback pull and hold the lever
j2
up, keeping the lever fully lifted, and lean back. To
bring the seatback forward pull and hold the lever
up, keeping the lever fully lifted, and lean forward.
Keep the lever fully lifted whilst adjusting the seat-
back. Release the lever when the seatback is statio-
nery and in the desired recline position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seat-
back for occupants of different sizes for added com-
fort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit, see “Pre-
cautions on seat belt usage” later in this section.
Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occu-
pants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the
vehicle is in the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) posi-
tion with the parking brake applied.
Seat lifter (where fitted):
Repeatedly pull up or push down the adjusting lever
j3 , to adjust the seat height to the desired position.
Head restraints:
Push and hold the lock knob
j4 to remove, install,
or (where possible) adjust the head restraints. For
proper adjustment see “Head restraints” later in this
section.
Lumbar support (where fitted):
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver. Move the adjusting lever
j5
forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area
until the desired position is achieved.
NPA1252
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Power seat adjustment (where fitted)
WARNING
Never leave children or adults who would nor-
mally require the support of others alone in the
vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They
could unknowingly activate switches or controls
and inadvertently become involved in a serious
accident and injure themselves.
Operating tips:
•
The power seat motor has an auto-reset over-
load protection circuit. If the motor stops during
the seat adjustment, wait 30 seconds, then reac-
tivate the switch.
•
To avoid discharge of the battery, do not operate
the power seats for a long period of time when
the engine is not running.
Forward and backward:
Move the adjusting switch
j1 forward or backward
to the desired position.
Reclining:
Move the adjusting switch
j2 forward or backward
to the desired position.
The reclining feature allows the adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes to help
obtain the proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on
seat belt usage” later in this section.)
The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to
rest when the vehicle is parked.
Seat lifter (where fitted):
Pull the adjusting switch
j1 up or push down to
adjust the seat height until the desired position is
achieved.
SEAT HEATER (where fitted)
CAUTION
•
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
the battery could run down if the seat heater
is operated while the engine is not running.
•
Avoid using the seat heater for any longer than
is necessary, or when the seat is not occu-
pied.
•
Do not put anything on the seat which insu-
lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat
cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become
overheated.
•
Do not place anything hard or heavy on the
seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.
This may result in damage to the seat heater.
•
Any liquid spilled on the seat should be re-
moved immediately with a dry cloth.
•
When cleaning the seat, never use petrol, thin-
ner, or any similar materials.
NPA1253
SIC2770Z
1-4 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
•
If any malfunctions are found or the seat does
not operate, turn the switch off and have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
Heated seats
The seats can be warmed by built-in heaters. The
switches are located on the centre console (for front
seats) and can be operated independently of each
other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select heat range.
•
For high heat, push the “HI” (High) side of the
switch j1.
•
For low heat, push the “LO” (Low) side of the
switch j2.
•
The indicator light j3 will illuminate when low
or high is selected.
3. To turn off the heater push the “HI” or “LO” side
to return the switch to the level position.
Make sure the indicator light turns off.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, auto-
matically turning the heater on and off. The indi-
cator light will remain on as long as the switch is
on.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or before
you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the
switch.
REAR SEATS
Folding
The luggage compartment loading capacity can be
increased by folding the rear seats forward.
To fold the seat:
1. Ensure head restraints are properly stowed, see
“Head restraints” later in this section.
2. Release the seatback lock by pressing the latch.
3. Fold the seat forward.
To return the seat to an upright position:
1. Make sure the seat belts are clear of the seat
latch mechanism.
2. Lift the seatback up and push firmly to lock.
3. If the red marker is visible then the seat has not
latched properly — release and then re-latch the
seat.
CAUTION
Always ensure that the seat belt is not trapped in
the release lever or any other vehicle part.
ARMRESTS (where fitted)
1. Front armrest jA
The console box lid can be used as an armrest.
2. Rear armrest
jB
On the rear seat, pull the top of the armrest and
lay it horizontally.
NPA1293
NPA1289
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other vehicle
safety systems. They may provide additional pro-
tection against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions. Adjust the head restraints properly, as
specified in this section. Check the adjustment
after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or remove
the head restraint. Do not use the seat if the
head restraint has been removed. If the head
restraint was removed, reinstall and properly ad-
just the head restraint before an occupant uses
the seating position. Failure to follow these in-
structions can reduce the effectiveness of the
head restraints. This may increase the risk of se-
rious injury or death in a collision.
•
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints.
On the front seats they are adjustable. On the
rear seats, where fitted, they are non-adjustable
but have a lower storage position.
•
Adjustable head restraints have multiple notches
along the stalk to lock them in a desired adjust-
ment position.
•
The non-adjustable head restraints have a single
locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
•
Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head re-
straint so the centre of your ear is approxi-
mately level with the centre of the head re-
straint.
– If your ear position is still higher than the rec-
ommended alignment, place the head
restraint at the highest position.
– For the non-adjustable type, raise into lock-
ing position before use. The seat should not
be occupied with the head restraint in the
lower storage position.
•
If the head restraint has been removed, ensure
that it is reinstalled and locked in place before
riding in that designated seating position.
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
NPA1314
NPA1315
HEAD RESTRAINTS
1-6 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the head
restraint.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint
before an occupant uses the seating position.
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in
the seat. Make sure that the head restraint is fac-
ing the correct direction. The stalk with the ad-
justment notch
j1 must be installed in the hole
with the lock knob j2.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head
restraint down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an oc-
cupant uses the seating position.
ADJUST
For adjustable front head restraint
Adjust the head restraint so the centre is level with
the centre of your ears. If your ear position is still
higher than the recommended alignment, place the
head restraint at the highest position.
For non-adjustable head restraint
Make sure the head restraint is positioned so the
lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in
that designated seating position.
NPA1316 NPA1317 SSS0997Z
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Raise
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted,
and you are sitting upright and well back in your
seat, your chances of being injured or killed in an
accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly
reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all
of your passengers to buckle up every time you
drive, regardless of whether or not your seating po-
sition includes a supplemental air bag.
WARNING
Be sure to observe the following warnings when
using seat belts. Failure to do so could increase
the chance and/or severity of injury in an acci-
dent.
•
Every person who drives or rides in this ve-
hicle should use a seat belt at all times. Chil-
dren should be properly restrained in the rear
seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.
•
The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a
snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the ef-
fectiveness of the entire restraint system and
increase the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can occur if
the seat belt is not worn properly.
•
Always route the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
the belt behind your back, under your arm or
across your neck. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
•
Position the lap belt as low and snug as pos-
sible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A
lap belt worn too high could increase the risk
of internal injuries in an accident.
•
Seatbelts are designed to bear upon the bony
structure of the body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing
the lap section of the belt across the abdomi-
nal area must be avoided.
NPA1318
NPA1319
SSS0136Z
Sit upright and well back
SSS0134Z
Sit upright and well back
SEAT BELTS
1-8 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
•
No modifications or additions should be made
by the user which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from operating to re-
move slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly
from being adjusted to remove slack.
•
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as
possible, consistent with comfort, to provide
the protection for which they have been de-
signed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
•
Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fas-
tened to the proper buckle.
•
Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted.
Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
•
Do not allow more than one person to use the
same seat belt.
•
Never carry more people in the vehicle than
there are seat belts.
•
Each belt assembly must only be used by one
occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around
a child being carried on the occupant’s lap.
•
If the seat belt warning light illuminates con-
tinuously while the ignition switch is in the ON
position, with all doors closed, and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction
in the system. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
•
No changes should be made to the seat belt
system. For example, do not modify the seat
belt, add material, or install devices that may
change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing
so may affect the operation of the seat belt
system. Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious personal in-
jury.
•
Once a seat belt pre-tensioner has been acti-
vated, it cannot be reused and must be re-
placed together with the retractor. See a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
•
Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner
seat belt system components should be done
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
•
All seat belt assemblies, including retractors
and attaching hardware, should be inspected
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop af-
ter any collision. NISSAN recommends that
all seat belt assemblies in use during a colli-
sion be replaced unless the collision was mi-
nor and the belts show no damage and con-
tinue to operate properly. Seat belt assem-
blies not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
•
All child restraints and attaching hardware
should be inspected after any collision. Al-
ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-
spection instructions and replacement rec-
ommendations. The child restraints should be
replaced if they are damaged.
•
It is essential to replace the entire assembly
after it has been worn in a severe impact even
if damage to the assembly is not obvious.
•
Care should be taken to avoid contamination
of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemi-
cals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning
may safely be carried out using mild soap and
water. The belt should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.
CHILD SAFETY
Infants or small children
NISSAN recommends that infants or small children
should be seated in a child restraint on the rear
seats if available. According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. See “Child restraints”
later in this section. You should choose a child re-
straint system which fits your vehicle and always fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
SSS0099Z
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Children
Children who are too large for child restraints should
be seated and restrained by the seat belts that are
provided.
The use of a booster seat (commercially available)
may help to avoid the shoulder belt coming across
the face or neck area of a child’s seating position.
The booster seat should raise the child so that the
shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top,
middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low
on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle’s
seat. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt
is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the
shoulder belt without the booster seat.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and
do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the
vehicle is moving.
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never
put the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area.
Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat
belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doc-
tor for specific recommendations.
SEAT BELT WARNINGS
Driver and front passenger
The seat belt warning lights j1 , located in the in-
strument panel, will light up if the driver and/or front
passenger seat belts have not been fastened. See
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section for further
details.
Dependant on the vehicle specification the seat belt
warning lights, located in the instrument control
panel, will either:
•
Alert only the driver when his/her seat belt is not
securely fastened.
•
Alert the driver and/or front passenger when a
seat belt is not securely fastened.
Rear passengers
The rear passenger seat belt warning (where fitted)
j1 is shown in the vehicle information display see
“Vehicle information display” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.
The seat belt warning alerts the driver and/or front
passenger if a (rear) seat belt is not securely fas-
tened. The seat belt warning shows a filled circle
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and an empty circle when the related seat belt has
been securely fastened, or after approximately 35
seconds after engine start, or when acknowledged
by the driver pushing the steering wheel switch
<ENTER> (where fitted).
NOTE
•
If there is a change in rear seat belt status
during a journey then the applicable symbol
for any unbuckled seat will show again for a
further 35 seconds.
•
The front passenger seat belt warning light
will not illuminate if the seat is unoccupied.
•
A chime will sound unless the front passen-
ger seat belt is securely fastened when the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (15 MPH).
The chime will stop after approximately 90
seconds.
NPA1294
1-10 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WARNING
•
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.
The shoulder belt will not be against your
body. In an accident, you could be thrown into
it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
•
For the most effective protection when the
vehicle is in motion, the seat should be up-
right. Always sit well back in the seat with
both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt
properly.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” earlier in this sec-
tion.)
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and
insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear
and feel the latch engage.
•
The retractor is designed to lock during a
sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling
motion permits the belt to move and al-
lows you some freedom of movement in
the seat.
•
If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its
fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt
and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt
out of the retractor.
3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on
the hips as shown
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retrac-
tor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is routed over your shoulder and across your
chest.
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the
buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.
SSS0292Z SSS0290Z
SSS0326Z
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
•
When the belt is pulled quickly from the retrac-
tor.
•
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check
the operation as follows:
•
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly.
The retractor should lock and restrict further belt
movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or if
you have any questions about seat belt operation,
see a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(where fitted)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted
to the position that is best for you. (See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)
To adjust, push (squeeze) the adjustment button
j1 , and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the
preferred position j2 so that the belt passes over
the centre of the shoulder. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not falling off of your
shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the
shoulder belt anchor into position.
WARNING
•
After adjustment, release the adjustment but-
ton and then try to move the shoulder belt
anchor up and down to make sure that it is
securely fixed in position.
•
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position that is best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness
of the entire restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an accident.
Centre of rear seat
Selecting the correct seat buckle:
The centre seat belt buckle is identified by the
CENTRE mark
jA . The centre seat belt tongue must
only be fastened into the centre seat belt buckle.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
•
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild
soap solution or any solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then wipe with a
cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade.
Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.
NPA1254
LVR0006XZ
1-12 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
•
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of
the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract
slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean,
dry cloth.
•
Periodically check to see that the seat belt
and the metal components, such as buckles,
tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors,
work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts
or other damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.
WARNING
•
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused
after activation. It must be replaced together
with the retractor as a unit.
•
If the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision
but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure
to have the pre-tensioner system checked
and, if necessary, replaced by a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop.
•
No unauthorised changes should be made to
any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner
seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental
activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or
damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt opera-
tion. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat
belt system may result in serious personal in-
jury.
•
Work on and around the pre-tensioner system
should be done by an authorised NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop. Installation of
electrical equipment should also be done by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Unau-
thorised electrical test equipment and prob-
ing devices should not be used on the pre-
tensioner seat belt system.
•
If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or
scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop. Correct pre-tensioner
disposal procedures are set forth in the ap-
propriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect
disposal procedures could cause personal in-
jury.
The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system is acti-
vated in conjunction with the front air bag system. It
helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle is in-
volved in certain types of collisions by restraining
the seat occupants via the seat belt retractor.
The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’s
retractor. These seat belts are used in the same way
as conventional seat belts.
Additionally, the driver’s side pre-tensioner seat belt
system is also equipped with a lap pre-tensioner.
Both the retractor pre-tensioner and lap pre-ten-
sioner provide significant protection against injury in
an accident and increase the safety performance of
your vehicle.
When the pre-tensioner seat belt system activates,
smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.
The smoke is harmless, but care should be taken
not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START
position, the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
air bag warning light will illuminate. The SRS air bag
warning light will turn off after approximately 7 sec-
onds if the system is operational. If any of the follow-
ing conditions occur, the air bag and/or pre-ten-
sioner seat belt need servicing and your vehicle must
be taken to the nearest NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop.
PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
SYSTEM
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
•
The air bag warning light remains on after ap-
proximately 7 seconds.
•
The air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
•
The air bag warning light does not come on at
all.
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Re-
straint System (SRS) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt
may not function properly. It must be checked and
repaired.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you in-
form the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt sys-
tem and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this manual,
child safety information is available from many other
sources, including doctors, teachers, government
traffic safety offices, and community organisations.
Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best
way to transport your child.
There are two basic types of child restraint system:
•
Rear-facing child restraints
•
Front-facing child restraints
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than
9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints.
Front-facing child restraints are available for chil-
dren who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and
are at least 1 year old.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The
vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly.
The shoulder belt may come too close to the
face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their
small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury.
Always use appropriate child restraints.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the ISOFIX child restraint system or
with the vehicle seat belt, see “Child restraints” later
in this section for more information.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and chil-
dren be restrained in the rear seat. According to
accident statistics, children are safer when prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat than in the front
seat.
This is especially important because your vehicle
has a supplemental restraint system (air bag sys-
tem) for the front passenger. (See “Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS)” later in this section.)
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in
a rear-facing child restraint. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least
9 kg can be placed in a front-facing child restraint.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for mini-
mum and maximum weight and height recommen-
dations. You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children who are too large for a child restraint sys-
tem should be seated and restrained by the seat
belts that are provided. If the child’s seating position
has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or
neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially avail-
able) may help overcome this. The booster seat
should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is
CHILD SAFETY
1-14 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
properly positioned across the top, middle portion
of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips.
The booster seat should also fit the vehicle seat.
Once the child has grown so that the shoulder belt
is no longer on or near the face or neck of the child,
use the shoulder belt without the booster seat. In
addition, there are many types of child restraint sys-
tem available for larger children that should be used
for maximum protection.
LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
Check any legal requirements applicable in your lo-
cation. For example, the U.K. has legal requirements
to use child restraints based on height and age, see
“Child restraints” later in this section for more infor-
mation
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
•
Infants and small children should always be
placed in an appropriate child restraint sys-
tem while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use
a child restraint system can result in serious
injury or death.
•
Infants and small children should never be
carried on your lap. It is not possible for even
the strongest adult to resist the forces of a
severe accident. The child could be crushed
between the adult and parts of the vehicle.
Also, do not put the same seat belt around a
child and yourself.
•
Infants and children need special protection.
The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them prop-
erly. The shoulder belt may come too close to
the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over
their small hip bones. In an accident, an im-
properly fitting seat belt could cause serious
or fatal injury.
•
NISSAN recommends that the child restraint
system be installed in the rear seat. Accord-
ing to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seat
rather than in the front seat.
•
Child restraint systems specially designed for
infants and small children are available from
several manufacturers. When selecting any
child restraint systems, place your child in the
child restraint system and check the various
adjustments to be sure that the child restraint
system is compatible with your child. Always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for in-
stallation and use.
•
Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select
one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may
not be possible to properly install some types
of child restraint in your vehicle.
•
Check the child restraint system in your ve-
hicle to be sure that it is compatible with the
vehicle’s seat belt system.
•
For a front-facing child restraint system,
check to make sure the shoulder belt does
not fit close to child’s face or neck.
SSS0099Z
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys-
tem on the front passenger seat without first
deactivating the passenger air bag with the
front passenger air bag switch (where fitted),
see “Front passenger air bag switch (where
fitted)” later in this section. In a frontal colli-
sion, supplemental front-impact air bags in-
flate with great force. An inflating supplemen-
tal front-impact air bag could seriously injure
or kill your child.
•
Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to
fit the child restraint system, but as upright as
possible.
•
If the seat belt in the position where a child
restraint system is installed requires a locking
device and if it is not used, injuries could re-
sult from a child restraint system tipping over
during normal vehicle braking or cornering.
•
After attaching a child restraint system, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side and tug it forward to make sure
that it is held securely in place. The child re-
straint system should not move more than 25
mm (1 in). If the restraint is not secure, tighten
the belt as necessary, or install the restraint in
another seat and test it again.
•
If a child restraint system is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being injured in a
collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.
•
Improper use of a child restraint system can
increase the risk or severity of injury for both
the child and other occupants in the vehicle.
•
When the child restraint system is not in use,
keep it secured with the ISOFIX child restraint
system or a seat belt to prevent it from being
thrown around in case of a sudden stop or
accident.
NISSAN recommends that infants and small chil-
dren be seated in a child restraint system. You
should choose a child restraint system that fits your
vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for installation and use. In addition, there
are many types of child restraint systems available
for larger children that should be used for maximum
protection.
CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed
vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing your child in
a child restraint.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND ISOFIX
INFORMATION
When selecting any child restraint, keep the follow-
ing points in mind:
•
Choose a child restraint that complies with the
latest European safety standard, ECE Regula-
tion 44.04.
•
Place your child in the child restraint and check
the various adjustments to be sure the child re-
straint is compatible with your child. Always fol-
low all of the recommended procedures.
•
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with vehicle’s seat belt sys-
tem.
•
Refer to the tables later in this section for a list of
the recommended fitment positions and the ap-
proved child restraints for your vehicle.
1-16 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Approved universal child restraint positions
Mass group
Suitability
Front passenger
seat
Air bag ON
Front passenger
seat
Air bag OFF
Rear outer seat Rear centre seat
0 <10 kg X U U X
0+ <13 kg X
j1 U/Lj2 j1 U/Lj2X
I 9 to 18 kg X
j3U j3U X
II 15 to 25 kg X j4UF j4 UF/Lj5X
III 22 to 36 kg X j6UF j6 UF/Lj7X
X: Not suitable for child restraint system
U: Suitable for universal category child restraint system approved for this weight (mass) group
UF: Suitable for forward-facing universal category child restraint system approved for this weight (mass) group
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given in the following table or vehicle list of child restraint manufacturer
j# : The circled numbers in the table above correspond to the circled numbers in the following table
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
List of suitable Child Restraint Systems (CRS)
Mass group
Suitability
Name of CRS Fixture of CRS Facing position
Front seat lifter
position
0 <10 kg - - -
0+ <13 kg
j1 Maxi Cosi
Cabrio Fix
Belt mounted Rear facing
j2 Maxi Cosi
Cabrio Fix plus
Easy Fix
Belt mounted +
base and sup-
port leg
Rear facing
Without lifter
only
I 9 to 18 kg
j3 Römer King
plus
Belt mounted Front facing
II 15 to 25 kg
j4 Römer Kid fix Belt mounted Front facing Highest
j5 Römer Kid fix
Belt mounted +
ISOFIX
Front facing N/A
III 22 to 36 kg
j6 Römer Kid fix Belt mounted Front facing Highest
j7 Römer Kid fix
Belt mounted +
ISOFIX
Front facing N/A
1-18 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Approved ISOFIX child restraint positions
Mass group
Suitability
Front passenger seat Rear outer seat Rear centre seat
Carry-cot
F ISO/L1 X X X
G ISO/L2 X X X
0 (< 10 kg) E ISO/R1 X IL X
0+ (< 13 kg)
E ISO/R1 X IL
j8X
D ISO/R2 X IL X
C ISO/R3 X IL
j9X
I(9to18kg)
D ISO/R2 X IL X
C ISO/R3 X IL
j9X
B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF X
B1 ISO/F2X X
j10 IL, IUF j11 X
A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF X
II (15 to 25 kg) X IL, IUF X
III (22 to 36 kg) X IL, IUF X
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system
IUF: Suitable for universal category forward-facing child restraint system approved for this weight (mass) group
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX category child restraint system (CRS) given in the following table or vehicle list of child
restraint manufacturer
j# : The circled numbers in the table above correspond to the circled numbers in the following table
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
List of suitable ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems (CRS)
Mass group Name of CRS Facing position Category
0+ (<13 kg) E ISO/R1
Maxi Cosi Cabrio
Fix plus Easy Fix
Base
Rear facing Semi-universal
j8
0+ /1 (<18
kg)
E ISO/R3
BeSafe iZi Kid X3
Isofix
Rear facing Semi-universal
j9
I (9 to 18 kg) B1 ISO/F2X
Maxi Cosi pearl
plus family fix
Front facing Semi-universal
j10
Römer Duo plus Front facing Universalj11
1-20 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
List of approved Child Restraint Systems (CRS)
WARNING
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys-
tem on the front passenger seat without first
deactivating the passenger air bag with the
front passenger air bag switch (where fitted),
see “Front passenger air bag switch (where
fitted)” later in this section. In a frontal colli-
sion, supplemental front-impact air bags in-
flate with great force. An inflating supplemen-
tal front-impact air bag could seriously injure
or kill your child.
•
In vehicles equipped with a side air bag sys-
tem, do not let any infants or small children sit
in the front passenger seat as the air bag may
cause serious injury in case of deployment
during a collision.
NOTE
Child restraints approved to ECE Regulation NO.
44.04 are clearly marked with the categories such
as Universal, Semi-universal or ISOFIX.
ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points
that are used with ISOFIX child restraint systems.
ISOFIX lower anchor point locations
The ISOFIX anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outer seating positions
only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in
the centre position using the ISOFIX anchors.
Age group
Size
Class
Name of
CRS
Fixture of CRS Facing position Category
0<13kg
(Group 0+)
E
Maxi Cosi
Cabriofix
EasyFix ISO Base
with Support Leg
Rear Semi-universal
9to18kg
(Group I)
B1
Britax Römer
Duo
ISO/FX2 Top Tether Front Universal
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
The ISOFIX anchor points are located, under cov-
ers labelled ISOFIX, at the bottom of the rear seat
cushions. To access an ISOFIX anchor point insert
your finger into the cover and pull the cover off.
CAUTION
Store the loose ISOFIX covers to avoid losing
them and somewhere where they will not get
damaged, for example, in the console box see
“Console box” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
ISOFIX child restraint anchor
attachments
ISOFIX child restraints include two rigid attach-
ments that can be connected to two anchors lo-
cated in the seat. Check your child restraint for a
label stating that it is compatible with the ISOFIX
child restraints. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint manufac-
turer.
ISOFIX child restraints generally require the use of
a top tether strap or other anti-rotation devices such
as support legs. When installing ISOFIX child re-
straints, carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual and those supplied with the child re-
straints. See “ISOFIX child restraint system” later in
this section.
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHORAGE
Your vehicle is designed to accommodate a child
restraint system on the rear seat. When installing a
child restraint system, carefully read and follow the
instructions in this manual and those supplied with
the child restraint system.
WARNING
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult seat
belts, harnesses or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly installed
using the damaged anchorage, and a child
could be seriously injured or killed in a colli-
sion.
•
The child restraint top tether strap may be
damaged by contact with the parcel shelf or
items in the luggage area. Remove the parcel
shelf from the vehicle or secure it and any
luggage see “Parcel shelf” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section. Your child could
be seriously injured or killed in a collision if
the top tether strap is damaged.
NPA1290
ISOFIX anchor point locations
NPA1291
ISOFIX cover removal
SSS0644Z
Anchor attachment
1-22 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Anchorage location
The anchor points are located on the seatback be-
hind the rear outer seating positions and should only
be used for child restraints in the rear outer posi-
tions.
For Australia:
An additional centre anchor point (where fitted) is
located on the centre seatback.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING ISOFIX
WARNING
•
Attach ISOFIX child restraints only at the
specified locations. For the ISOFIX lower an-
chor locations, see “ISOFIX lower anchor
point locations” earlier in this section. If a child
restraint is not secured properly, your child
could be seriously injured or killed in an acci-
dent.
•
Do not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap to seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.
•
Do not secure a child restraint in the centre
rear seating position using the ISOFIX lower
anchors. The child restraint will not be se-
cured properly.
•
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your
fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling
to make sure there are no obstructions over
the ISOFIX anchors, such as seat belt web-
bing or seat cushion material. The child re-
straint will not be secured properly if the
ISOFIX anchors are obstructed.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stance are they to be used for adult seat belts,
harnesses or for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
Installation on rear outer seats
Front-facing:
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the
rear outer seats using ISOFIX:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat
j1.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to
the ISOFIX lower anchors
j2.
3. The back of the child restraint should be secured
against the vehicle seat back. If necessary, ad-
just or remove the head restraint to obtain the
correct child restraint fit. (See “Head restraints”
earlier in this section.) If the head restraint is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to
install the head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper child restraint fit, try another seat-
ing position or a different child restraint.
NPA1292
NPA1358
SSS0646AZ
Steps 1 and 2
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
4. Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child
restraint firmly tightened; press downward j3
and rearward
j4 firmly in the centre of the child
restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle
seat cushion and seatback.
5. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether
strap, route the top tether strap and secure the
tether strap to the tether anchor point. (See
“Child restraint anchorage” earlier in this sec-
tion.)
6. If the child restraint is equipped with other anti-
rotation devices such as support legs, use them
instead of the top tether strap following the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Test the child restraint before you place the child
in it
j5 . Push the child restraint from side to side
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
securely in place.
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the child
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 7.
Rear-facing:
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
steps to install a rear-facing child restraint on the
rear outer seats using ISOFIX:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat
j1.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to
the ISOFIX lower anchors
j2.
SSS0754AZ
Step 4
SSS0755AZ
Step 7
SSS0649AZ
Steps 1 and 2
SSS0756AZ
Step 3
1-24 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
3. Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child
restraint firmly tightened; press downward j3
and rearward
j4 firmly in the centre of the child
restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle
seat cushion and seatback. If any contact occurs
between the child restraint and the front seat,
slide the front seat forward until contact no longer
occurs.
4. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether
strap, route the top tether strap and secure the
tether strap to the tether anchor point. (See
“Child restraint anchorage” earlier in this sec-
tion.)
5. If the child restraint is equipped with other anti-
rotation devices such as support legs, use them
instead of the top tether strap following the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test the child restraint before you place the child
in it
j5 . Push the child restraint from side to side
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
securely in place.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the child
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 6.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT
BELT
Installation on rear seats
Front-facing:
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the
rear seats using 3-point type seat belt without auto-
matic locking mode:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat
j1 . If any
contact occurs between the child restraint and
the front seat, slide the front seat forward until
contact no longer occurs.
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
straint and insert it into the buckle
j2 until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
3. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is
necessary to secure the seat belt in place with
locking devices attached to the child restraint.
SSS0757AZ
Step 6
SSS0758AZ
Step 1
SSS0493AZ
Step 2
SSS0647AZ
Step 4
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
4. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt;
press downward j3 and rearward j4 firmly in
the centre of the child restraint with your knee to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
5. Test the child restraint before you place the child
in it
j5 . Push the child restraint from side to side
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
securely in place.
6. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the child
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5.
Rear-facing:
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
steps to install a rear-facing child restraint on the
rear seats using 3-point type seat belt without auto-
matic locking mode:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat j1.
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
straint and insert it into the buckle
j2 until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
3. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is
necessary to secure the seat belt in place with
locking devices attached to the child restraint.
4. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt;
press downward
j3 and rearward j4 firmly in
the centre of the child restraint with your hand to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
SSS0638AZ
Step 5
SSS0759AZ
Step 1
SSS0654AZ
Step 2
SSS0639AZ
Step 4
SSS0658AZ
Step 5
1-26 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Test the child restraint before you place the child
in it j5 . Push the child restraint from side to side
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
securely in place.
6. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the child
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5.
Installation on front passenger’s seat
WARNING
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys-
tem on the front passenger seat without first
deactivating the passenger air bag with the
front passenger air bag switch (where fitted),
see “Front passenger air bag switch (where
fitted)” later in this section. In a frontal colli-
sion, supplemental front-impact air bags in-
flate with great force. An inflating supplemen-
tal front-impact air bag could seriously injure
or kill your child.
•
Never install a child restraint with a top tether
strap on the front seat.
•
NISSAN recommends that a child restraint be
installed on the rear seat. However, if you
must install a child restraint on the front pas-
senger’s seat, move the passenger’s seat to
the rearmost position.
•
Child restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore must
not be used on the front passenger’s seat
when the front passenger’s air bag has not
been deactivated.
Front-facing:
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the
front passenger’s seat using a 3-point type seat belt
without automatic locking mode:
1. Turn off the front passenger air bag using the
front passenger air bag switch. (See “Supple-
mental Restraint System (SRS)” later in this sec-
tion.) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
and make sure that the front air bag status light
illuminates.
SSS0300AZ
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
2. Move the seat to the rearmost position j1.
3. Adjust the head restraint to its highest position
j2 . Remove it if it interferes with the child re-
straint installation. In such situations, securely
store the head restraint in the luggage compart-
ment so that it does not become a dangerous
projectile during a sudden stop or in an accident.
4. Position the child restraint in the seat.
5. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
straint and insert it into the buckle
j3 until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
6. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is
necessary to secure the seat belt in place with
locking devices attached to the child restraint.
7. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt;
press downward
j4 and rearward j5 firmly in
the centre of the child restraint with your knee to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
8. Test the child restraint before you place the child
in it
j6 . Push the child restraint from side to side
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
securely in place.
9. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the child
restraint is loose, repeat steps 5 through 8.
Rear facing:
If you must install a child restraint system in the front
seat, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the front passenger air bag using the
front passenger air bag switch. (See “Supple-
mental Restraint System (SRS)” later in this sec-
tion.) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
and make sure that the front air bag status light
illuminates.
SSS0627Z
Steps 2 and 3
SSS0360CZ
Step 5
SSS0647BZ
Step 7
SSS0302GZ
Step 8
1-28 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2. Move the seat to the rearmost position.
3. Adjust the head restraint to its highest position.
Remove it if it interferes with the child restraint
installation. In such situations, securely store the
head restraint in the luggage compartment so
that it does not become a dangerous projectile
during a sudden stop or in an accident.
4. Position the child restraint system in the front
passenger seat.
Always follow the child restraint system manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.
5. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
straint system and insert it into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
To prevent slack in the lap belt, secure the shoul-
der belt in place with a locking clip
jA . Use a
locking clip attached to the child restraint sys-
tem, or one which is equivalent in dimensions
and strength.
Be sure to follow the child restraint system
manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
6. Slide the seat forwards so that the seat belt fully
tightens the child restraint system and the child
restraint reaches the vehicle dashboard.
7. Test the child restraint system before you place
the child in it. Check that it does not tilt too far
from side to side. Try to tug it forwards and check
if it is held securely in place.
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section
contains important information concerning the driv-
er’s and passenger’s supplemental front impact air
bags, front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bags, roof-mounted curtain side-impact air bags,
and pre-tensioner seat belts.
Supplemental front-impact air bag
system
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the head and chest area of the driver and/or front
passenger in certain frontal collisions. The supple-
mental front-impact air bag is designed to inflate on
the front where the vehicle is impacted.
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system
(where fitted)
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the chest and pelvis areas of the driver and front
passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The front
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag is
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
SSS0627Z
Steps 2 and 3
SSS0513Z
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag system
(where fitted)
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the head of the driver and passengers in front and
rear outer seating positions in certain side-impact
collisions. The roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag is designed to inflate on the
side where the vehicle is impacted.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash pro-
tection provided by the driver and front passenger
seat belts and is not designed to substitute them.
Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated a suitable dis-
tance away from the steering wheel, instrument
panel and front door finishers. For additional infor-
mation, see “Seat belts” earlier in this section.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON or
START position, the air bag warning light will illu-
minate. The air bag warning light will turn off
after approximately 7 seconds if the system is
operational. See “Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section for further details.
The air bag will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or START position.
Driver and front passenger air bags:
WARNING
•
The supplemental front-impact air bags ordi-
narily will not inflate in the event of a side
impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower sever-
ity frontal collision. Always wear the seat belts
to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in
accidents.
•
The seat belts and the supplemental front-im-
pact air bags are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the seat. The
front-impact air bags inflate with great force.
If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
ting sideways, or out of position in any way,
you are at greater risk of injury or death in an
accident. You may also receive serious or fa-
tal injuries from the supplemental front-im-
pact air bag if you are up against it when it
inflates. Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the steering
wheel. Always use the seat belts.
WARNING
•
Never install a child restraint system in the
front seat. An inflating supplemental front-im-
pact air bag could seriously injure or kill your
child (see “Air bag warning labels” later in this
section).
•
Children may be severely injured or killed
when the air bags inflate if they are not prop-
erly restrained see “Child restraints” earlier in
this section.
•
Never let children ride unrestrained or extend
their hands or face out of the window. Do not
attempt to hold them in your lap or arms.
NPA926Z
Correct (rear) seating positions
SSS0100Z
1-30 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Side and curtain air bags (where fitted):
WARNING
•
The front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bags ordinarily
will not inflate in the event of a front impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity side
collision. Always wear the seat belts to help
reduce the risk or severity of injury in acci-
dents.
•
The seat belts, the front seat-mounted side-
impact supplemental air bags and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bags are most effective when you are sit-
ting well back and upright in the seat. The
front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-
tal air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-im-
pact supplemental air bags inflate with great
force. If you and your passengers are unre-
strained, leaning forward, sitting sideways, or
out of position in any way, you and your pas-
sengers are at greater risk of injury or death in
an accident.
•
Do not allow anyone to place their hands, legs,
or face near the front seat-mounted side-im-
pact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted
curtain side-impact supplemental air bags on
the sides of the seatback of the front seats or
near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone
sitting in the front seats or rear outer seats to
extend their hands out of the windows or lean
against the doors.
•
When sitting in the rear seats, do not hold
onto the seatback of the front seats. If the
front seat-mounted side impact supplemental
air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-im-
pact supplemental air bags inflate, you may
be seriously injured. Be especially careful with
children, who should always be properly re-
strained.
•
Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks.
They may interfere with the front seat-
mounted side-impact supplemental air bag in-
flations.
NOTE
For an overview see “Seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” in the “0. Illustrated table of
contents” section.
Pre-tensioner seat belt system
The pre-tensioner seat belt system may activate with
the supplemental air bag system in certain types of
collisions.
Working with the seat belt retractor and anchor, it
helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle
becomes involved in certain types of collisions, help-
ing to restrain front seat occupants. See “Pre-ten-
sioner seat belt system” earlier in this section.
Air bag warning labels
j
1
SRS air bag warning label: The warning label
is located on the surface of the front pas-
senger sun visor.
j2
SRS front passenger air bag warning label:
The warning label is located on the outer side
of the instrument panel (passenger side).
j3
SRS side air bag warning label: The warning
label is located on the side of the passenger
side centre pillar. Tags are also sewn into the
front seat covers.
SRS front-impact passenger air bag:
The warning label
j1 is located on the sun visor.
“NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of
it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.”
NPA1155
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children
aged 12 and under. Always use seat belts and
child restraints. For maximum safety protection
in all types of crashes, you must always wear
your safety belt. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the airbag. Do not place any objects over
the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. If
the airbag warning light stays on or is flashing
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion, go to a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop. Airbags can only be removed or disposed
of by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Be sure to read the “AIRBAG LABEL” description
at the end of this manual.
In vehicles equipped with a front-impact passenger
air bag system, use a rear-facing child restraint sys-
tem only on the rear seats.
When installing a child restraint system in your ve-
hicle, always follow the child restraint system manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation. For informa-
tion, see “Child restraints” earlier in this section.
SRS air bag warning light
The SRS air bag warning light, displaying in
the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the
supplemental front-impact air bag, front seat-
mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (where
fitted), supplemental curtain side-impact air bags
(where fitted), and pre-tensioner seat belt systems.
The circuits monitored by the SRS air bag warning
light are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sen-
sor, satellite sensors, front impact air bag modules,
front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bag modules (where fitted), roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bag modules (where
fitted), pre-tensioner seat belt systems, and all re-
lated wiring.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates. The air bag warning light will
turn off after approximately 7 seconds if the sys-
tem is operational.
Have the air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat
belt systems serviced at the nearest NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop if any of the following condi-
tions occur:
•
The SRS air bag warning light remains on after
approximately 7 seconds.
•
The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermit-
tently.
•
The SRS air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate at all.
Under these conditions, the air bag systems and/or
pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not operate
properly. They must be checked and repaired. Con-
tact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop imme-
diately.
NPA1295
1-32 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
1.
Crash zone sensor
2.
Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
3.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag modules
4.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bags inflators
5.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
6.
Lap outer pre-tensioner (driver’s side)
7.
Seat belt with pre-tensioners
8.
Satellite sensors
9.
Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
WARNING
•
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
pad. Do not place any objects between the
driver and steering wheel pad. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if a supplemental air bag inflates.
•
Immediately after inflation, several supple-
mental air bag system components will be hot.
Do not touch them: you may severely burn
yourself.
•
No unauthorised changes should be made to
any components or wiring of the supplemen-
tal air bag systems. This is to prevent acci-
dental inflation of the supplemental air bags
or damage to the supplemental air bag sys-
tems.
•
Do not make unauthorised changes to your
vehicle’s electrical system, suspension sys-
tem or front end structure. This could affect
proper operation of the supplemental air bag
systems.
•
Tampering with the supplemental air bag sys-
tems may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the steering
wheel by placing materials over the steering
wheel pad and above, and by installing addi-
tional trim materials around the supplemental
air bag systems.
NIC2170
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
•
Work around and on the supplemental air bag
systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop. The SRS wiring should
not be modified or disconnected. Unautho-
rised electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the supple-
mental air bag systems.
•
The SRS wiring harness connectors are yel-
low and/or orange for easy identification.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys-
tem on the front passenger seat without first
deactivating the passenger air bag with the
front passenger air bag switch (where fitted),
see “Front passenger air bag switch (where
fitted)” later in this section. In a frontal colli-
sion, supplemental front-impact air bags in-
flate with great force. An inflating supplemen-
tal front-impact air bag could seriously injure
or kill your child.
When the air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be
heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke
is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. However,
care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause
irritation and choking. Occupants with a history of
breathing difficulties, such as asthma, should get
fresh air promptly.
Supplemental air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest
of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cush-
ion the impact force to the head of occupants in the
front and rear outer seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause
abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental side air
bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to
the lower body.
Supplemental front-impact air bag
system
The driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag is
located at the centre of the steering wheel. The pas-
senger’s supplemental front-impact air bag is lo-
cated at the instrument panel above the glove box.
The supplemental front-impact air bag system is de-
signed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,
although it may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher severity fron-
tal impact. It may not inflate in certain frontal colli-
sions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper supplemental front-impact air
bag system operation.
WARNING
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system
on the front passenger seat without first deacti-
vating the passenger air bag with the front pas-
senger air bag switch (where fitted), see “Front
passenger air bag switch (where fitted)” later in
this section. In a frontal collision, supplemental
front-impact air bags inflate with great force. An
inflating supplemental front-impact air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child.
For models with front passenger air bag switch:
The front passenger air bag is designed to be turned
off using the front passenger air bag switch, only if
absolutely necessary.
Front passenger air bag status light (where fit-
ted):
SSS0676Z
JVR0264XZ
1-34 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
•
Since your vehicle is equipped with a front
passenger air bag, it is not permitted to install
a rearward facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat unless the front passenger air
bag has been deactivated first.
•
Do not fit a rearward facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the air bag activation/
deactivation system (where fitted) is malfunc-
tioning. Your vehicle must immediately be
taken to a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop in such a situation.
The front passenger air bag status lights
and
are located on the instrument panel above the
shift lever.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the front passenger air bag status ON and
OFF lights illuminate and then turn off or remain on
depending on the front passenger air bag status.
•
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position and the front passenger air bag is ac-
tive, both the front passenger air bag status OFF
light
, and the Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) air bag warning light
in the com-
bination meter j1 will turn off after about 7 sec-
onds.
The front passenger air bag status ON light
will illuminate and then turn off after a period of
time when the front passenger air bag switch is
in the ON position.
•
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position and the front passenger air bag is inac-
tive, both the front passenger air bag status ON
light
, and the Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) air bag warning light
in the com-
bination meter j1 will turn on after about 7 sec-
onds.
The front passenger air bag status OFF light
will illuminate and remain on as long as the
front passenger air bag switch is in the OFF
position.
If the front passenger air bag status light operates in
a way other than described above, the front passen-
ger air bag may not function properly. Have the sys-
tem checked, and if necessary repaired, by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly.
Front passenger air bag switch (where fitted):
The front passenger air bag can be turned off with
the front passenger air bag switch
jA located inside
the glove box.
jA
Air bag switch (where fitted)
jB
Left Hand Drive models
jC
Right Hand Drive models
To turn off the front passenger air bag:
1. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position.
2. Open the glove box and insert the key into the
front passenger air bag switch. For Intelligent
Key equipped models, see “Keys” in the “3. Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section for me-
chanical key usage.
3. Push and turn the key to the OFF position.
4. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The
front passenger air bag status OFF light
will illuminate and remain on.
NPA1296
NPA1297
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
To turn on the front passenger air bag:
1. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position.
2. Open the glove box and insert the key into the
front passenger air bag switch.
3. Push and turn the key to the ON position.
4. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The
front passenger air bag status ON light
will
illuminate, and after a period of time, will then
turn off.
Supplemental side–impact air bag
system
The supplemental side air bags are located in the
outside of the seatback of the front seats.
The supplemental side-impact air bag system is de-
signed to inflate in higher severity side collisions,
although it may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher severity side
impact. It may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-
cation of proper supplemental side-impact air bag
system operation.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright, and as far as
is practical, away from the side air bag. The side air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front
occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air
bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the
occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag
modules during inflation. The side air bag will de-
flate quickly after the collision is over.
Supplemental side–impact curtain air
bag system (where fitted)
The supplemental side–impact curtain air bag is lo-
cated in the roof side trims.
The supplemental side–impact curtain air bag sys-
tem is designed to inflate in higher severity side col-
lisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another
type of collision are similar to those of a higher se-
verity side impact. It may not inflate in certain side
collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not al-
ways an indication of proper supplemental curtain
side–impact air bag system operation.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the rear
seat passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof rails.
The curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front and rear occupants. Because of
this, the force of the curtain air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, these air bag modules during infla-
tion. The curtain air bag will deflate quickly after the
collision is over.
WARNING
•
Directly after inflation, several air bag system
components will be hot. Do not touch them;
you may severely burn yourself.
NPA1301 NPA849Z
1-36 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
•
No unauthorised changes should be made to
any components or wiring of the air bag sys-
tem. This is to prevent accidental inflation of
the air bag or damage to the air bag system.
•
Tampering with the air bag system may result
in serious personal injury. Tampering includes
making changes to the steering wheel and
the instrument panel assembly by placing ma-
terial over the steering pad and above the
dashboard, or by installing additional trim ma-
terial around the air bag system.
•
Do not attach any objects to the steering
wheel pad or to the instrument panel. Objects
attached to the steering wheel pad and in-
strument panel may become dangerous pro-
jectiles and cause injury if the air bag inflates.
•
Work on and around the air bag system should
be done by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop. Installation of electrical equipment
should be done by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop. The yellow SRS wiring har-
nesses* should not be modified or discon-
nected. Unauthorised electrical test equip-
ment and probing devices should not be used
on the air bag system.
* SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow
insulation either just before the harness con-
nectors or on the complete harness, for easy
identification.
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE
WARNING
•
Once the air bags have been inflated, the air
bag modules will not function and must be
replaced. The air bag modules must be re-
placed by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop. The inflated air bag modules cannot be
repaired.
•
The air bag systems should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if there
is any damage to the front end portion of the
vehicle.
•
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the air bag system and
guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in
this Owner’s Manual.
•
If you need to dispose of the SRS or scrap the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop. Correct disposal procedures are
set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service
Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could
cause personal injury.
The air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are de-
signed to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a
reminder, unless the SRS air bag warning light is
damaged, the SRS air bag warning light remains
illuminated after inflation has occurred. The repair
and replacement of the SRS should be done only by
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle,
information about the air bags, pre-tensioner seat
belts and related parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The ignition
switch should always be in the LOCK position when
working under the bonnet or inside the vehicle.
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
2 Instruments and controlsInstruments and controls
Meters and gauges.................................................. 2-2
Speedometer...................................................... 2-2
Fuel gauge ......................................................... 2-2
Tachometer ........................................................ 2-2
Engine coolant temperature gauge...................... 2-3
Instrument panel brightness control..................... 2-3
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ........ 2-4
Checking bulbs .................................................. 2-4
Warning lights .................................................... 2-5
Indicator lights .................................................... 2-10
Audible reminders............................................... 2-12
Vehicle information display ....................................... 2-13
How to use the Vehicle Information Display......... 2-14
Startup display.................................................... 2-14
Settings.............................................................. 2-14
Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators............................................................ 2-21
Trip computer ..................................................... 2-27
[Clock] and [outside air temperature].................. 2-29
Traffic sign recognition (where fitted) .................. 2-30
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 2-32
Windscreen........................................................ 2-32
Rear window ...................................................... 2-33
ThermaClear Heated Windscreen button ................. 2-34
ThermaClear Heated Windscreen (where
fitted).................................................................. 2-34
Defogger switch ...................................................... 2-35
Rear window defogger ....................................... 2-35
Outside mirror defogger (where fitted) ................ 2-35
Headlight and turn signal switch............................... 2-36
Headlight switch ................................................. 2-36
Turn signal switch............................................... 2-38
Fog light switch ....................................................... 2-38
Front fog light (where fitted)................................ 2-38
Rear fog light (where fitted)................................. 2-39
Headlight aiming control .......................................... 2-39
Headlight aiming control switch (where fitted) ..... 2-39
Automatic aiming control (LED headlights) .......... 2-40
Headlight cleaner (where fitted) ............................... 2-40
Headlight cleaner switch (where fitted) ............... 2-40
Horn........................................................................ 2-41
Seat heating (where fitted) ....................................... 2-41
Power outlet ............................................................ 2-42
Storage ................................................................... 2-42
Storage trays...................................................... 2-42
Glove box ........................................................... 2-42
Console box ....................................................... 2-43
Cup holders ....................................................... 2-44
Bottle holder....................................................... 2-44
Coat hooks......................................................... 2-44
Map pocket (where fitted)................................... 2-44
Seat pocket (where fitted) ................................... 2-44
Roof rail (where fitted) ........................................ 2-45
Parcel shelf ........................................................ 2-45
Luggage compartment/boot floor (where
fitted).................................................................. 2-47
Luggage hooks................................................... 2-47
Windows ................................................................. 2-48
Power windows.................................................. 2-48
Fixed glass roof (where fitted) .................................. 2-49
Sunshade operation............................................ 2-50
Interior lights............................................................ 2-50
Room light control switch.................................... 2-50
Map lights (where fitted) ..................................... 2-50
Rear room/reading light (where fitted) ................. 2-51
Luggage compartment light ................................ 2-51
Vanity mirror light (where fitted)........................... 2-51
NOTE
For an overview see “Meters and gauges” in the
“0. Illustrated table of contents” section and see
“Instrument and control layout” in the “0. Illus-
trated table of contents” section.
SPEEDOMETER
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed. Scale
resolution on the meter varies with models.
Odometer/twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed in the
vehicle information display when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
The odometer
j1 displays the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer
j2 displays the distance of
individual trips.
Changing twin trip odometer display:
Push the TRIP RESET switch
j3 on the right or left
side of the combination meter panel to change the
display as follows:
TRIP A → TRIP B → ODO → TRIP A
Resetting twin trip odometer:
Push the TRIP RESET switch
j3 for more than 1
second to reset the trip odometer to zero.
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge is active when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turn-
ing, acceleration, or when going uphill or downhill.
The
c symbol indicates that the fuel filler lid is
located on the right side of the vehicle.
NOTE
A low fuel warning comes on in the vehicle infor-
mation display when the fuel level is getting low.
Refuel as soon as it is convenient. There should
be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the
fuel gauge needle reaches the empty level.
The available range or distance to empty is per-
manently shown at the bottom of the vehicle in-
formation display, see “3. [Range] (dte — km or
mile)” later in this section.
CAUTION
Refill the fuel tank before the range displays “0”,
or “---”, and the gauge registers empty.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates the engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute. Do not rev the engine into the
red zone
j1.
Scale resolution on the meter varies with models.
CAUTION
When the engine speed approaches the red zone,
shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the
red zone may cause serious engine damage.
NIC2171
NIC2334
Right-Hand Drive (RHD) (for Left-Hand Drive (LHD) the layout
will be opposite)
NIC2172
METERS AND GAUGES
2-2 Instruments and controls
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The engine coolant temperature should remain
within the normal range
j2.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the out-
side air temperature and driving conditions.
CAUTION
If the gauge exceeds the normal range, stop as
soon as it is safely possible. If the engine has
overheated, continued operation of the vehicle
may seriously damage the engine. See “Engine
overheat” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec-
tion for immediate action.
WARNING
Allow the engine to cool down before removing
the radiator cap to avoid the danger of being
scalded.
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The instrument brightness control switch can be op-
erated when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion. When the switch is operated, the brightness
adjustment mode appears at the bottom of the ve-
hicle information display.
Push the + side of the switch
j2 to brighten the
meter panel lights and instrument panel lights. The
bar
j1 moves to the + side.
Push the - side of the switch j2 to dim the lights.
The bar
j1 moves to the − side.
When the instrument brightness control is not oper-
ated for a few seconds the brightness adjustment
mode no longer appears.
NIC2117
LHD (Left Hand Drive)
NIC2226
RHD (Right Hand Drive)
Instruments and controls 2-3
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn-
ing light
Seat belt (driver and front passenger)
warning light
Front fog light indicator light
Brake warning light (red)
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) air bag warning light
Glow plug indicator light* (Diesel
engine)
Charge warning light Water in fuel filter warning light* High beam assist indicator light*
Forward Emergency Braking system
warning light*
Front passenger air bag status light*
High beam indicator light
Low tyre pressure warning light* Rear fog light indicator light*
Malfunction warning light (red)*
Malfunction indicator light (orange)
4WD mode indicator light (AUTO)*
Side light and headlight indicator
light
Master warning light 4WD mode indicator light (LOCK)* Slip indicator light
NATS security warning light Dipped beam indicator light Trailer direction indicator light
Parking brake warning light Door lock indicator light* Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Power steering warning light
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)
OFF indicator light
*: where fitted
CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fas-
ten the seat belts and turn the ignition switch to the
ON position without starting the engine.
The following lights (where fitted) come on briefly
and then go off:
, , , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-
out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system.
Have the system checked, and repaired promptly by
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed in
the vehicle informational display between the speed-
ometer and tachometer see “Vehicle information
display” later in this section.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
2-4 Instruments and controls
WARNING LIGHTS
Also see “Vehicle information display” later in this
section.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illumi-
nates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine
is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS
is not functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function
is turned off. The brake system then operates nor-
mally, but without anti-lock assistance (see “Brake
system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section).
BRAKE warning light (red)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the light remains illuminated for a few seconds.
If the light illuminates at any other time, it may indi-
cate that the brake system is not functioning prop-
erly. If the BRAKE warning light illuminates, stop the
vehicle immediately and contact a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop.
Low brake fluid warning light:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
light warns of a low brake fluid level. If this warning
light illuminates, the Electronic Stability Programme
(ESP) warning light and the brake system warning
light (yellow) also illuminate. If the light illuminates
while the ignition switch is in the ON position with
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and
perform the following steps:
1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid level is
low, add fluid and have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. See
“Brake and clutch fluid” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warn-
ing system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
WARNING
•
Your brake system may not be working prop-
erly if the warning light is on. Driving could be
dangerous. If you judge the brake system to
be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service
station for repairs. Otherwise, have your ve-
hicle towed because driving it could be dan-
gerous.
•
Pressing the brake pedal when the ignition
switch is not in the ON position and/or when
the brake fluid level is low may increase the
stopping distance and braking will require
greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
•
If the brake fluid level is below the minimum
or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do
not drive until the brake system has been
checked at a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
Charge warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
charge warning light illuminates. After starting the
engine, the charge warning light turns off. This indi-
cates that the charging system is operational.
If the charge warning light illuminates while the en-
gine is running, or while driving, it may indicate that
the charging system is not functioning properly and
may need servicing.
When the charge warning light illuminates while driv-
ing, stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Stop the engine and check the alternator belt. If the
alternator belt is loose, broken or missing, the charg-
ing system needs repair (see “Drive belts” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section).
If the alternator belt appears to be functioning cor-
rectly but the charge warning light remains illumi-
nated, have the charging system checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is
loose, broken or missing.
Forward Emergency Braking
system warning light
(where fitted)
This light illuminates when the Forward Emergency
Braking system is set to OFF on the lower display.
If the light illuminates when the Forward Emergency
Braking system is ON, it may indicate that the sys-
Instruments and controls 2-5
tem is unavailable. See “Forward emergency brak-
ing system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section for more details.
Low tyre pressure warning light
(where fitted)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tyre Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS) that monitors the tyre pres-
sure of all tyres except the spare.
The low tyre pressure warning light warns of low
tyre pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not func-
tioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion, this light illuminates for about 1 second and
turns off.
Low tyre pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tyre pressure,
the warning light will illuminate. A low tyre pressure
warning (e.g., [Low tyre pressure]) also appears in
the vehicle information display.
When the low tyre pressure warning light illuminates,
you should stop and adjust the tyre pressure of all 4
tyres to the recommended COLD tyre pressure
shown on the tyre placard located on the driver side
centre pillar see “Tyre placard” in the “9. Technical
information” section. The low tyre pressure warning
light does not automatically turn off when the tyre
pressure is adjusted. After the tyre is inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven
at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tyre pressure warning
light. Use a tyre pressure gauge to check the tyre
pressure.
The low tyre pressure (e.g., [Low tyre pressure])
warning appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low tyre
pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, see “Vehicle information
display” later in this section and “Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” later in this section.
TPMS resetting must be also performed after a tyre
or a wheel is replaced, or the tyres are rotated.
Depending on a change in the outside temperature,
the low tyre pressure warning light may illuminate
even if the tyre pressure has been adjusted prop-
erly. Adjust the tyre pressure to the recommended
COLD tyre pressure again when the tyres are cold,
and reset the TPMS.
If the low tyre pressure warning light still continues
to illuminate after the resetting operation, it may indi-
cate that the TPMS is not functioning properly. Have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
For additional information, see “Tyre Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section and “Vehicle information display”
later in this section.
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tyre
pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1
minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop. The low tyre pressure warning does
not appear if the low tyre pressure warning light illu-
minates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see “Tyre Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.
WARNING
•
Radio waves could adversely affect electric
medical equipment. Those who use a pace-
maker should contact the electric medical
equipment manufacturer for the possible in-
fluences before use.
•
If the light does not illuminate with the igni-
tion switch pushed ON, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop as soon as possible.
•
If the low tyre pressure warning light illumi-
nates while driving, avoid sudden steering
manoeuvres or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
speed, pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving
with under-inflated tyres may permanently
damage the tyres and increase the likelihood
of tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage could
occur and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury. Check the
tyre pressure for all four tyres. Adjust the tyre
pressure to the recommended COLD tyre
pressure shown on the tyre placard, located
2-6 Instruments and controls
on the driver side centre pillar, to turn the low
tyre pressure warning light off. If the light still
illuminates while driving after adjusting the
tyre pressure, a tyre may be flat. If you have a
flat tyre, repair it with the emergency tyre
puncture repair kit (where fitted) or replace it
with a spare tyre (where fitted) as soon as
possible.
•
After adjusting the tyre pressure, be sure to
reset the TPMS. Unless the resetting is per-
formed, the TPMS will not warn of the low tyre
pressure correctly.
•
When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function and the
low tyre pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Contact a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop as soon as possible for
tyre replacement and/or system resetting.
•
Replacing tyres with those not originally speci-
fied by NISSAN could affect the proper opera-
tion of the TPMS.
CAUTION
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular
tyre pressure check. Be sure to check the tyre
pressure regularly.
•
If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less
than 25 km/h (16 MPH), the TPMS may not
operate correctly.
•
Be sure to install the specified size of tyres to
all four wheels correctly.
Malfunction warning light (red)
(where fitted)
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, the malfunction warning light illuminates. This
means the system is operational.
See “Malfunction Indicator light (orange)” later in
this section for details of the orange Malfunction
Indicator light.
If the red malfunction warning light comes on steady
while the engine is running, it may indicate an en-
gine control system malfunction.
Have your vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop. You do not need to have your
vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the
engine control system checked and repaired as
necessary could lead to poor driveability,
reduced fuel economy and possible damage to
the engine control system, which may affect your
warranty coverage.
Incorrect setting of the engine control system may
lead to non-compliance of local and national emis-
sion laws and regulations.
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
master warning light illuminates if any of the follow-
ing are displayed in the vehicle information display
(see “Vehicle information display” later in this sec-
tion):
•
No key warning
•
Key ID incorrect warning
•
Low windscreen washer fluid warning
•
Parking brake release warning
•
Door/boot open warning
•
Low tyre pressure warning
•
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning (where fitted)
•
Intelligent Key system warning
If the driver assist system warnings (where fitted)
appear in the vehicle information display, the master
warning light also illuminates. See “Blind Spot Warn-
ing (BSW) system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section, “Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section, and/or “Forward emergency brak-
ing system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.
Instruments and controls 2-7
NATS security warning light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK, “OFF” or Acc position. This function indi-
cates that your vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Anti-Theft System (NATS)*.
If NATS is malfunctioning, this light will remain on
while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
For additional information, see “Security system”
later in this section.
* Immobilizer
Parking brake warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the indicator light in the meter comes on (red)
when the parking brake is applied.
When the parking brake warning, light in the meter, and the LED (Light Emitting Diode), on the switch,
flash this may indicate a malfunction.
Meter Switch
Indicator Warning light
Master warn-
ing light
Display text Buzzer LED
Parking brake
applied
m
— — — — LED
Dynamic parking
brake
m
Warning light
ON
—
Release park-
ing brake
Beep LED
System failure
Depends on
status
—
m
—— —
Parking brake
switch pressed
without brake pedal
pressed
m
——
Press brake
pedal
— LED
Parking brake can-
not be released
automatically
m
——
Release park-
ing brake
— LED
Parking brake
malfunction
m
Flashing
—
m
——
LED
Flashing
2-8 Instruments and controls
Low brake fluid warning light:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
light warns of a low brake fluid level. If this warning
light illuminates, the Electronic Stability Programme
(ESP) warning light and the brake system warning
light (yellow) also illuminate. If the light illuminates
while the ignition switch is in the ON position with
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and
perform the following steps:
1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid level is
low, add fluid and have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. See
“Brake and clutch fluid” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warn-
ing system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
WARNING
•
Your brake system may not be working prop-
erly if the warning light is on. Driving could be
dangerous. If you judge the brake system to
be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service
station for repairs. Otherwise, have your ve-
hicle towed because driving it could be dan-
gerous.
•
Pressing the brake pedal when the ignition
switch is not in the ON position and/or when
the brake fluid level is low may increase the
stopping distance and braking will require
greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
•
If the brake fluid level is below the minimum
or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do
not drive until the brake system has been
checked at a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
For further parking brake operation information see
“Parking brake switch” in the “8. Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section.
Power steering warning light
WARNING
•
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the steer-
ing will not work. Steering will be harder to
operate.
•
When the power steering warning light illumi-
nates with the engine running, there will be
no power assist for the steering. You will still
have control of the vehicle but the steering
will be harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the power steering warning light illuminates.
After starting the engine, the power steering warn-
ing light turns off. This indicates that the electric
power steering system is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while
the engine is running, it may indicate the power
steering system is not functioning properly and may
need servicing. Have the electric power steering
system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop. See “Electric power steering system” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section.
Seat belt (driver and front
passenger) warning light
The seat belt warning light reminds you to fasten
your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START posi-
tion and remains illuminated until the driver’s and/or
front passenger’s seat belt is fastened. At the same
time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless
the driver’s and/or front passenger’s seat belt is
securely fastened see “Seat belt reminder chime”
later in this section. The seat belt warning light may
also illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is
not fastened when the front passenger’s seat is oc-
cupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, the system does not acti-
vate the warning light for the front passenger. See
“Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, Seat belts
and Supplemental Restraint System” section for
precautions on seat belt usage.
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) air bag warning light
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it
could mean that the front air bag, side air bag
(where fitted), curtain air bag (where fitted) and/
or pre-tensioner systems will not operate in an
Instruments and controls 2-9
accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or oth-
ers, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as pos-
sible.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START
position, the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
air bag warning light illuminates for approximately 7
seconds and then turns off this indicates the system
is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the air bag
systems and pre-tensioner systems need servicing
and the vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop:
•
The supplemental air bag warning light remains
on after approximately 7 seconds.
•
The supplemental air bag warning light flashes
intermittently.
•
The supplemental air bag warning light does not
come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the SRS air bag sys-
tem and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt system may
not function properly.
For additional details see “SRS air bag warning
light” in the “1. Safety — Seats, Seat belts and
Supplemental Restraint System” section.
Water in fuel filter warning light
(where fitted)
If the warning light remains on or flashes irregularly
while the engine is running, there may be water in
the fuel filter. Should this happen, contact a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop.
CAUTION
Failure to drain the water from the fuel filter can
cause serious damage to the engine. Contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as soon as
possible.
/ Front passenger air
bag status light
(where fitted)
The front passenger air bag status light ( ) lo-
cated on the centre console above the shift lever will
illuminate when the front passenger air bag is turned
OFF with the front passenger air bag switch. When
the front passenger air bag is turned on, the front
passenger air bag status light ON (
) will illumi-
nate.
For more details, see “Front passenger air bag sta-
tus light (where fitted)” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
Seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System” sec-
tion.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) AUTO
indicator light (4WD models)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) AUTO indicator
light illuminates and then turns off.
When selecting 4WD AUTO mode while the engine
is running, the 4WD AUTO indicator light illumi-
nates. See “Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted)”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
4WD mode indicator light
(LOCK) (4WD models)
When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” posi-
tion, the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK indicator
light illuminates and then turns off. When selecting
4WD LOCK mode while the engine is running, the
4WD LOCK indicator light illuminates together with
the 4WD AUTO indicator light.
See “Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
Dipped beam indicator light
This light comes on when the switch is turned to the
position:
The headlights will come on and front
side, tail, number plate and instrument lights remain
on.
2-10 Instruments and controls
Door lock indicator light
(where fitted)
The door lock indicator light located on the instru-
ment panel illuminates when all the doors are locked
while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
•
When the doors are locked with the power door
lock switch, the door lock indicator light will illu-
minate for 30 minutes.
•
When the doors are locked by pushing the
LOCK button on the Intelligent Key or any re-
quest switch ( where fitted), the door lock indica-
tor light will illuminate for 1 minute.
•
The door lock indicator light turns off when any
door is unlocked.
For locking or unlocking doors, see “Door locks” in
the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion.
Electronic Stability Programme
(ESP) OFF indicator light
(where fitted)
The light comes on when the Electronic Stability
Programme (ESP) OFF switch is pushed to the OFF
position. This indicates that the ESP system is not
operating.
This light also comes on briefly when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. The light will
turn off after approximately 1 second if the ESP sys-
tem is operational.
When the ESP OFF indicator light and SLIP indica-
tor light (see “SLIP indicator light (where fitted)”
later in this section) come on with the ESP system
turned on, it alerts the driver to the fact that the sys-
tem’s fail-safe mode is operating. This means that
the system may not be functioning properly. Have
the system checked by your NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
If an abnormality occurs in the system, the ESP sys-
tem function will be cancelled, but the vehicle is still
driveable. For additional information, see “Electronic
Stability Programme (ESP) system (where fitted)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section.
Front fog light indicator light
The light comes on when the front fog lights are
switched on (see “Fog light switch” later in this sec-
tion).
Glow plug indicator light (Diesel
engines)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is in the
ON position and goes out when the glow plugs have
been pre-heated. When the engine is cold, the glow
plug warm-up time will be longer.
High beam assist indicator light
(where fitted)
The indicator light illuminates when the headlights
come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position with the high beam selected. This indicates
that the high beam assist system is operational. (See
2-36.)
High beam indicator light
This light comes on when the headlight high beam
is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.
Malfunction Indicator light
(orange)
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, the orange Malfunction Indicator light illumi-
nates. This means that the system is operational.
If the orange Malfunction Indicator light comes on
steady or blinks (where fitted) while the engine is
running, it may indicate an engine control system
malfunction.
See “Malfunction warning light (red) (where fitted)”
earlier in this section for details of the red malfunc-
tion warning light (where fitted).
On steady (orange):
An engine malfunction has been detected. Have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop. You do not need to have your vehicle
towed to the dealer.
Blinking (orange) (where fitted):
An engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the engine control system.
To reduce or avoid engine control system dam-
age:
•
Do not drive at speeds above 70 km/h (43
MPH).
•
Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
Instruments and controls 2-11
•
Avoid steep uphill grades.
•
If possible, reduce the load being carried or
towed.
The Malfunction Indicator light may stop blinking
and come on steady.
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop. You do not need to have your
vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the
engine control system checked and repaired as
necessary could lead to poor driveability,
reduced fuel economy and possible damage to
the engine control system, which may affect your
warranty coverage.
Rear fog light indicator light
(where fitted)
The light comes on when the rear fog light is
switched on (see “Rear fog light (where fitted)” later
in this section).
Side light and headlight indicator
light
This light comes on when the side light or headlight
position is selected, see “Headlight and turn signal
switch” later in this section for further details.
SLIP indicator light
(where fitted)
The SLIP indicator blinks when the Electronic Sta-
bility Programme (ESP) system is operating, thus
alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is
slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
You may feel or hear the system working, this is nor-
mal.
The light will continue to blink for a few seconds
after the ESP system stops limiting wheel spin.
For additional information see “Electronic Stability
Programme (ESP) OFF indicator light (where
fitted)” earlier in this section and “Electronic Stabil-
ity Programme (ESP) system (where fitted)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
Trailer direction indicator light
The light will light up whenever an additional electri-
cal load is detected by the direction indicator sys-
tem.
For additional information, see “Trailer towing” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The direction indicator lights will flash when the turn
signal switch or hazard warning flasher switch is
turned on. See “Headlight and turn signal switch”
later in this section and see “Hazard warning flasher
switch” in the “6. In case of emergency” section for
further details.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Door open reminder chime
The chime will sound if any door other than the driv-
er’s door is left open and the power door lock switch
is held down.
Intelligent Key models: The external buzzer will
sound if the vehicle is being locked remotely or us-
ing an outside door lock switch and any door is
open.
Parking brake reminder buzzer
A buzzer will sound when driving away if the parking
brake has not been released. Stop the vehicle and
release the parking brake.
Light reminder chime
A chime will sound for 10 seconds if the driver’s
door is opened while the external lights are turned
on and the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or LOCK
position.
See “Headlight and turn signal switch” later in this
section for further details on the headlight operation.
Fog light reminder chime
A chime will sound if the ignition switch is in the
“OFF” or LOCK position and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position (where fitted) and the fog lights
are left on.
See “Fog light switch” later in this section for further
details.
2-12 Instruments and controls
Seat belt reminder chime
A chime will sound for approximately 90 seconds if
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 km/h (9 MPH) and
the driver’s seat belt or front passenger’s seat belt,
if occupied (where fitted) is not securely fastened.
See “Seat belt warnings” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
Seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System” sec-
tion.
Key reminder buzzer (Intelligent Key
models)
The external buzzer will beep 3 times if:
•
The Intelligent Key is removed from the vehicle
while the ignition is not in the LOCK position.
•
The vehicle is being locked remotely or using an
outside door lock switch and the Intelligent Key
has been left inside the vehicle.
Park reminder chime (where fitted)
A chime will sound if the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position and the shift lever is not in the P
(Park) position.
Stop/Start System reminder buzzer
(where fitted)
The engine will shift to the normal stopped state if
any of the following operations is made during Stop/
Start System activation, and the Stop/Start System
buzzer will sound if:
– The driver’s seat belt is unfastened and the driv-
er’s door is open (MT models)
– The vehicle engine bonnet is open.
When any of the above conditions continues for
over 3 minutes the Stop/Start System buzzer will
sound in 5-minute intervals as a reminder to prevent
the possibility of a dead battery. Use the ignition
switch to turn off the engine.
Close the bonnet or the driver’s door, or fasten the
seat belt then restart the engine using the ignition
switch.
For more information, see “[Stop/Start]” in the “5. In-
struments and controls” section and “Stop/Start
System (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section.
The vehicle information display
j1 is located be-
tween the tachometer and the speedometer, and it
displays such items as:
•
Vehicle settings
•
Trip computer information
•
Drive system warnings and settings (where fit-
ted)
•
Cruise control system information
•
NISSAN Intelligent Key operation information
•
Chassis Control
•
Indicators and warnings (where fitted)
•
Tyre Pressure information
NIC2203
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
Instruments and controls 2-13
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be changed us-
ing the ENTER and BACK buttons located on the
left side of the steering wheel.
m
Back button
Press the BACK button to return to the previous dis-
play screen or menu level, or to cancel the selection
if it is not completed.
m
or
m
Display scrolling switch
Push or to scroll through the items in the
vehicle information display. Press ENTER to select
an item in the display, then push
or to scroll
through the associated menu options.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the ignition is placed in the ON or ACC posi-
tion the screens displayed include:
•
Active system status (where fitted)
•
Trip computer
•
Tyre pressure information
•
Fuel economy
•
Warnings
•
Outside air temperature
•
Odometer/Twin Trip Odometer
Warnings will only display if there are any present,
for more information on warnings and indicators,
see “Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators” later in this section. To control which
items display in the vehicle information display, see
“Settings” later in this section.
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the informa-
tion displayed in the vehicle information display:
•
[Driver Assistance]
•
[Clock]
•
[Display Settings]
•
[Vehicle Settings]
•
[Maintenance]
•
[Alert]
•
[Tyre Pressures]
•
[Units]
•
[Language]
•
[Factory reset]
[Driver assistance]
Use the or switches and the ENTER button to
change the status, warnings or turn on or off any of
the systems/warnings displayed in the [Driver As-
sistance] menu. The following menu options are
available:
•
[Driving Aids] (where fitted)
•
[Driver Attention] (where fitted)
•
[Traffic Sign] (where fitted)
•
[Parking Aids]
•
[Chassis control]:
this allows you to turn [Trace Control] and [En-
gine Brake] on or off.
– [Trace Control]:
(For more information, see “Active trace
control” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
tion)
– [Engine Brake]:
(For more information, see “Active engine
brake (for XTRONIC (CVT) models only)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section)
NIC2204
2-14 Instruments and controls
•
[Steering effort]: this can be set to [Normal] or
[Sport].
The [Driving Aids] option has a sub-menu, from
which you can choose whether or not to have fur-
ther items displayed. These items are:
•
[Lane] (Lane Departure Warning system)
•
[Blind Spot] Blind Spot Warning system)
•
[Emergency Brake] (Forward Emergency Brake
system)
The [Driver Attention] option can be used to activate
or deactivate the Driver Attention Support feature
(where fitted). This system is able to detect whether
the driver is displaying a lack of attention, or is dis-
tracted. It does this by monitoring driving style, and
steering behaviour, and it notes deviations from the
normal pattern. If the system detects that driver at-
tention is decreasing, the system uses an audible
and visual warning to suggest that the driver takes a
break.
[Clock]
For details of how to set the clock, see “Setting the
clock” in the “4. Display screen, heater and air con-
ditioner, and audio system” section or the separate
NissanConnect Owner’s manual.
[Display settings]
Use the or switches to scroll and the ENTER
button to change the status, warnings or turn on or
off any of the systems/warnings displayed in the
[Display Settings] menu. The following menu op-
tions are available:
•
[Contents selection]
•
[Body Colour]
•
[ECO Mode Settings] (where fitted)
•
[Stop/Start]
•
[ECO Drive Report]
•
[Welcome Effect]
[Contents selection]:
The items that display when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position can be enabled/disabled.
To change the items that are displayed, use the
or buttons to scroll and the ENTER button to
select a menu item: The following items (where fit-
ted) are available in the [Meter Settings] menu:
•
[Home]
•
[Average speed]
•
[Trip]
•
[Fuel economy]
•
[Navigation] (where fitted)
•
[Traffic Sign] (where fitted)
•
[Audio]
•
[Driving aids] (where fitted)
•
[Tyre pressures]
•
[Driver Attention] (where fitted)
•
[Chassis control]
The [Driving Aids] option has a sub-menu, from
which you can choose whether or not to have fur-
ther items displayed. These items are:
•
[Lane] (Lane Departure Warning system)
•
[Blind Spot] Blind Spot Warning system)
•
[Emergency Brake] (Forward Emergency Brak-
ing system)
[Body Colour]:
The colour of the vehicle that displays in the vehicle
information display when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position can be changed.
[ECO mode settings] (where fitted):
You can choose which of the ECO mode features
you wish to see displayed. These include the ECO
indicator ([ECO glow]), and from the Display sub-
menu, the [Pedal Guide] and Instant fuel economy
([Fuel econ.]) display.
[Stop/Start]:
The [Stop/Start] system mode shows the CO2 sav-
ings and the engine stop time. (See “Stop/Start Sys-
tem (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section.)
Instruments and controls 2-15
The following options are available in the [Stop/
Start] menu:
•
[Display]:
You can choose whether on not to display stop/
start information.
•
[Trip CO2 saving]:
The [Trip CO2 saving] and engine stop time
mode shows the CO2 saving and engine stop
time since the last reset. The CO2 saving and
engine stop time can be reset by pushing ENTER
for longer than 1 second.
•
[Total CO2 saving]:
The [Total CO2 saving] and engine stop time
mode shows:
– The estimated CO2 exhaust emissions pre-
vented.
– The engine stop time that the engine has been
stopped by the [Stop/Start] System
NOTE
The [Total CO2 saving] and engine stop
time values cannot be reset and show ac-
cumulated [Stop/Start] System informa-
tion since the vehicle was built.
[ECO Drive Report]:
You can choose whether or not to display ECO
information in the vehicle information display when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
From the Main Menu Selection select [ECO Drive
Report] to display the information when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
Select [Display] then On or Off to display the infor-
mation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position. The ECO Drive Report is displayed when
the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
You can also view the ECO drive report history.
[Welcome Effect]:
You can choose whether or not to display the wel-
come screen when the ignition switch is placed in
the ACC (where fitted) or ON position. You can
also choose the following items to define how the
welcome screen looks:
•
[Dial and pointer]
•
[Display effect]
To enable/disable the welcome screen, and set how
it appears:
1. Use the
or buttons to select [Settings], and
press ENTER.
2. Select [Welcome Effects] using the
or but-
tons and press ENTER to select this menu. Use
the or buttons to navigate between the
menu options and press ENTER to turn each
function ON or OFF.
[Vehicle settings]
Use the or switches and the ENTER button to
change the status, warnings or turn on or off any of
the systems/warnings displayed in the [Vehicle set-
tings] menu. The following menu options, each lead-
ing to a further sub-menu, are available:
•
[Lighting]
•
[Turn indicator]
•
[Unlocking]
•
[Wipers]
[Lighting]:
The [Lighting] menu has the following options:
•
[Welcome light]:
The welcome lighting can be set to be ON or
OFF. From the [Lighting] menu, select [Wel-
come Light]. Use the ENTER button to turn this
feature ON or OFF. When set to ON, front and
rear lamps will stay on for 30 seconds after un-
locking. They will also stay on for 10 seconds
after locking.
•
[Int. Lamp timer]:
The internal light timer can be set to be ON or
OFF. From the [Lighting] menu, select [Int. Lamp
timer]. Use the ENTER button to turn this feature
ON or OFF.
•
[Mood lighting]:
The mood lighting can be dimmed or brightened.
From the [Lighting] menu, select [Mood light-
ing]. Use the ENTER button and the
or
switches to adjust the brightness.
2-16 Instruments and controls
•
[Auto lights]:
The sensitivity of the automatic lighting can be
adjusted. From the [Lighting] menu, select [Auto
Lights]. Use the
or and ENTER switches to
select the required sensitivity. The following op-
tions are available:
– On earliest
– On earlier
– Standard
– On later
[Turn indicator]:
The [3 flash on] overtaking feature can be set to be
ON or OFF. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select
“[3 Flash on]”. Use the ENTER button to turn this
feature ON or OFF.
[Unlocking]:
There are two options (where fitted) in the [Unlock-
ing] menu:
•
[I–Key Door Lock] (where fitted)
When this item is turned on, the request switch
on the door is activated. From the [Unlocking]
menu, select [I-Key Door Unlock]. Use the
ENTER button to activate or deactivate this func-
tion.
•
[Selective unlock]
When this item is turned on, and the door handle
request switch on the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s side door is pushed, only the correspond-
ing door is unlocked. All the doors can be un-
locked if the door handle request switch is
pushed again within 1 minute. When this item is
turned to off, all the doors will be unlocked when
the door handle request switch is pushed once.
From the [Unlocking] menu, select [Selective
Unlock]. Use the ENTER button to activate or
deactivate this function.
[Wipers]:
•
[Speed dependent] (where fitted)
The Speed dependent wiper feature can be set
to be ON or OFF. From the [Wipers] menu,
select [Speed Dependent]. Use the ENTER but-
ton to turn this feature ON or OFF.
•
[Rain Sensor] (where fitted)
The [Rain sensor] feature can be activated or
deactivated. From the [Wipers] menu, select
[Rain Sensor]. Use the ENTER button to turn
this feature ON or OFF.
•
[Reverse link]
The [Reverse link] wiper feature can be set to be
ON or OFF. From the [Wipers] menu, select
[Reverse Link]. Use the ENTER button to turn
this feature ON or OFF.
•
[Drip wipe]
The [Drip wipe] feature can be set to be ON or
OFF. From the [Wipers] menu, select [Drip
Wipe]. Use the ENTER button to turn this fea-
ture ON or OFF.
Maintenance
1. Engine oil and filter replacement indicator:
This indicator appears when the customer set time
comes for changing the engine oil and filter. You
can set or reset the distance for changing the en-
gine oil and filter.
NIC2206
Instruments and controls 2-17
NOTE
Diesel models with diesel engines make use of
an Oil Condition Supervisor (OCS) function.
Petrol engines have a basic service reminder.
1. Use the
or buttons to select [Settings], and
press ENTER.
2. Select [Maintenance], followed by [Service] us-
ing the
or and ENTER switches. In the
[Service] menu, use the or buttons to navi-
gate between the menu options and press
ENTER to set or reset the distance for changing
the engine oil.
3. (Diesel models only) Select [Maintenance], fol-
lowed by [Filter] using the
or and ENTER
switches. In the [Filter] menu, use the
or
buttons to navigate between the menu options
and press ENTER to set or reset the distance for
draining the diesel fuel filter.
For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, see
your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.
2. Tyre replacement indicator:
This indicator appears when the customer set dis-
tance comes for replacing tyres. You can set or
reset the distance for replacing tyres.
1. Use the
or buttons to select [Settings], and
press ENTER.
2. Select [Maintenance], followed by [Tyre] using
the
or and ENTER switches. In the [Tyre]
menu, use the
or buttons to navigate be-
tween the menu options and press ENTER to set
or reset the distance for replacing tyres.
WARNING
The tyre replacement indicator is not a substitute
for regular tyre checks, including tyre pressure
checks. See “Wheels and tyres” in the “8. Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section. Many factors
including tyre inflation, alignment, driving habits
and road conditions affect tyre wear and when
tyres should be replaced. Setting the tyre re-
placement indicator for a certain driving distance
does not mean your tyres will last that long. Use
the tyre replacement indicator as a guide only
and always perform regular tyre checks. Failure
to perform regular tyre checks, including tyre
pressure checks could result in tyre failure. Seri-
ous vehicle damage could occur and may lead to
a collision, which could result in serious personal
injury or death.
3. Other indicator:
This indicator appears when the customer set time
comes for replacing items other than the engine oil,
fuel filter and tyres. You can set or reset the dis-
tance for replacing the items.
[Alert]
You can specify that an alert occurs to notify the
driver that a certain event has occurred. You can set
alerts for the following items:
•
[Timer]
•
[Navigation] (where fitted)
•
[Phone]
•
[Mail] (where fitted)
To set an alert:
1. Use the
or buttons to select the item re-
quired, and press ENTER.
2. For [Phone], [Navigation] or [Mail] use the
ENTER button to toggle between YES and NO.
For the [Timer], to change the timer value, use
the
or buttons and the ENTER button to
save the selected length of time.
[Tyre pressures]
The settings in the Tyre pressures] menu are all
related to the Tyre pressure monitoring system
TPMS (see “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section).
•
[Target front]
•
[Target rear]
•
[Tyre pressure unit]
•
[Calibrate]
[Target front]:
The [target front] tyre pressure is the pressure speci-
fied for the front tyres on the tyre placard (see “Tyre
placard” in the “9. Technical information” section
and “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section).
2-18 Instruments and controls
Use the or and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the value for the [target front] tyre pres-
sure.
[Target rear]:
The [target rear] tyre pressure is the pressure speci-
fied for the rear tyres on the tyre placard (see “Tyre
placard” in the “9. Technical information” section
and “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section).
Use the
or and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the value for the [target rear] tyre pres-
sure.
[Tyre pressure unit]:
The unit for tyre pressure that displays in the vehicle
information display can be changed to:
•
Kgf/cm2
•
kPa
•
bar
•
psi
Use the or and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the unit.
Pressure units conversion table
kPa 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340
psi 29 30 32 33 35 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 46 48 49
bar 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
kgf/
cm
2
2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Instruments and controls 2-19
[Calibrate]:
The tyre pressure is affected by the temperature of
the tyre; the tyre temperature increases when the
vehicle is driven. The TPMS system uses tempera-
ture sensors in the tyres to compensate for changes
in temperature in order to prevent false TPMS warn-
ings.
The [CALIBRATE] function resets the previously
stored temperature value. It is recommended that
this function is performed after the tyre pressures
are adjusted.
See “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section
Use the
or and the ENTER buttons to start or
cancel the calibration process. While the calibration
process is active, the message: [Resetting tyre pres-
sure system] will be displayed.
[Units]
•
[Distance/Fuel]
•
[Tyre pressures]
•
[Temperature]
[Distance/Fuel]:
The unit for the distance and fuel consumption that
displays in the vehicle information display can be
changed to:
•
miles, MPG
•
km, km/l
•
km, l/100km
Use the
or and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the unit.
[Tyre pressures]:
The unit for tyre pressure that displays in the vehicle
information display can be changed to:
•
Kgf/cm2
•
kPa
•
bar
•
psi
Use the or and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the unit.
[Temperature]:
The temperature that displays in the vehicle informa-
tion display can be changed from:
•
°C (Celsius)
•
°F (Fahrenheit)
Use the ENTER button to toggle choices.
[Language]
The [language] of the vehicle information display
can be changed to:
•
[English]
•
[French]
•
[German]
•
[Italian]
•
[Portuguese]
•
[Dutch]
•
[Spanish]
•
[Turkish]
•
[Russian]
Use the or and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the language of the vehicle information
display.
[Factory reset]
The settings in the vehicle information display can
be reset back to the factory default. To reset the
vehicle information display:
1. Use the
or buttons to select [Settings], and
press the ENTER button
2. Select [Factory Reset] using the
or buttons
and press the ENTER button
3. Select [YES] to return all settings back to default
by pressing the ENTER button
2-20 Instruments and controls
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
NIC2331
Instruments and controls 2-21
1. Engine start operation indicator (for
XTRONIC transmission models)
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
This indicator indicates that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal de-
pressed.
2. Engine start operation indicator (for
Manual Transmission (MT) models)
This indicator indicates that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the clutch pedal
depressed.
You can also start the engine by pushing the ignition
switch with the brake pedal depressed when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
3. [NO KEY Detected] warning
The warning appears when the door is closed with
the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the
ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Make
sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
See “Intelligent Key system (where fitted)” in the
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for
more details.
4. [Key System Fault] warning
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the
Intelligent Key system.
NIC2332
2-22 Instruments and controls
If this warning appears while the engine is stopped,
the engine cannot be started. If this warning ap-
pears while the engine is running, the vehicle can be
driven. However, contact a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop for repair as soon as possible.
5. [Key battery low] indicator
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key bat-
tery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a
new one. (See “Integrated keyfob/Intelligent Key
battery replacement” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.)
6. [Key ID Incorrect] warning
This warning appears when the ignition switch is
pushed from the LOCK position and the Intelligent
Key cannot be recognised by the system. You can-
not start the engine with an unregistered key. Use
the registered Intelligent Key. See “Intelligent Key
system (where fitted)” in the “3. Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section.
7. Engine start operation for Intelligent
Key system indicator
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key bat-
tery is running out of power and the Intelligent Key
system and vehicle are not communicating normally.
If this indicator appears, touch the ignition switch
with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake
pedal. (See “Push-button ignition switch (where
fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)
8. [Release parking brake] warning
This warning appears when the vehicle speed is
above 7 km/h (4 MPH) and the parking brake is
applied. Stop the vehicle and release the parking
brake. This warning may a occur if the driver has
attempted to release the parking brake automati-
cally, but did not succeed.
9. Low fuel ([Range]) warning
This warning appears when the fuel level in the tank
is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,
preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the empty
(0) position.
There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the
tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty (0)
position.
10. [Low washer fluid] warning
This warning appears when the washer tank fluid is
at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See
“Window washer fluid/headlight cleaner fluid (where
fitted)” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.)
11. Door/boot open warning
This warning appears if any of the doors and/or the
boot lid are open or not closed securely. The vehicle
icon indicates which door or whether the boot lid is
open on the display.
12. [SHIFT to Park] warning (XTRONIC
transmission models)
This warning appears when the ignition switch is
pushed to stop the engine with the shift lever in any
position except the P (Park) position.
If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position or place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
An inside warning chime will also sound. (See
“Push-button ignition switch (where fitted)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.)
13. [Loose Fuel Cap] warning
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not
tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refu-
elled. See “Fuel filler lid” in the “3. Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section section of this
manual.
14. [Battery Voltage Low Charge
Battery] warning
This warning appears when the battery voltage is
low and the battery needs to be charged.
15. [Press Brake Pedal] warning
This warning appears to remind you that you must
press the brake pedal before you can release the
parking brake. This warning may also be displayed
if the parking brake is activated, but the vehicle is
still rolling back.
Instruments and controls 2-23
16. [Low Tyre Pressure] warning
This warning ([Low Tyre Pressure] and a vehicle
icon - where fitted) appears when the low tyre pres-
sure warning light in the meter illuminates and low
tyre pressure is detected. The warning appears each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position
as long as the low tyre pressure warning light re-
mains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the
vehicle and adjust the pressure to the recommended
COLD tyre pressure shown on the tyre placard.
(See “Low tyre pressure warning light (where fitted)”
earlier in this section and “Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
tion.)
17. [Low oil pressure stop vehicle]
warning
This warning appears in message area of the ve-
hicle information display if low oil pressure is de-
tected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low
oil level. The low oil pressure warning is not de-
signed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in the “8. Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
CAUTION
The oil level should be checked regularly using
the engine oil dipstick. Operating with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the engine and
such damage is not covered by the warranty.
18. [Oil Level Low] warning
This warning appears in message area of the ve-
hicle information display if the oil level is not suffi-
cient for driving. Park the vehicle at a safe location
as soon as possible and use the dipstick to check
the oil level. See “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section If the oil level is not suf-
ficient for driving, top up the engine oil with the rec-
ommended engine oil. “Engine oil” in the “8. Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
CAUTION
The oil level should be checked regularly using
the engine oil dipstick. Operating with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the engine and
such damage is not covered by the warranty.
19. [4WD System Fault] warning
This warning appears when the four wheel drive
(4WD) system is not functioning properly while the
engine is running.
20. [4WD high temp. stop vehicle]
warning
This warning may appear while trying to free a stuck
vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The driv-
ing mode may change to Two-Wheel Drive (2WD).
If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with the
engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if
the warning turns off, you can continue driving.
21. [4WD tyre size incorrect] warning
This warning may appear if there is a large differ-
ence between the diameters of the front and rear
wheels and tyres. Pull off the road in a safe area,
with the engine idling. Check that all the tyre sizes
are the same, that tyre pressures are correct and
that the tyres are not excessively worn.
22. [Shipping mode on push storage
fuse] warning
This warning may appear if the extended storage
fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on). When
this warning appears, push in (switch on) the ex-
tended storage fuse switch to turn off the warning.
For more information, see “Fuses” in the “8. Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
23. [Power will turn off to save the
battery] warning
This warning appears after a period of time if the
shift lever has not moved from the P (Park) position
while the ignition is in the ON position for a certain
period of time.
24. [Power turned off to save the
battery] warning
This warning appears after the ignition switch is au-
tomatically turned OFF to save the battery.
2-24 Instruments and controls
25. [Reminder turn off headlights]
warning
This warning appears when the driver side door is
opened while the headlight switch is left ON and the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC, “OFF” or
LOCK position. Place the headlight switch in “OFF”
or “AUTO” position. For additional information, see
“Headlight and turn signal switch” later in this sec-
tion.
26. [Time for a driver break?] indicator
This indicator appears when the set “TIMER” indi-
cator activates. You can set the time for up to 6
hours.
27. [Low outside temperature] warning
This warning appears if the outside temperature is
below 3°C (37°F). The warning can be set not to be
displayed. (See “[Clock] and [outside air
temperature]” later in this section or the separate
NissanConnect Owner’s manual.)
28. [Chassis control system fault]
warning
This warning appears if the chassis control module
detects an error in the Chassis Control System
(where fitted). Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. (See “Chas-
sis control” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)
29. Cruise control indicator
This indicator shows the cruise control system sta-
tus. The status is shown by the colour.
See “Cruise control (where fitted)” in the “5. Start-
ing and driving” section for details.
30. Speed limiter indicator
This indicator shows the status of the speed limiter
system . If the system is in turned on and in use, the
speed that the speed limiter is set to is also dis-
played.
See “Speed limiter (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section for details.
31. Shift lever position indicator
This indicator shows the shift lever position.
See “Shift lever indicator (where fitted)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section for further details.
32. [Tyre Pressure System Fault]
warning
This warning illuminates when there is a problem
with the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
If this warning comes on, have the system checked
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. See
“Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section for further details.
33. [Resetting Tyre Pressure System]
indicator
This warning illuminates when the TPMS tempera-
ture calibration is in progress. See “TPMS tempera-
ture calibration” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
tion for further details.
34. [Parking Sensor System Fault]
warning (where fitted)
This warning illuminates when there is a problem
with the parking sensor system. If this warning
comes on, have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop.
35. [Vehicle Overheating Stop Vehicle]
warning
This warning illuminates is the engine coolant tem-
perature is too high, indicating that the engine is
overheating. See “Engine overheat” in the “6. In
case of emergency” section for further details.
36. [CVT System Fault] warning
(where fitted)
This warning illuminates when there is a problem
with the XTRONIC transmission (CVT) system. If
this warning comes on, have the system checked by
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Instruments and controls 2-25
37. [Adaptive Front-Lighting System
Fault] warning (where fitted)
This warning illuminates when there is a problem
with the dynamic high beam assistant system. See
“Dynamic high beam assistant (where fitted)” later
in this section. If this warning comes on, have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop.
38. [Headlight System Fault] warning
(where fitted)
This warning illuminates when the LED headlights
need to be replaced. If this warning comes on, have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop. See “LED headlight (where fitted)”
later in this section
39–45. [Stop/Start] System
These indicators show the Stop/Start System sta-
tus. See “Stop/Start System (where fitted)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
46. [Push Ignition to OFF] warning
This warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC position when the shift lever is
moved to the P (Park) position. To turn off the Push
warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position
and then in the LOCK position.
47. [Please Select Driving Aids in
Settings Menu] warning
This warning is displayed if the Driving Aids items
are not available because they are turned off in the
Settings menu.
48–51. [System Fault] warning
This warning appears when the Blind Spot Warn-
ing, (where fitted), Lane Departure Warning (where
fitted), Traffic Sign Recognition (where fitted), or
Forward Emergency Braking systems (where fitted)
are not functioning properly.
52. [Not Available Front Radar
Obstruction] warning (where fitted)
If the sensor area of the front bumper is covered
with dirt or obstructed, making it impossible to de-
tect a vehicle ahead, the forward emergency brak-
ing system is automatically turned off. The forward
emergency braking system warning light (orange)
and the forward collision warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the [Not Available Front Radar Ob-
struction] warning message will appear in the ve-
hicle information display. If the [Not Available Front
Radar Obstruction] warning message appears, park
the vehicle in a safe location and turn the engine off.
Check to see if the sensor area of the front bumper
is blocked. If the sensor area of the front bumper is
blocked, remove the blocking material. Restart the
engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate,
have the forward emergency braking system
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
53–54. [Not Available High Cabin
Temperature] warning (where fitted)
This warning appears if the interior temperature of
the vehicle has reached such a high temperature
that the sensor for the Traffic Sign Recognition and
Lane Departure warning systems can no longer
function reliably. Once the interior temperature has
reached normal levels, the warning should disap-
pear. If the warning continues to display, have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop
55. [Not Available Clean Rear Camera]
warning (where fitted)
This message is displayed if the rear camera used
by the Blind Spot Warning system is dirty or cov-
ered with snow or rain. If the message appears,
park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine,
and clean the camera unit with a soft cloth. Then
restart the engine.
56. [Steering lock Registration
Complete] indicator
This appears when a new intelligent key is regis-
tered to the vehicle.
57. [Please select 1 item or more]
indicator
This message appears when you are in the main
menu of the vehicle information display to remind
you to select at least one item.
2-26 Instruments and controls
TRIP COMPUTER
Switches for the trip computer are located on the
left side of the steering wheel and on the switch
panel
j1 . To operate the trip computer, push the
switches as shown above.
Each time the
or switch is pushed, the display
will change.
NIC2271
NIC2204
NIC2228
Instruments and controls 2-27
1. [Fuel economy] (l (litre)/100 km,
km/l(litre) or MPG)
Current fuel consumption:
The current fuel consumption mode shows the cur-
rent fuel consumption.
Average fuel consumption:
The average fuel consumption mode shows the av-
erage fuel consumption since the last reset. Push
the ENTER switch for longer than 1 second to enter
the Reset menu.
The display is updated every 30 seconds. For about
the first 500 m (1/3 mile) after a reset, the display
shows “——”.
Push ENTER briefly to show the second Fuel
Economy page.
2. [Speed] and [Average speed] (km/h
or MPH)
The (digital) speed shows the current speed at
which the vehicle is travelling.
The average speed mode shows the average ve-
hicle speed since the last reset. Push the ENTER
switch for longer than 1 second to enter the Reset
menu.
The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first
30 seconds after a reset, the display shows “——”.
3. [Range] (dte — km or mile)
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with
an estimation of the distance that can be driven
before refuelling. The dte is constantly being calcu-
lated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank
and the actual fuel consumption.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The dte mode includes a low range warning feature.
If the fuel level is low, the warning is displayed on
the screen.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte dis-
play will change to “——”.
•
If the amount of fuel added is small, the display
just before the ignition switch is placed in the
“OFF” position may continue to be displayed.
•
When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel
in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change
the display.
4. Elapsed [time] and [trip distance] (km
or mile)
Elapsed [time]:
The elapsed time mode shows the time since the
last reset. Push the ENTER switch for longer than 1
second to enter the Reset menu. (The trip odometer
is also reset at the same time.)
[Trip distance]:
The trip odometer mode shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven since the last reset.
Push the ENTER switch for longer than 1 second to
enter the Reset menu. (The elapsed time is also
reset at the same time.)
5. Navigation (where fitted)
When the route guidance is set in the navigation
system, this item shows the navigation route infor-
mation.
For more details, see the separately provided Nis-
sanConnect Owner’s manual.
6. Audio
The audio mode shows the status of audio informa-
tion.
For more details, see “FM AM radio with CD player
(where fitted)” in the “4. Display screen, heater and
air conditioner, and audio system” section or the
separately provided NissanConnect Owner’s
manual.
7. [Driving aids] (where fitted)
The driving aids mode shows the operating condi-
tion for the following systems.
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
•
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
•
Forward Emergency Braking
Push ENTER to access the driving aids setting
menu.
2-28 Instruments and controls
For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section, “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
tion, and/or “Forward emergency braking system
(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
tion.
8. [Tyre pressures] (where fitted)
The tyre pressure mode shows the pressure of all
four tyres. The displayed values are only available
while the vehicle is being driven.
When the [Low Tyre Pressure] warning appears,
the display can be switched to the tyre pressure
mode by pushing the ENTER switch to reveal addi-
tional details on the displayed warning.
9. [Chassis control]
When either the Active Trace Control (where fitted),
Active Engine Brake (where fitted), Hill start Assist
(where fitted) or the Active Ride Control system is
operated, it shows the operating condition. See
“Chassis control” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section and “Hill Start Assist (HSA) system” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section for more details.
10. [Stop/Start] system (where fitted)
The Stop/Start system mode shows the CO2 sav-
ings and the engine stop time. (See “Stop/Start Sys-
tem (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section.)
[Trip CO2 saving] and engine stop time:
The trip CO2 saving and engine stop time mode
shows the CO2 saving and engine stop time since
the last reset.
The CO2 saving and engine stop time can be reset
by pushing the ENTER switch for longer than 1 sec-
ond.
[Total CO2 saving] and engine stop time:
The total CO2 saving and engine stop time mode
shows:
•
The estimated CO2 exhaust emissions
prevented.
•
The engine stop time that the engine has been
stopped by the Stop/Start System.
NOTE
The Total CO2 saving and engine stop time val-
ues cannot be reset and show accumulated
Stop/Start System information since the vehicle
was built.
11. Warning check
The current warnings are displayed. If no warning is
present, “No Warnings” is displayed.
[CLOCK] AND [OUTSIDE AIR
TEMPERATURE]
The clock j1 and outside air temperature j2 are
displayed on the upper side of the vehicle informa-
tion display.
[Clock]
For details of how to set the clock, see “Setting the
clock” in the “4. Display screen, heater and air con-
ditioner, and audio system” section or the sepa-
rately provided NissanConnect Owner’s manual.
[Outside air temperature] (°C or °F)
The [outside air temperature] is displayed in °C or
°F in the range of −40 to 60°C (−40 to 140°F).
The outside temperature sensor is located in front of
the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or
engine heat, wind directions and other driving con-
ditions. The display may differ from the actual out-
side temperature or the temperature displayed on
various signs or billboards.
JVI0724XZ
Instruments and controls 2-29
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION
(where fitted)
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system provides
the driver with information about the most recently
detected speed limit. The system captures the road
sign information with the multi-sensing front camera
unit
j1 located in front of the interior rear-view mir-
ror and displays the detected signs in the vehicle
information display. For vehicles equipped with
NissanConnect, the speed limit displayed is based
on a combination of navigation system data and live
camera recognition. TSR information is always dis-
played at the top of the vehicle information display,
and optionally in the main central area of the display
screen. See “[Contents selection]” earlier in this
section for details of how to adapt the display of
TSR information.
WARNING
The TSR system is only intended to be a support
device to provide the driver with information. It is
not a replacement for the driver’s attention to
traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely.
It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness.
It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and
drive safely at all times.
System operation
The traffic recognition system displays the following
types of road sign:
jA
Latest detected speed limit.
jB
National speed limit
jC
No speed limit information.
jD
No-overtaking zone.
jE
End of no-overtaking zone.
NSD522
NIC2207
NIC2242
TSR: available road signs
2-30 Instruments and controls
jF
Conditional speed limit, with the following
available conditions:
jg
Snow
jh
Slip (rain 1)
ji
Rain (rain 2)
jj
Towing
jk
Generic
CAUTION
•
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system is
intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely, and observe all road regulations that
currently apply, including looking out for road
signs.
•
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system
may not function properly under the following
conditions:
•
When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the
windscreen in front of the TSR camera unit.
•
When the headlights are not bright due to
dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not ad-
justed properly.
•
When strong light enters the camera unit.
(For example, the light directly shines on
the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sun-
set.)
•
When a sudden change in brightness oc-
curs. (For example, when the vehicle en-
ters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
•
In areas not covered by the navigation sys-
tem.
•
If there are deviations in relation to the
navigation, for example due to changes in
the road routing.
•
When overtaking buses or trucks with
speed stickers.
Turning the TSR system on and off
Turning the LDW system on or of is done using the
[Settings] menu in the vehicle information display.
For details, see “Vehicle information display” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the
TSR system:
1. In the [Settings] menu, select the [Driver Assis-
tance] key.
2. Touch [Traffic Sign] to turn the system ON/OFF.
System temporarily unavailable
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high
temperature conditions (over approximately 40 C
(104 F) and then started, the TSR system may be
deactivated automatically. The [Not available high
cabin temperature] warning message will appear in
the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the interior temperature is reduced, the TSR
system will resume operating automatically.
System Malfunction
If the TSR system malfunctions it will be turned off
automatically and the system [Malfunction]/[System
error] warning message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take:
If the TSR [Malfunction]/[System error] message
appears, pull off the road at a safe location and stop
the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the en-
gine. If the TSR [Malfunction]/[System error] mes-
sage continues to appear, have the system checked
by a NISSAN dealer.
Maintenance
The TSR uses the same multi-sensing front camera
unit that is used by the Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) system, located in front of the interior rear
view mirror. For maintenance of the camera, see
“Multi-sensing camera unit maintenance” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
Instruments and controls 2-31
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer fluid may
freeze on the windscreen and obscure your vi-
sion. Warm the windscreen with the defogger be-
fore you wash it.
CAUTION
•
Do not open/release the bonnet when the
front wiper arms are raised from their original
position.
•
Do not operate the washer continuously for
more than 15 seconds.
•
Do not operate the washer if the reservoir
tank is empty or frozen.
WINDSCREEN
The windscreen wiper and washer can be operated
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Wiper operation
Move the lever up or down to operate the wiper at
the following speeds:
•
j1:Intermittent ( ) —TypeAorAUTO —
Type B (where fitted) operates the rain-sensing
auto wiper system. (See “Rain sensor (where
fitted)” later in this section.).
– The intermittent operation speed can be ad-
justed by rotating the ring forward
jA (slower)
or backward
jB (faster).
– The wiper operation speed will vary in accor-
dance with the vehicle speed in the AUTO
position. For example, when the vehicle
speed is high, the intermittent operation
speed will be faster.
•
j2:Low ( ) – for continuous low speed op-
eration
•
j3:High ( ) – for continuous high speed
operation
•
j4 : — for a single sweep operation of the wiper.
Washer operation
Pull the lever towards you j5 to operate the washer.
For every fifth operation of the wiper and washer,
the headlight washing system (where fitted) will be
activated to clean the headlights. The headlight
washing system is only activated while the headlight
switch is in the
position. See “Headlight
cleaner (where fitted)” later in this section.
NIC2125
Type A (without AUTO mode)
NIC2173
Type B (with AUTO mode)
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
2-32 Instruments and controls
Wiper drip wipe system (where fitted):
The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds
after using the washer. This operation is to wipe
washer fluid that has dripped on the windscreen.
Rain sensor (where fitted)
The sensor of the rain-sensing auto wiper system
located on the upper part of the windscreen, in front
of the rear view mirror, can automatically turn on the
wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on
the rainfall intensity and the vehicle speed when the
lever in the AUTO position
j1.
The sensitivity can be adjusted by rotating the ring
of the wiper switch forward
jA — less sensitive, or
backward jB — more sensitive.
NOTE
•
Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto wiper
system when the car is in the car wash.
•
Leaving the lever in AUTO position will not
harm the rain sensor system, although occa-
sional unexpected activation of the wipers
may occur.
•
If the switch is left in the AUTO position, the
wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt,
fingerprints, oil film or insects are covering
the windscreen of the rain sensor location.
The wipers may also operate when exhaust
gas or moisture affects the rain sensor.
•
Do not touch or cover the windscreen where
the rain sensor is located. The wipers may
operate unexpectedly when the wiper switch
is in the AUTO position and the ignition switch
is in the ON position. This can cause an injury
or a wiper damage.
REAR WINDOW
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution
may freeze on the rear window and obscure your
vision. Warm the rear window with the rear win-
dow defogger before using the rear wipers.
CAUTION
•
Do not operate the washer continuously for
more than 15 seconds.
•
Do not operate the washer if the reservoir
tank is empty or frozen.
The rear window wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Wiper operation
Turn the switch clockwise to the intermittent ( ,
j1 ) position or continuous ( , j2 ) position for
wiper operation.
To stop the wiper operation, turn the switch back to
the OFF position.
Washer operation:
To operate the washer, push the lever towards the
front of the vehicle
j3 until the desired amount of
washer fluid is spread on the rear window. The wiper
will automatically operate several times.
Wiper drip wipe system (where fitted):
The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds
after using the washer. This operation is to wipe
washer fluid that has dripped on the windscreen.
The mode can be turned off. For details, see “Ve-
hicle information display” later in this section.
Reverse synchronisation function
(where fitted)
When the windscreen wiper switch is in either the
intermittent or AUTO (where fitted), low or high
speed position, placing the shift lever in the R (Re-
verse) position will operate the rear window wiper.
The mode can be turned off. For details, see “Ve-
hicle information display” later in this section.
NIC2174
Instruments and controls 2-33
NOTE
In the AUTO position (where fitted), the rear wiper
will not begin to sweep when the shift lever is
placed in the R position. It waits until the front
wipers have made the first sweep.
THERMACLEAR HEATED
WINDSCREEN (where fitted)
j
A
ThermaClear Heated Windscreen On/Off
To defog/defrost the windscreen glass, start the
engine and push the ThermaClear button
jA . The
indicator light will come on. Push the button again to
turn the ThermaClear system off.
The ThermaClear system will turn off automatically
after approximately 4 minutes — if the windscreen
clears before this time, push the button again to turn
the ThermaClear system off.
NOTE
•
Before activating the ThermaClear system
make sure to remove excess snow/ice from
the windscreen
•
Electrical conductors embedded in the wind-
screen provide the heating of the windscreen.
If damage occurs to the windscreen have the
ThermaClear system checked by a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop.
•
The ThermaClear Heated Windscreen perfor-
mance may be reduced or deactivated to pre-
serve the battery.
•
NISSAN recommends using the ThermaClear
system to support defogging of the
windscreen. For more information, see
“Heater and air conditioner operation” in the
“4. Display screen, heater and air conditioner,
and audio system” section.
•
During use of the ThermaClear system the
Stop/Start System is unavailable.
NIC2220
Models with ThermaClear Heated Windscreen (where fitted)
THERMACLEAR HEATED
WINDSCREEN BUTTON
2-34 Instruments and controls
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
j
A
ThermaClear system On/Off. See
“ThermaClear Heated Windscreen button”
earlier in this section.
jB
Rear window defogger On/Off
To defog/defrost the rear window glass, start the
engine and push the rear window defogger switch
jB . The indicator light will come on. Push the switch
again to turn the defogger off.
The defogger will turn off automatically after ap-
proximately 15 minutes — if the rear window clears
before this time, push the switch again to turn the
defogger off.
For more information, see “Heater and air condi-
tioner operation” in the “4. Display screen, heater
and air conditioner, and audio system” section.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window,
be careful not to scratch or damage the electri-
cal conductors.
NOTE
When the ThermaClear system is turned on the
Stop/Start System (where fitted) will not be acti-
vated.
OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFOGGER
(where fitted)
The outside rear-view mirrors will be defogged when
the rear defogger switch is activated.
NIC2214
Models with manual air conditioning (where fitted)
NIC2183
Models with automatic air conditioning and ThermaClear
system (where fitted)
NIC2184
Models with automatic air conditioning and without
ThermaClear system
DEFOGGER SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-35
NISSAN recommends you to consult the local regu-
lations concerning the use of lights.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Lighting
Turn the switch to the
m
position:
m
The front side, tail, number plate and instru-
ment lights will come on. The indicator light
m
in the instrument panel will come on.
Turn the switch to the
m
position:
m
The headlights will come on and all the
other lights remain on.
CAUTION
Never leave the light switch on for extended peri-
ods of time while the engine is not running.
Daytime light system (where fitted)
Even if the headlight switch is off, the front daytime
running lights will come on when the engine is run-
ning.
When the light switch is turned to the
or
position, the daytime running lights will turn off.
Autolight system (AUTO — where fitted)
The autolight system allows the headlights to be set
so they turn on and off automatically. When active,
the autolight system will:
•
Turn on the headlights, front side, tail, number
plate and instrument panel lights automatically
when it gets dark.
•
Turn off all the lights when it gets light.
To activate the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
To disable the autolight system:
Turn the switch to the OFF,
or position.
High beam select
j
1
To select the high beam when in the
position, push the lever forward. The high
beam lights come on and the
indicator
light illuminates.
j2
Pull the lever back to select the low beam
(
position).
j3
Pulling the lever towards you will flash the
headlight high beam, even when the headlight
switch is off.
NIC2175
NIC2175
NIC2120
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
2-36 Instruments and controls
DYNAMIC HIGH BEAM ASSISTANT
(where fitted)
A camera-controlled high beam assistant which
changes from low beam to high beam automatically.
Precautions:
WARNING
The dynamic high beam assistant cannot com-
pensate for road and weather circumstances
while driving. The system saves the driver from
having to operate the switch. The driver always
remains responsible for choosing the correct
light setting.
Specific situations in which to operate the head
light switch manually:
•
In heavy rain, snowy conditions. (general poor
visibility and bad weather conditions).
•
When the vehicle sensors are dirty, covered
or broken.
Dynamic high beam assistant activated:
When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position,
the light sensor detects darkness, and the vehicle
speed is over 20 km/h (15 MPH), the dynamic high
beam assistant is operational. The dynamic high
beam assistant indicator light
in the instrument
panel is on.
The system operates as follows:
•
High beam comes on automatically in dark con-
ditions:
If the vehicle speed is over 40 km/h (25 MPH)
and no other road users are recognised.
The
high beam light (blue) comes on addi-
tionally.
•
High beam turns off automatically:
If the vehicle speed drops below 25 km/h (15
MPH) or other road users are detected.
The
High beam light (blue) turns off.
To disable the dynamic high beam assistant:
To turn the dynamic high beam assistant off turn the
head light switch to the OFF,
,or posi-
tion.
“Friendly Lighting”
The “Friendly Lighting” function is a convenience
facility. It allows you to provide lighting from the
vehicle after the ignition switch has been turned to
the LOCK position and the headlight switch is in the
OFF or AUTO (where fitted) position. Pulling the
headlight switch toward you once will activate the
headlight for approximately 30 seconds. After that
period of time, it will automatically switch off.
It is possible to pull the headlight switch up to four
times to increase the lighting period up to 2 minutes.
NOTE
The “Friendly Lighting” function can be cancelled
by switching the ignition switch to the Acc or ON
position again.
Battery save function
The battery save feature prevents your vehicle from
discharging the battery after you have left the exter-
nal lights, map lamps or room lamps on when exit-
ing the vehicle. This occurs when the ignition switch
or ignition knob is switched to the “OFF” or LOCK
position after the engine has been running.
NIC2211
Instruments and controls 2-37
NOTE
The next time the engine is started the external
lights, map lamps or room lamp will come on
again
Battery save function for external lights:
If the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position
after driving but the external lights are accidentally
left on, the external lights will automatically be
switched off as soon as the driver’s door is opened.
It is possible to leave the external lights on perma-
nently by switching them back on using the head-
light switch while the ignition switch is still in the
LOCK or “OFF” position. In this case, the light re-
minder chime will sound when the driver’s door is
opened.
Battery save function for interior light:
The interior light will automatically be switched off
after a period of time if it has been accidentally left
on.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Lane change signal
Move the lever only part of the way up or down j1
to signal a lane change (right or left). The indicator
lights will flash three times before cancelling auto-
matically.
NOTE
This feature will only work if the 3 flash turn sig-
nal setting has been set to ON in the Vehicle Set-
tings menu of the vehicle information display (see
“[Vehicle settings]” earlier in this section).
Direction indicator
Move the lever up or down j2 to indicate right or
left. When the turn is completed, the turn signal is
automatically cancelled.
FRONT FOG LIGHT (where fitted)
The front fog lights should only be used when visibil-
ity is seriously reduced – generally, to less than 100
m (328 ft).
NIC2121 NIC2122
Type A: Rear fog light only
NIC2176
Type B: Front and rear fog lights
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
2-38 Instruments and controls
To turn the front fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the or or AUTO (where fitted)
position and turn the fog light switch to the
posi-
tion. The front fog lights and indicator light will come
on. The fog light switch will return to the “OFF”
position ( — ). For additional information, see “Warn-
ing/indicator lights and audible reminders” earlier in
this section.
To turn the front fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the
position again. The front fog lights
and indicator light will turn off. The fog light switch
will return to the “OFF” position.
NOTE
If the headlight switch is turned to the “OFF” po-
sition(—),thefrontfoglightwillswitchoffauto-
matically.
REAR FOG LIGHT (where fitted)
The rear fog light should only be used when visibility
is seriously reduced – generally, to less than 100 m
(328 ft).
To turn the rear fog light on, turn the headlight switch
to the
or or AUTO (where fitted) position
and turn the fog light switch to the
position. The
rear fog light and indicator light will come on. The
fog light switch will return to the “OFF” position ( —
). For additional information, see “Warning/indicator
lights and audible reminders” earlier in this section.
If the front fog lights (where fitted) are already turned
on with the headlight switch in the
position,
you can turn on the rear fog light without first turn-
ing the headlight switch to the
or AUTO (where
fitted) position.
To turn the rear fog light off, turn the fog light switch
to the
position again.
NOTE
If the headlight switch is turned to the “OFF” po-
sition(—),therearfoglightwillswitchoffauto-
matically.
HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL
SWITCH (where fitted)
Depending on the number of occupants in the ve-
hicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight axis
may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is travel-
ling on a hilly road, the headlights may directly hit the
rear-view mirror of the vehicle ahead or the wind-
screen of an oncoming vehicle. The light axis can be
NIC2200
LHD models
NIC2201
RHD models
HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL
Instruments and controls 2-39
lowered using the switch located on the driver’s
side of the instrument panel, next to the steering
wheel.
The higher the number designated on the switch,
the lower the axis.
When travelling with no heavy load on a flat road,
select position 0.
AUTOMATIC AIMING CONTROL (LED
headlights)
Vehicles with LED headlights are equipped with an
automatic levelling system. The headlight axis is con-
trolled automatically.
NISSAN recommends consulting local regulations
on the use of lights.
To clean the headlights, pull the windscreen washer
switch towards you while the headlight switch is in
the
position and the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
NOTE
The headlight cleaner will automatically operate
every fifth operation of the wiper and washer
switch.
HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH
(where fitted)
The headlight cleaner operates when the headlight
and turn signal switch is in the
position and the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
To operate the headlight cleaner push the headlight
cleaner switch located on the driver’s side, lower
left side of the instrument panel.
CAUTION
•
Do not operate the cleaner continuously for
more than 15 seconds.
•
Do not operate the cleaner if the washer fluid
reservoir is empty or frozen.
See “Window washer fluid/headlight cleaner fluid
(where fitted)” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section for details on refilling the res-
ervoir tank.
SIC2255Z
Headlight cleaner switch (where fitted)
HEADLIGHT CLEANER
(where fitted)
2-40 Instruments and controls
To sound the horn, push the centre pad area j1of
the steering wheel.
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
The switches are located on the centre console and
can be operated independently from each other (
jA
for the left-hand side seat, jB for the right-hand side
seat).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
NOTE
The seat heater can only be activated when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Select the heat range:
•
Press the forward part of the switch (HI) j1
to activate the “HIGH” heat setting.
•
Press the rear part of the switch (LO) j2to
activate the “LOW” heat setting.
•
For no heat, the switch has a central “OFF”
position between “HIGH” and “LOW”.
4. The seat heater switches illuminate when either
heat setting is selected and will remain on as
long as the switch is on.
5. When the vehicle’s interior has warmed-up, or
before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
seat heater system off.
CAUTION
•
Do not use the seat heater system for a long
period of time when the engine is not running,
otherwise the battery could run down.
•
Do not put anything on the seat that insulates
the heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat
cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may overheat.
•
Do not place anything hard or heavy on the
seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.
This may damage the heater.
•
Any liquid spilled on a heated seat should be
removed immediately with a dry cloth.
•
When cleaning the seat, never use benzine,
thinner or any similar materials.
•
If any abnormalities are found or the heating
does not operate, turn off the switch and have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop.
NIC2198 NIC2199
HORN SEAT HEATING (where fitted)
Instruments and controls 2-41
WARNING
Take care as the power outlet and plug may be
hot during or immediately after use.
CAUTION
•
This power outlet is not designed for use with
a cigarette lighter unit.
•
Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12
volt, 120 W (10 A) power draw. Do not use
double adaptors or more than one electrical
accessory.
•
Use this power outlet with the engine running
(do not use for extended periods of time with
the engine stopped or idling).
•
Avoid using when the air conditioner, head-
lights or rear window defogger are on.
•
When not in use, be sure that the cap is
closed. Do not allow water to come into con-
tact with the outlet.
•
Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be
sure to turn off the power switch of the elec-
trical accessory being used or remove the key
from the ignition to turn the Acc power of the
vehicle off.
•
Fully push the plug in sufficiently. If sufficient
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or
the internal temperature fuse may blow.
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
To help prevent injury in an accident or sudden
stop, do not place sharp objects in the trays.
GLOVE BOX
WARNING
Keep the glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden
stop.
To open the glove box, lift the latch and lower the lid.
Towards the rear of the glove box an elastic strap
can be used to hold the Owner’s Manual pack.
NIC2177
Centre console
NIC2135
Front armrest
NIC2136
POWER OUTLET STORAGE
2-42 Instruments and controls
Sunglasses holder (where fitted)
WARNING
The sunglasses holder should not be used while
driving so that full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
The glove box contains a sunglasses storage area,
which is accessible when the glove box is open.
CONSOLE BOX
WARNING
The centre console box should not be used while
driving so that full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
To open the console box lid, pull the lever
j1orj2
and pull up the lid.
When the lever
j1 on the right side is pulled, the
upper case is available for storing some small items.
When the lever
j2 on the left side is pulled, the bot-
tom case is available for storing some larger ones.
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.
The console box lid contains designated storage
areas, for example, for CDs, coins, and business
cards.
Cable slots
The console box contains openings in the sides j1
and front
j2 to allow cables to be routed through
the console box lid. For more information, see
“Power outlet” earlier in this section and “AUX
socket” later in this section
SIC3809Z
NAA1497
Instruments and controls 2-43
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
Cup holders should not be used while driving so
that full attention may be given to vehicle opera-
tion.
To access the rear cup holders (where fitted), lower
the centre armrest.
CAUTION
•
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the
cup holder is being used to prevent spillage.
If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your pas-
senger.
•
Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard
objects can injure you in an accident.
BOTTLE HOLDER
CAUTION
•
Do not use the bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in the ve-
hicle and possibly injure people during sud-
den braking or an accident.
•
Do not use the bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
COAT HOOKS
CAUTION
Do not apply a load of more than 1 kg (2 lbs) to
the hook.
The coat hooks are fitted at the rear assist grips.
MAP POCKET (where fitted)
Map pockets are located in the doors.
SEAT POCKET (where fitted)
A seat pocket (where fitted) is located on the back
of the driver and/or passenger seat.
NIC2138 NIC2139
SIC3505Z
NIC1835
Seat pocket (where fitted)
2-44 Instruments and controls
ROOF RAIL (where fitted)
Luggage can be carried on the roof by securing
crossbars to the roof rail. Follow all crossbar manu-
facturers instructions for installing and use of the
crossbars. The roof rail is designed to carry loads
(luggage plus crossbars) below 75 kg (165 lb).
Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle.
PARCEL SHELF
WARNING
•
Never put anything on the parcel shelf, no
matter how small. Any object on it could cause
an injury in case of an accident or if the brakes
are applied suddenly.
•
Do not leave the parcel shelf in position when
it is disengaged from the grooves.
•
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could cause per-
sonal injury
•
The child restraint top tether strap may be
damaged by contact with the parcel shelf or
items in the luggage compartment area. Re-
move the parcel shelf from the vehicle or store
it in its storage space. Also, secure any lose
items in the luggage compartment. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a colli-
sion if the top tether strap is damaged.
Removal
1. Open the back door (see “Back door lock” in the
“2. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion).
2. Detach both of the ropes (left and right)
j1 from
the inside of the back door.
3. Detach the parcel shelf by simply pulling it rear-
wards through the back door opening.
NIC1452
NIC2140
Instruments and controls 2-45
CAUTION
Make sure the parcel shelf is carefully stored
when not in use in order to prevent any damage.
NOTE
The parcel shelf can be securely stored under
the luggage compartment floor boards (see
“Installation” later in this section).
Installation
1. Open the back door.
2. Insert the parcel shelf by pushing it forwards as
far as possible through the back door opening.
3. Attach the corresponding ropes to each side
j1
of the back door.
4. Close the back door (see “Back door lock” in the
“2. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion).
NIC2209
NPA1312
2-46 Instruments and controls
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT/BOOT
FLOOR (where fitted)
WARNING
•
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps
to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do
not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo
could cause personal injury.
•
Do not put objects heavier than 50 kg (110
lbs) on the load floor.
•
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage
area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
luggage area inside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
•
Only two anchorage points identified by the
top tether labels can be used for top tether
strap anchorage. Under no circumstances
should the luggage hooks be used for top
tether strap anchorage.
The luggage (cargo) compartment or boot floor has
a dual surface (wet and dry), or dual position system
with loose floorboards that allow different luggage
compartment arrangements.
CAUTION
•
The carpet finish should face up for all dry use
applications.
•
The smooth surface should be used only when
loading wet objects.
•
The load should be distributed evenly and
should not exceed 50 kg (110 lb) on any of the
boards/panels.
•
To avoid any damage, the panels/boards
should be placed in the lower position
jB for
heavy loads and securely held with ropes or
straps to prevent any load shift.
Upper position jA
This position provides a flat load floor when the rear
seat backs are folded forward. It also serves as a
concealed load area for objects placed below the
boards.
NOTE
The parcel shelf can be securely stored under
the luggage compartment floor boards.
Move the boards as illustrated by lifting and sliding
each board into the upper position
jA.
1) Remove the larger floorboard as illustrated by
lifting and sliding it into the upper position
jA.
2) Repeat the operation with the smaller board.
Lower position jB
This position maximises the load space in the lug-
gage compartment.
Move both boards as illustrated by lifting and sliding
each board into the lower position
jB.
Vertical positions jC
These positions provide further subdivisions of the
luggage space by standing either one of the boards
vertically in the midway slots provided in the side
trim.
LUGGAGE HOOKS
The luggage hooks are for shopping bags, etc.
WARNING
•
Do not apply a total load of more than 3 kg (7
lb) to the hook.
JVI0509XZ
Instruments and controls 2-47
POWER WINDOWS
The power window switches are located on the door
panels and will only operate when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
WARNING
•
Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle before operat-
ing the power windows.
•
Never leave children or adults who would nor-
mally require the support of others alone in
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate
switches or controls and inadvertently
become involved in an accident.
•
It is recommended to instruct all occupants in
the safe operation of power windows with par-
ticular emphasis given to the safety and su-
pervision of children.
The power windows only operate when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
To open a window, push down the power window
switch.
To close a window, pull up the power window
switch.
Driver’s side main window switch
The driver’s switch, which is the main switch, can
control all of the windows.
Locking passengers’ windows:
When the lock button
j1 is pushed in, the passen-
gers’ windows cannot be operated.
To cancel the passengers’ windows lock, push the
lock button
j1 again.
Passenger’s window switch
The passenger’s switch can control its correspond-
ing window.
When the passenger’s window lock button on the
driver’s side is pushed in, the passenger’s switch
cannot be operated.
Automatic function
Automatic function is available for the switch that
has an mark on its surface.
NIC2132 NIC2133
NIC2134
WINDOWS
2-48 Instruments and controls
The automatic function enables a window to fully
open or close without holding the switch down or
up.
To fully open the window, push the power window
switch down to the second detent and release the
switch. To fully close the window, pull the power
window switch up to the second detent and release
the switch. The switch does not have to be held dur-
ing window operation.
To stop the window open/close operation during
the automatic function, push down or pull up the
switch in opposite direction.
Auto-reverse function:
WARNING
•
There is a small distance just before the
closed position which cannot be detected.
Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing
the windows.
•
The auto-reverse function does not work
when the window is closed manually (holding
the switch in the close position).
The auto-reverse function enables a window to au-
tomatically reverse when something is caught in the
window as it is closing by the automatic function.
When the control unit detects an obstacle, the win-
dow will be lowered immediately.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions,
the auto-reverse function may activate if an impact
or load similar to something being caught in the win-
dow occurs.
Reinitialisation procedure after battery
reconnection
Some power window functions (automatic close
function, auto-reverse function) will not operate as
described after the battery cable is disconnected or
the electrical supply is interrupted. Perform the fol-
lowing procedure to initialise the power window
functions.
1. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
2. If the driver’s window is closed, open it com-
pletely by operating the driver’s window switch.
3. Pull up and hold the driver’s window switch to
close the driver’s window. Hold the switch for
approximately 5 seconds after the window has
been fully closed, and then release it.
4. Check if the power window functions operate
properly.
If you open or close the power window continu-
ously, it may cause the power window not to oper-
ate properly. Perform the above procedure.
If the power window functions do not operate prop-
erly after performing the above procedure, repeat
the steps. See a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop, if necessary, for checking the power window
system.
j1
Close
j2
Open
CAUTION
•
Do not place heavy objects on the glass roof
or surrounding area.
•
Do not hang from the sunshade or hang any
objects from it. It may cause damage or de-
formation to the sunshade.
•
Close the sunshade when you leave the ve-
hicle for extended periods of time to prevent
the inside of the vehicle from reaching high
temperatures.
NIC2178
FIXED GLASS ROOF (where fitted)
Instruments and controls 2-49
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade operates only when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
WARNING
Never allow hands or fingers, or any part of your
body within operating range of the sunshade. You
could be injured.
Opening and closing
Manual control:
To close the sunshade, press and hold the “CLOSE”
side of the switch
j1 To stop the sunshade from
closing fully, release the switch.
To open the sunshade press and hold the “OPEN”
side of the switch
j2 To stop the sunshade from
opening fully, release the switch.
Automatic operation:
To fully open or close the sunshade automatically,
press briefly on the open or close side of the switch
and then release. To stop the sunshade from open-
ing or closing, press either side of the switch.
Auto-reverse function:
When the control unit detects something caught in
the sunshade, the sunshade will open automatically.
NOTE
The auto-reverse function remains active
whether the sunshade is being closed manually
or automatically.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the
engine stopped. This could discharge the bat-
tery.
NOTE
The interior lights will go off after a period of time
unless the ignition switch is in the Acc or ON
position.
ROOM LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
The room light control switch has three positions:
ON j1 , OFF j2 and centre j3.
ON position
When the switch is in the ON position j1 , the light
will illuminate.
OFF position
When the switch is in the OFF position j2 , the light
will not illuminate, regardless of the condition.
Centre position
When the switch is in the centre position, the light
comes on when a door is opened
ROOM LIGHT TIMER (where fitted)
The room light will stay on for a period of time when:
•
The ignition is switched off.
•
The doors are unlocked.
•
Any door is opened and then closed.
The timer is cancelled, and the interior light will turn
off when:
•
The doors are locked.
•
The ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
MAP LIGHTS (where fitted)
Operate the map light switch to turn the map light
on or off.
j1 : ON position
SIC4573Z
SIC4572Z
INTERIOR LIGHTS
2-50 Instruments and controls
j2 : OFF position
REAR ROOM/READING LIGHT
(where fitted)
The light can be switched on or off by pressing the
switch j3.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
The light comes on automatically when the back
door is opened. When the back door is closed, the
light goes off.
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (where fitted)
The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the
cover is opened.
NIC1258Z
Room light (where fitted)
NIC1256Z
Reading light (where fitted)
NIC1257Z
Instruments and controls 2-51
NOTE
2-52 Instruments and controls
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustmentsPre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys ........................................................................ 3-2
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)* key ............. 3-2
Intelligent Key (where fitted)................................ 3-2
Key number ........................................................ 3-3
New keys ........................................................... 3-3
Emergency/mechanical key (Intelligent Key
models) .............................................................. 3-3
Integrated keyfob/remote control system.................. 3-4
Switching from Convenience mode to
Anti-hijack mode (where fitted)............................ 3-5
Using the remote keyless entry system................ 3-5
Locking the doors............................................... 3-5
Unlocking the doors............................................ 3-5
Keyfob operation failure ...................................... 3-5
Intelligent Key system (where fitted) ......................... 3-6
Intelligent Key operating range............................ 3-6
Using Intelligent Key system................................ 3-6
Locking/unlocking .............................................. 3-7
Starting the engine with the Intelligent Key .......... 3-8
Door locks............................................................... 3-8
Super Lock system (RHD models) ...................... 3-8
Locking/unlocking with the key (vehicle dead
battery)............................................................... 3-9
Inside door handle .............................................. 3-10
Power door lock switch ...................................... 3-10
Child safety lock — rear doors............................ 3-11
Back door lock ................................................... 3-11
Security system ....................................................... 3-12
Alarm system (where fitted) ................................ 3-12
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)..................... 3-13
Bonnet release ........................................................ 3-14
Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-15
Fuel filler lid opener lever .................................... 3-15
Fuel filler cap...................................................... 3-15
Parking brake switch ............................................... 3-16
Driving away when towing a trailer ...................... 3-17
Steering wheel......................................................... 3-18
Sun visors ............................................................... 3-18
Mirrors..................................................................... 3-18
Inside rear-view mirror ........................................ 3-18
Automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror (where
fitted).................................................................. 3-19
Outside rear-view mirrors.................................... 3-19
Vanity mirror ....................................................... 3-20
1.
NATS Key
2.
Key number plate
1.
Intelligent Key
2.
Emergency/Mechanical key (inside the Intel-
ligent Key), see “Emergency/mechanical key
(Intelligent Key models)” later in this section
3.
Key number plate
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
(NATS)* KEY
Your vehicle can only be driven with the keys spe-
cific to your vehicle. Only NISSAN Anti-Theft Sys-
tem (NATS)* keys can be used with your vehicle
(see “Security system” later in this section).
INTELLIGENT KEY (where fitted)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Keys, which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelli-
gent Key system components and NISSAN Anti-
Theft System (NATS*) components. As many as 4
Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with
one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop prior to use
with the Intelligent Key system and NATS of your
vehicle. Since the registration process requires
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take all
Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop.
*: Immobilizer
CAUTION
•
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelligent
Key inside.
•
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
when driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci-
sion device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid
damaging it, please note the following.
– The Intelligent Key is water resistant; how-
ever, wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, imme-
diately wipe until it is completely dry.
– Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come
into contact with water or salt water this
could affect the system function.
– Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-
other object.
– Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-
tended period in a place where tempera-
tures exceed 60°C (140°F).
– Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
– Do not use a magnetic key holder.
– Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-
ment that produces a magnetic field such
as a TV, audio equipment and personal
computers.
•
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that In-
telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent
Key from unauthorised use to unlock the ve-
hicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, please contact a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop.
NPA1361
Integrated keyfob and key
SPA2502Z
Intelligent Key with emergency/mechanical key
KEYS
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
KEY NUMBER
A key number plate j3 is supplied with your key
Record the key number on the “Security Informa-
tion” page at the end of this manual and keep it in a
safe place, but not in the vehicle. The key can only
be duplicated using an original key or the original
key number. The key number is required when you
have lost all of the keys and do not have the original
key to duplicate from. If the key is lost, or you need
extra keys, provide an original key or the key number
to a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
NISSAN does not record key numbers, so it is very
important that you keep a record of your key num-
ber.
NEW KEYS
As many as four NATS keys can be registered to
one vehicle at any one time. New keys must be reg-
istered to the NATS components of your vehicle by
a NISSAN dealer.
When registering a new key at a NISSAN dealer,
you are requested to bring all of your NATS keys
with you. This is necessary because the registration
process will erase and reprogram the memory of
your vehicle’s NATS components.
NOTE
A key number is only required if you have lost all
of your keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, this key can be dupli-
cated by a NISSAN dealer.
EMERGENCY/MECHANICAL KEY
(Intelligent Key models)
The emergency key can be used to unlock the driv-
er’s door and start the engine in emergency situa-
tions (e.g. Intelligent Key dead battery).
Integrated keyfob and key:
•
To use the mechanical key, push the release but-
ton located on top of the key. The key will unfold
from its housing until it locks in place.
Intelligent Key:
•
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.
•
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
(See “Door locks” later in this section.)
For further details on accessing and using the emer-
gency key, see “Ignition switch (where fitted)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
NOTE
For the driver side door, it is normal for the key
not to go all the way into the key cylinder.
NPA1302
SPA2033Z
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
jA
Key release button
jB
Status indicator LED
Lock button
Unlock button
The remote keyless entry system can operate all
door locks (including the back door) using the inte-
grated keyfob. The integrated keyfob can operate at
a distance of approximately 5 m (15 ft) from the
vehicle (the effective distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle and the state of the
keyfob battery).
As many as 5 remote controllers can be used with
one vehicle. For information about the purchase and
use of additional remote controllers, contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
The integrated keyfob will not function under the fol-
lowing conditions:
•
When the distance between the integrated key-
fob and vehicle is more than approximately 5 m
(15 ft).
•
When the integrated keyfob battery is
discharged.
•
When the key is in the ignition switch.
All doors can be locked or unlocked from the out-
side by pressing the “LOCK”
or “UNLOCK”
button on the integrated keyfob.
For Super Lock system models only:
When the vehicle is occupied, never lock the
doors with the integrated keyfob. Doing so will
trap the occupants, since the Super Lock system
prevents the doors from being opened from the
inside.
WARNING
Only operate the integrated keyfob lock button in
full and clear view of the vehicle to prevent any-
body being trapped inside the vehicle.
CAUTION
•
When locking the doors using the integrated
keyfob, be sure not to leave the key in the
vehicle.
•
Always remove the ignition key or Intelligent
Key, close all windows before operating the
keyfob door lock system.
•
Ensure that the driver’s door is securely
closed before operating the integrated keyfob
door lock system for correct operation of the
system.
•
Do not allow the integrated keyfob, which
contains electrical components, to come into
contact with water or salt water. This could
affect the system function.
•
Do not drop the integrated keyfob.
•
Do not strike the integrated keyfob sharply
against another object.
•
Do not place the integrated keyfob for an ex-
tended period in an area where temperatures
exceed 60°C (140°F).
If a integrated keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
ommends erasing the ID code of that integrated
keyfob from the vehicle. This may prevent the unau-
thorised use of the integrated keyfob to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding the erasing pro-
cedure, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
NPA1304
Key with Integrated keyfob
NPA1081
Intelligent Key
INTEGRATED KEYFOB/REMOTE
CONTROL SYSTEM
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
For information regarding the replacement of a bat-
tery, see “Integrated keyfob/Intelligent Key battery
replacement” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.
SWITCHING FROM CONVENIENCE
MODE TO ANTI-HIJACK MODE
(where fitted)
Selective unlock or “Anti-hijack” mode (where fit-
ted) allows the remote unlocking of only the driver’s
door to prevent an attacker from entering the vehicle
via an unlocked passenger door.
As default, the unlock mode will be set to “Conve-
nience” mode (all doors will unlock). Follow the in-
structions in “Vehicle information display” later in
this section.
USING THE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
WARNING
Super Lock system equipped models:
Failure to follow the precautions below may lead
to hazardous situations. Make sure the Super
Lock system activation is always conducted
safely.
•
When the vehicle is occupied, never lock the
doors with the integrated keyfob. Doing so
will trap the occupants, since the Super Lock
system prevents the doors from being opened
from the inside of the vehicle.
•
Only operate the integrated keyfob “LOCK”
button when there is a clear view of the ve-
hicle. This is to prevent anybody from being
trapped inside the vehicle through the Super
Lock system activation.
For further details on the Super Lock system see
“Door locks” later in this section.
LOCKING THE DOORS
CAUTION
Before operating the keyfob remote control:
•
Remove the ignition key or Intelligent Key
from the vehicle and close all windows.
•
Check that the driver’s door is securely
closed.
Push the “LOCK” button
on the integrated key-
fob.
– All the doors lock.
– The direction indicators flash once.
If the “LOCK” button
is pushed with all the doors
locked, the direction indicators will flash once to
remind you that the doors are already locked.
UNLOCKING THE DOORS
When you first receive the vehicle, the door unlock
mode is set to unlock all the doors with one push of
the “UNLOCK”
button.
Convenience mode
Unlock all doors, pressing the button once.
Setting the convenience mode is done using the
[Settings] menu in the vehicle information display
(Select the [Unlocking] menu key).
Also see “Vehicle information display” in the “2. In-
struments and controls” section.
ANTI-HIJACK MODE (where fitted)
Unlock the driver’s door only, pressing the
button once.
Press the
button twice to open all doors.
Setting the Anti-hijack mode is done using the [Set-
tings] menu in the vehicle information display (Se-
lect the [Unlocking] menu key). Set [Selective Un-
lock] to off.
For more information see “Vehicle information
display” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
tion.
Auto-relock (where fitted):
An auto-relock function will a short period after a full
or partial unlock, if no further user action is taken.
The auto-relock will be cancelled if any door is
opened or the key is inserted into the ignition.
KEYFOB OPERATION FAILURE
The keyfob may not work properly if:
•
The keyfob battery is low.
See “Integrated keyfob/Intelligent Key battery
replacement” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section for keyfob battery replace-
ment instructions and the required battery type.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
•
The locking/unlocking system has been used
continuously.
An anti lock-abuse system prevents the lock mo-
tors from overheating and disables the keyfob
locking operation for a short period of time if the
system is used continuously.
•
The door handle is being pulled while the
keyfob is being operated.
•
The vehicle’s battery is dead.
NOTE
See [NO KEY Detected] warning, [Key battery
low] indicator, [Key ID Incorrect] warning or In-
telligent Key system warning in “Vehicle informa-
tion display” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section for more information.
The Intelligent Key system is a convenient keyless
entry system that allows you to operate your vehicle
without using an actual key.
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medi-
cal equipment. Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when
the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating
range from the request (lock/unlock) button
j1.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating
range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key
may not function properly.
The operating range is within 80 cm (31.50 in) from
each request button
j1.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
door handle or rear bumper, the request switches
may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who
does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the re-
quest button to lock/unlock the doors including the
back door.
USING INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
The request button will not function under the fol-
lowing conditions:
•
When the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
•
When the Intelligent Key is not within the opera-
tional range
•
When any door is open or not closed securely
•
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged
NPA1362
NPA1327
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
(where fitted)
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
•
Do not push the door handle request button with
the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated.
The close distance to the door handle will cause
the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty rec-
ognising that the Intelligent Key is outside the
vehicle.
•
After locking the doors using the door handle
request switch, make sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the door
handles.
•
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in-
side the vehicle, make sure you carry the key
with you and then lock the doors.
•
Do not pull the door handle before pushing the
door handle request button. The door will be
unlocked but will not open. Release the door
handle once and pull it again to open the door.
LOCKING/UNLOCKING
The Intelligent Key system allows you to lock and
unlock the driver’s door, passenger doors, or back
door without pressing the
or button on the
Intelligent Key or using the emergency key (driver’s
door key cylinder). When the Intelligent Key is near
the vehicle, the door locks can be locked or un-
locked by pressing the driver’s door, front passen-
ger’s door or back door request button. And the
direction indicators will flash as a confirmation.
Locking the doors
1. Make sure you have the Intelligent Key when exit-
ing the vehicle.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press any of the request buttons (front doors or
back door).
– All doors and the back door will be locked.
– The direction indicators flash once.
– Super Lock system equipped models: The
Super Lock system will be activated
4. Pull the door handles to confirm that the doors
have been securely locked.
CAUTION
Do not leave the duplicate Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle as the locking procedure logic will
not work.
NOTE
If the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle and the
door/back door request button is pressed, a
buzzer will sound to indicate that the Intelligent
Key is still inside the vehicle.
Unlocking the doors
For details about the anti-hijack mode (where fitted)
or the convenience mode settings , see “Switching
from Convenience mode to Anti-hijack mode (where
fitted)” earlier in this section or “[Unlocking]” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.
SPA2407Z
NPA1306
NPA1307
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Convenience mode:
Push the door/back door request button.
– All doors and the back door will be unlocked.
– The direction indicators flash twice.
– The message [All door unlock] appears in the
vehicle information display.
Anti-hijack mode (where fitted):
1. Push the door/back door request button.
– The corresponding door unlocks.
– The direction indicators flash twice quickly.
2. Push the request button again within 5 seconds.
– All the doors and the back door will be unlocked.
– The direction indicators flash twice.
NOTE
•
External interference may impair the Intelli-
gent Key’s operation. In this case, use the
emergency key located in the Intelligent Key
integrated keyfob. See “Door locks” later in
this section for further details.
•
If the vehicle is unlocked and no doors are
opened for 2 minutes the doors will automati-
cally be locked.
CAUTION
•
Make sure the Intelligent Key battery is in good
condition. Note that battery life may vary de-
pending on condition, amount of use, ambi-
ent temperature, etc.
•
The Intelligent Key contains a miniature radio
transmitter that may be affected when placed
near metal objects.
•
Keep the Intelligent Key away from mobile
phones, laptop computers and other metal
objects or electronics.
STARTING THE ENGINE WITH THE
INTELLIGENT KEY
See “Push-button ignition switch (where fitted)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section.
CAUTION
•
Make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with
you when starting and driving the vehicle.
•
If the Intelligent Key is too far away from the
passenger compartment, the vehicle may not
start. See “Intelligent Key operating range” in
the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”
section
SUPER LOCK SYSTEM (RHD models)
WARNING
Super Lock system equipped models:
Failure to follow the precautions below may lead
to hazardous situations. Make sure the Super
Lock system activation is always conducted
safely.
•
When the vehicle is occupied, never lock the
doors with the integrated keyfob. Doing so
will trap the occupants, since the Super Lock
system prevents the doors from being opened
from the inside of the vehicle.
•
Only operate the integrated keyfob “LOCK”
button when there is a clear view of the ve-
hicle. This is to prevent anybody from being
trapped inside the vehicle through the Super
Lock system activation.
Pressing the “LOCK” button (
) on the integrated
keyfob or locking the doors using one of the request
buttons (Intelligent Key models) will activate the Su-
per Lock system.
When the Super Lock system is active, none of the
doors can be opened from inside the vehicle. This
provides additional security in case of theft or break-
in.
The Super Lock system will be released when all
the doors are unlocked using the integrated keyfob
or a request button (Intelligent Key models).
DOOR LOCKS
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Emergency situations
If the Super Lock system is activated while you are
inside the vehicle, for example by a traffic accident
or other unexpected circumstances, follow the in-
structions below.
To release the Super Lock system:
– Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it
to the ON position.
All doors can now be unlocked and opened from
inside the vehicle.
– Remove the key from the ignition switch and un-
lock the doors using the integrated keyfob “UN-
LOCK” button (
).
All doors can now be opened from inside the
vehicle.
To unlock and open the driver’s door from
inside the vehicle while the Super Lock system
is active:
1. Open or break the driver’s door window.
2. Insert the key into the outside door key cylinder
and turn it towards the rear of the vehicle.
3. The driver’s door will unlock and can now be
opened from inside the vehicle.
Locking without activating the Super
Lock system
WARNING
Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when leav-
ing the vehicle.
Locking the doors using the door key cylinder or
power door lock switch will not activate the Super
Lock system. See “Locking/unlocking with the key
(vehicle dead battery)” later in this section for fur-
ther information.
LOCKING/UNLOCKING WITH THE
KEY (vehicle dead battery)
WARNING
•
When leaving the vehicle, do not leave the key
inside the vehicle.
•
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle
and always be sure you have your keys with
you when leaving. If an emergency occurs it
may be more difficult to help them otherwise.
The driver’s door can be locked/unlocked from out-
side using the key/emergency key if the vehicle’s
battery is dead.
To lock the door, insert the key into the driver’s door
key cylinder and turn it towards the front of the ve-
hicle
j1.
To unlock the door, turn the key towards the rear of
the vehicle
j2.
See “Emergency/mechanical key (Intelligent Key
models)” in the “5. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section for instructions on accessing
the Intelligent Key system Emergency key.
CAUTION
The alarm system will be triggered when the door
is opened using the key (NISSAN alarm equipped
models). To stop the alarm, turn the ignition key
to the ON position or press the unlock button
(
) on the integrated keyfob.
Initialising the system after vehicle
battery loading or replacement
After recharging or replacing the battery, you should
release (initialise) the system by:
•
Inserting the key into the ignition switch and then
turning it to the ON position.
•
Unlocking the vehicle using the integrated key-
fob.
SPA2602Z
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
INSIDE DOOR HANDLE
To unlock and open the door, pull the inside door
handle as illustrated.
Models with Super Lock system
(where fitted)
The door cannot be opened when the Super Lock
system is activated.
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
j
1
Press to lock
j2
Press to unlock
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, do not leave the key
inside the vehicle.
The power door lock switch, located on the door
trimming, can be used to lock
j1 or unlock j2 all
doors simultaneously from inside the vehicle.
The door lock indicator light (
) in the centre
console comes on when the doors are locked.
NOTE
Models without the Super Lock system: If a door
is manually opened from inside after having
pressed the integrated keyfob “LOCK” button
(
). As a result, the door will unlock and the
power door lock indicator light ( ) goes out.
Locking the doors when leaving the
vehicle (where fitted)
It is possible to lock all doors using the power door
lock switch when leaving the vehicle:
1. Open the driver’s door, remove the key from the
ignition or the Intelligent Key (where fitted) from
the passenger compartment.
2. Press the
side of the power door lock switch
j1.
– All doors except the driver’s door lock
3. Close the driver’s door.
– The driver’s door locks.
– The
indicator light in the centre console
comes on.
– Super Lock system models: The Super Lock
system is not activated.
SPA2531Z NPA1329
Power door lock light
NPA1308
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
– Intelligent Key models: If the Intelligent Key has
been left inside the vehicle, all doors will unlock
and an audible warning will sound.
Super Lock equipped models (RHD
models)
If the doors are locked using the integrated keyfob
lock button ( ) or a request button (Intelligent Key
models), the Super Lock system will be activated.
The
indicator light in the centre console comes
on to indicate that all doors are locked, but it will not
be possible to use the
button of the power door
lock switch to unlock the doors.
Locking the doors with the power door lock switch
will not activate the Super Lock system.
CHILD SAFETY LOCK — REAR
DOORS
The child safety lock helps prevent doors from be-
ing opened accidentally, especially when small chil-
dren are in the vehicle.
When the switch is in the LOCK position, the rear
door can only be opened from the outside.
BACK DOOR LOCK
WARNING
•
Always check that the back door has been
properly closed to prevent it from opening
while driving.
•
Do not drive with the back door opened. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle.
•
Closely supervise children when they are
around the vehicle to prevent them from play-
ing and being locked in the luggage compart-
ment where they could be seriously injured.
Keep the vehicle locked, with the back door
closed, when not in use, and prevent chil-
dren’s access to the vehicle’s keys.
The back door can be manually opened from the
outside, and it is not locked by the power door lock
system, by pushing the button
j1 located above the
rear number plate.
To open the back door, unlock it first with one of the
following operations, then push the button
j1.
•
Push the request button j2 of the back door
(where fitted). See “Intelligent Key system
(where fitted)” earlier in this section.
•
Push the button on the Intelligent Key (where
fitted). See “Intelligent Key system (where fitted)”
earlier in this section.
•
Push the button on the integrated keyfob
(where fitted). See “Integrated keyfob/remote
control system” earlier in this section.
•
Unlock all the doors using the key.
•
Push the side of the power door lock switch.
To close the back door, pull it down until it securely
locks and if necessary, lock it with the power door
lock system.
NPA859Z
NPA1311
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Vehicle dead battery – Back door lock
release lever (where fitted)
The vehicle’s back door can be unlocked from the
inside when the battery is dead. Tilt the seatback
down. Remove the cover from the lock and slide the
release lever
j1 as illustrated. See “Rear seats” in
the “1. Safety — Seats, Seat belts and Supplemen-
tal Restraint System” section for more information
regarding the seat operation.
ALARM SYSTEM (where fitted)
The alarm system provides visual and audible alarm
signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.
How to arm the alarm system
1. Close all doors, windows, back door and bon-
net.
2. Lock the vehicle using the keyfob (lock button),
for additional information, see “Integrated key-
fob/remote control system” in the “3. Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.
NOTE
If the vehicle is not fully locked, a door/bonnet/
back door is open, or the ignition switch is in the
ON position (after arming the system), the buzzer
will sound. After correctly closing, the buzzer will
stop.
Alarm system operation
The system will give the following alarm:
•
The siren sounds intermittently and all direction
indicators will flash.
•
The alarm automatically turns off after 28 sec-
onds.
The alarm is activated when:
•
The volumetric sensing system (ultrasonic sen-
sors) is triggered.
•
Any door/the back door is opened.
•
The bonnet is opened.
•
The ignition circuit is turned on without the own-
er’s key being used.
The alarm system will stop when:
•
The vehicle is unlocked using the keyfob or intel-
ligent key unlock button.
•
The ignition switch or ignition knob is turned to
the ON position with a registered NATS key.
If the system does not operate as described
above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop.
Ultrasonic sensors (where fitted)
The ultrasonic sensors (volumetric sensing) detect
movements in the passenger’s compartment. When
the alarm system is set to the armed position, it will
automatically switch on the ultrasonic sensors.
It is possible to exclude the ultrasonic sensors (e.g.
when leaving pets inside the car).
NPA990
NIC2219
SECURITY SYSTEM
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
To exclude the ultrasonic sensors:
1. Press the ultrasonic sensor deactivation button
j1.
2. Close the door(s)/bonnet/back door and press
the lock button
on the keyfob to lock all doors/
back door.
The ultrasonic sensors are now excluded from the
alarm system. All other functions of the system re-
main activated until the alarm system is disarmed
again.
NOTE
One or any further number of presses of the ul-
trasonic sensor deactivation button
j1 excludes
the ultrasonic sensors for the next time the alarm
system is armed and only that instance. Pressing
the button twice does not reactivate the system.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)
The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)* will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the reg-
istered NATS key.
* Immobilizer
If the engine fails to start using the registered NATS
key, it may be due to interference from another
NATS key, an automated toll road device or an auto-
mated payment device on the key ring. Restart the
engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for
approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or LOCK
position and wait approximately 5 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference) sepa-
rated from the registered NATS key or NATS
Intelligent Key (where fitted).
If this procedure allows the engine to start,
NISSAN recommends placing the registered
NATS key or NATS Intelligent Key (where fitted)
on a separate key-ring to avoid interference from
other devices.
NATS security warning/indicator light
(where fitted)
One of the following functions (depending on the
vehicle specifications) indicates that the vehicle is
equipped with NATS:
•
The NATS security warning light (Type A) is lo-
cated in the meter panel and blinks whenever
the ignition switch is in the LOCK, “OFF” or Acc
position.
SIC2045Z
Meters and gauges (Type A)
NIC1402Z
Driver’s side (Type B)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
•
The NATS security indicator light (Type jB) is
located on the Driver’s side of the dashboard
and blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the
LOCK, “OFF” or Acc position.
If the NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) is mal-
functioning, this light will remain on while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
If the light remains on and/or the engine will not
start, see your NISSAN dealer for NATS service
as soon as possible. Please bring all NATS keys
or NATS Intelligent Keys when visiting your
NISSAN dealer for service.
Additional information for RHD models
If the NATS is malfunctioning, this light will turn on
after flashing six times while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
However, if the NATS security warning light turns
off after the light has remained on for 15 minutes,
there is a 10 second time slot to start the engine
after the ignition is turned off. See your NISSAN
dealer for NATS service as soon as possible.
jA
LHD models
jB
RHD models
1. Pull the bonnet lock release lever
j1 , located
below the instrument panel on the driver’s side;
the bonnet will spring up slightly.
2. Pull the lever
j2 , at the front of the bonnet, with
your fingertips and raise the bonnet.
3. Insert the support rod
j3 into the slot on the
frame behind the headlight unit.
4. When closing the bonnet, replace the support
rod in its original position, then slowly close the
bonnet and make sure it locks into place.
WARNING
Always check whether the bonnet is closed and
locked securely to prevent it from opening while
driving. The vehicle should only be operated with
the bonnet securely closed.
NPA1300
BONNET RELEASE
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER LEVER
j
A
LHD models
jB
RHD models
To open the fuel filler lid, pull up the opener lever,
located below the instrument panel on the driver’s
side. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten the
cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.
Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder as illustrated
while refuelling.
WARNING
•
Fuel is extremely flammable and highly explo-
sive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke or allow open flames
or sparks near the vehicle when refuelling.
•
Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap half
a turn and wait for any hissing sound to stop,
in order to prevent fuel from spraying out and
causing possible personal injury.
•
Use only a NISSAN fuel filler cap or exact
equivalent as a replacement. It has a built-in
safety valve needed for proper operation of
the fuel system and emission control system.
An incorrect cap can result in a serious mal-
function and possible injury.
CAUTION
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away
with water to avoid paint damage.
NPA1271 NPA832Z
FUEL FILLER LID
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
The electric parking brake can be applied or re-
leased by operating the parking brake switch jA.
To apply: Pull the switch
jAupj1 the indicator
light will illuminate.
To release: With the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion, depress the brake pedal and push the switch
jA down j2 . The indicator light will turn off.
Before driving, check that the brake warning light
goes out. For additional information, see “Warn-
ing/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.
The electric parking brake also has an auto apply
and auto release function.
Manual transmission vehicles:
•
Vehicle with key ignition switch:
The parking brake will automatically release
when you drive away using the accelerator, and
will automatically apply when the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
•
Vehicle with push-button ignition switch:
The parking brake will automatically release
when you drive away using the accelerator, and
will automatically apply when you switch the en-
gine off.
XTRONIC transmission vehicles:
The parking brake does not apply automatically. If
applied manually, the parking brake will automati-
cally release when you press the accelerator with
the shift lever in Drive (D) or Reverse (R), provided:
•
The driver is wearing a seat belt, or
•
The driver accelerates away within 5 seconds of
shifting from Park (P) or Neutral (N) to Drive (D)
or Reverse (R).
If you have tried to start driving the vehicle while not
wearing a seat belt, you will need to put on your seat
belt and place the shift lever in Drive (D) or Reverse
(R) again before the parking brake will release auto-
matically.
If you have a vehicle with XTRONIC Transmission,
and you require automatic parking brake applica-
tion, please contact a NISSAN dealer.
To keep the electric parking brake released after
turning off the ignition:
•
Vehicle with key ignition switch:
While the ignition switch is in the ON position,
press the brake pedal and push the parking brake
switch
jA , while turning the ignition switch OFF.
•
Vehicle with push-button ignition switch:
While the engine is running, press the brake
pedal and push the parking brake switch
jA,
while switching the ignition switch OFF.
The parking brake can also be released when the
ignition switch is in the OFF position, provided the
key is in the ignition switch; or for vehicles with
push-button ignition switch before a door is opened.
Press the brake pedal and push the parking brake
switch
jA.
WARNING
•
Be sure the electric parking brake is released
before driving. Failure to do so could cause
brake failure and lead to an accident.
•
Do not release the parking brake from out-
side the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle.
They could release the parking brake and
cause an accident.
•
Before leaving the vehicle, confirm that the
vehicle is held by the parking brake or trans-
mission.
NOTE
•
Do not start driving while the parking brake is
applied this may cause the paring brake to
overheat or reduce its effectiveness, which
could result in an accident.
NPA1270
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
•
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven
without releasing the parking brake. See “Au-
dible reminders” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
•
While the electric parking brake is applied or
released, an operating sound is heard from
the lower side of the rear seat. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
•
When the electric parking brake is frequently
applied and released in a short period of time,
the parking brake may not operate in order to
prevent the parking brake system from over-
heating. If this occurs, operate the electric
parking brake switch again after waiting ap-
proximately 1 minute.
•
The electric parking brake can only be re-
leased with the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
•
If the electric parking brake must be applied
while driving in an emergency, pull up and
hold the parking brake switch. When you re-
lease the parking brake switch, the parking
brake will be released.
•
While pulling up the electric parking brake
switch while driving, the parking brake is ap-
plied and a chime sounds. The parking brake
indicator light in the meter and in the parking
brake switch illuminate. This does not indi-
cate a malfunction. The electric parking brake
indicator lights in the meter and in the parking
brake switch turn off when the parking brake
is released.
•
Pull up the electric parking brake switch twice
so that the maximum electric parking brake
force is applied to the vehicle.
•
When pulling the electric parking brake switch
up with the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC
position, the parking brake switch indicator
light will continue to illuminate for a short pe-
riod of time.
CAUTION
To park the vehicle in cold climates place the
shift lever in 1st (1) or Reverse (R) (or in Park (P)
for automatic (AT) vehicles), and place suitable
chocks at both the front and back of a wheel with
the electric parking brake released. If the electric
parking brake is applied in cold climates, the
brake may become frozen and cannot be re-
leased.
DRIVING AWAY WHEN TOWING A
TRAILER
Please note the following points to prevent the ve-
hicle from rolling back unintentionally on a gradient.
•
Pull and hold the parking brake switch and press
the accelerator. The parking brake will remain
engaged and prevent any tendency to roll back
down the slope.
•
You can release the parking brake switch as
soon as the engine is delivering enough power
to the wheels.
Depending on the weight of the vehicle and trailer
and the steepness of the slope, there may be a ten-
dency to roll back downhill when driving away from
a standstill. You can prevent this by pulling up the
parking brake switch as you press the accelerator
(in the same way as with a conventional handbrake).
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.
Release the lock lever as illustrated and adjust the
steering wheel to the desired position (up or down,
forwards or backwards). Firmly push the lock lever
back into position to lock the steering wheel in place.
CAUTION
Do not store the sun visor before returning it to
its original position.
1. To block out glare from the front, move the main
sun visor downwards.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the main
sun visor from the centre mount and move it to
the side.
INSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRROR
j
1
Night position
j2
Day position
jA
Front of the vehicle
The night position
j1 will reduce glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
WARNING
Only use the night position
j1 when necessary,
as it reduces rear-view clarity.
NPA1272 NPA839Z
NPA862Z
STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS MIRRORS
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
AUTOMATIC ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE
MIRROR (where fitted)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically
adjusts the reflection according to the intensity of
the following vehicle’s headlights on the sensor
jC.
The automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror will oper-
ate when the ignition switch is in the Acc or ON
position. The light
jA shows the system is activated.
The automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror can be de-
activated by pressing the power button
jB . The light
jA will turn off to show system deactivation.
CAUTION
Do not cover the sensor, hang any object on the
mirror or spray glass cleaner directly on the mir-
ror. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensor, resulting in improper operation.
OUTSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRRORS
WARNING
•
Check the position of all mirrors before driv-
ing. Altering their position while driving could
distract your attention from the driving opera-
tion.
•
Objects viewed in the outside mirrors are
closer than they appear.
•
Never touch the outside rear-view mirrors
while they are in motion. Doing so may pinch
your fingers or damage the mirror.
•
Never drive the vehicle with the outside rear-
view mirrors folded. This reduces rear view
visibility and may lead to an accident.
Adjusting — Remote control
jA
LHD models
jB
RHD models
Slide the control to the left
j1 or to the right j2to
select the left or right outside rear-view mirror, then
adjust the mirror to the desired position by pushing
the control as illustrated
j3.
NPA1273
NPA1276
NPA1278
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Folding — Manual control
Fold the outside rear-view mirror by pushing it to-
wards the rear of the vehicle.
jA
LHD models
jB
RHD models
Folding — Remote control (where fitted)
The outside rear-view mirrors automatically fold
when the outside rear-view mirror folding button j1
is pressed. To unfold, push the button again.
NOTE
If the mirror becomes displaced from its adjusted
position, use the following procedure to return it
to the correct geared position:
1. Fold the mirrors electronically using the outside
rear-view mirror folding button.
2. Wait until the mirror emits a strong noise, this
confirms that the mirror has correctly engaged.
3. Fold out the mirrors electronically using the out-
side rear-view mirror folding button.
4. Adjust the mirror to the correct driving angle us-
ing the remote control, see -19.
VANITY MIRROR
To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun
visor and lift up the cover.
NPA1277
NPA842Z
Left hand drive
NPA910Z
Right hand drive
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4 Display screen, heater and air conditioner,
and audio system
Display screen, heater and air conditioner,
and audio system
Safety precautions ................................................... 4-2
Rear-view monitor (where fitted)............................... 4-2
How to read the displayed lines .......................... 4-3
Rear-view monitor setting.................................... 4-3
Operating tips..................................................... 4-3
Around View Monitor (where fitted).......................... 4-4
Operation ........................................................... 4-7
Guide lines ......................................................... 4-7
Difference between predictive and actual
distances............................................................ 4-9
Moving object detection (MOD) .......................... 4-12
How to adjust the screen view ............................ 4-13
Around View Monitor settings ............................. 4-13
Operating tips..................................................... 4-13
Vents....................................................................... 4-14
Side and centre vents ......................................... 4-14
Heater and air conditioner operation ........................ 4-15
Manual air conditioner......................................... 4-16
Automatic dual zone air conditioner (where
fitted).................................................................. 4-20
Audio system........................................................... 4-23
Audio operation precautions ............................... 4-23
Antenna.............................................................. 4-23
FM AM radio with CD player (where fitted) .............. 4-24
Audio main operation .......................................... 4-25
Radio operation .................................................. 4-25
SETUP button .................................................... 4-26
Compact Disc (CD) operation ............................ 4-28
AUX socket ........................................................ 4-30
USB Memory operation (where fitted) ................. 4-30
iPod® player operation (where fitted).................. 4-31
Bluetooth® operation.......................................... 4-32
NissanConnect (where fitted)................................... 4-38
Steering wheel switch for audio control (where
fitted)....................................................................... 4-38
Main operation.................................................... 4-38
Mobile phone integration for FM AM radio with
CD player (where fitted)........................................... 4-39
Bluetooth® mobile phone feature........................ 4-39
Hands-free telephone control.............................. 4-42
Steering wheel switches (where fitted)................ 4-44
Car phone or CB radio ............................................ 4-45
WARNING
•
Do not adjust the heater and air conditioner
controls or audio controls while driving so that
full attention may be given to vehicle opera-
tion.
•
If you noticed any foreign objects entering the
system hardware, spilled liquid on the sys-
tem, or noticed smoke or fumes coming out
from the system, or any other unusual opera-
tion is observed, stop using the system imme-
diately and contact the nearest NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop. Ignoring such condi-
tions may lead to an accident, fire or electric
shock.
•
Do not disassemble or modify this system. If
you do, it may lead to an accident, fire, or
electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not use the system when the engine is not
running for extended periods of time to prevent
battery discharge.
j1
Display
j2
Camera
When the shift lever is moved into the R (Reverse)
position, the monitor (NissanConnect display)
shows the view from the rear of the vehicle.
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
detecting large stationary objects. It is intended to
help avoid damaging the vehicle when reversing.
However, the system will not detect small objects
below the bumper and may not detect objects close
to the bumper or on the ground.
WARNING
•
The rear-view camera is a convenience but it
is not a substitute for proper reversing. Al-
ways turn your head and visually check that
the manoeuvre is safe to do so before revers-
ing. Always reverse slowly.
•
The distance from the objects viewed in the
rear-view monitor differs from actual distance
because of the use of wide-angle lens. Ob-
jects in the rear-view monitor will appear visu-
ally reversed compared to those viewed in the
inside and outside mirrors.
•
Make sure that the back door is securely
closed when reversing.
•
The area below the bumper and corner areas
of the bumper cannot be viewed on the rear-
view monitor because of its monitoring range
limitation.
•
Do not put anything on the rear-view camera.
The rear-view camera is installed above the
number plate.
•
When washing the vehicle with high pressure
water, be sure not to spray it around the cam-
era. Otherwise, water may enter the camera
unit causing possibly water condensation on
the lens, a malfunction, a fire or an electric
shock.
•
Do not strike the camera. It is a precision in-
strument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or
cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric
shock.
CAUTION
There is a transparent cover over the camera
lens. Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt
or snow from it.
NAA1434
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS REAR-VIEW MONITOR
(where fitted)
4-2 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
WARNING
•
Use the displayed lines as a reference. The
lines are highly affected by the number of oc-
cupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road con-
dition and road grade. Always check with your
eyes directly around the vehicle while revers-
ing.
•
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
line should be used as a reference only when
the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for refer-
ence only and may be different than the ac-
tual distance between the vehicle and dis-
played objects.
•
When reversing the vehicle up a hill, objects
viewed in the monitor are further than they
appear. When reversing the vehicle down a
hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer
than they appear. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly judge
distances to other objects.
The lines which are displayed on the monitor, indi-
cate the vehicle’s clearance and distance between
the obstacle and the bumper
jA.
Displayed lines indicate the distances between the
obstacle and the bumper as follows:
j1 0.5 m (1.5 ft) – red
j2 1 m (3 ft) – yellow
j3 2 m (7 ft) – green
j4 3 m (10 ft) – green
NOTE
•
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than the
actual clearance.
•
The lines are indicated as reference distances
to the obstacle.
REAR-VIEW MONITOR SETTING
For details, see the separately provided NissanCon-
nect Owner’s Manual.
OPERATING TIPS
•
When the shift lever is shifted to R (Reverse), the
NissanConnect display automatically changes to
the rear-view monitor mode.
•
When the shift lever is returned to a position
other than R (Reverse), it may take some time
until the screen changes. Objects on the screen
may be distorted until they are completely dis-
played.
•
When the temperature is extremely high or low,
the screen may not clearly display objects. This
is not a malfunction.
•
When strong light directly enters the camera
lens, objects may not be displayed clearly. This
is not a malfunction.
•
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light from
the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
•
The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
This is not a malfunction.
•
The colours of objects on the rear-view monitor
may differ somewhat from those of the actual
object.
•
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night.
•
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the transparent
camera cover, the rear-view monitor may not
clearly display objects. Clean the transparent
camera cover.
•
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean
the transparent camera cover. This will cause
discoloration. To clean the transparent camera
cover, wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry
cloth.
SAA0889Z
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-3
•
Do not damage the transparent camera cover as
the NissanConnect display may be adversely af-
fected.
•
Do not use body wax on the transparent camera
cover. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth damp-
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.
j1
Message area
j2
[MOD] indicator*
j3
Bird’s-eye view or side view
j4
Parking sensors
j5
Corner indication
j6
[PA] switch**
Bird’s-eye view or front-side view
j7
Front or rear view indicator
** For more information, see “Intelligent Parking As-
sist (IPA) (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.
Designs and items displayed on the screen may
vary depending on the country and model.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, push the
<CAMERA> button or move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position to operate the Around View Moni-
tor. The monitor displays various views around the
vehicle.
NAA1437
Camera button
NAA1478
Left Hand Drive
NAA1498
Right Hand Drive
AROUND VIEW MONITOR
(where fitted)
4-4 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
NOTE
At first operation, the corner lines are blinking
yellow for about 3 seconds. This is not a malfunc-
tion but a reminder to be cautious.
Available views:
•
Bird’s-eye View
The surrounding view of the vehicle.
•
Front-side View
The view around and ahead of the front passen-
ger’s side wheel.
•
Front view
The view to the front of the vehicle.
•
Rear view
The view to the rear of the vehicle.
•
Full screen rear view
The view to the rear of the vehicle (which is a
little wider than the standard rear view)
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.
There are some areas where the system will not
show objects. When in the front or the rear view dis-
play, an object below the bumper or on the ground
may not be viewed
j1 . When in the bird-eye view,
a tall object near the seam j3 of the camera view-
ing areas will not appear in the monitor
j2.
WARNING
•
The Around View Monitor is intended for day
time use. Do not use the system in bad light
conditions.
•
The Around View Monitor is a convenience
feature. It is not a substitute for proper ve-
hicle operation because it has areas where
objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of
the vehicle in particular, are blind spots where
objects do not appear in the bird’s-eye, front
or rear views. Always look out the windows
and check to be sure that it is safe to move.
The driver is always responsible for safety dur-
ing parking and other manoeuvres.
•
Do not use the Around View Monitor with the
outside mirror in the stored position, and
make sure that the back door is securely
closed when operating the vehicle using the
Around View Monitor.
•
The distance between objects viewed on the
Around View Monitor differs from the actual
distance.
•
The cameras are installed on the front grille,
the outside mirrors and above the rear num-
ber plate. Do not put anything on the cam-
eras.
•
When washing the vehicle with high-pressure
water, be sure not to spray it around the cam-
eras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on the lens,
a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
NAA1506
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-5
•
Do not strike the cameras. They are precision
instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunc-
tion or cause damage resulting in a fire or an
electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the lens when cleaning dirt or
snow from the front of the camera.
NAA1450
Example for Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models, for the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models, the screen layout will be opposite.
4-6 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
OPERATION
The Around View Monitor display consists of the
front, left, right and rear screens. You can see a
combination of different views on the screens as
illustrated.
jA : Audio or navigation screen before the Around
View Monitor is operated.
j1 : Front view and bird’s-eye view
j2 : Rear view and bird’s-eye view
j3 : Front view and front side view
j4 : Rear view and front side view
j5 : Rear view
: Shift lever into R (Reverse)
: Shift lever out of R (Reverse)
: Push the <CAMERA> button
The Around View monitor starts if:
– R (Reverse) gear is selected
– The <CAMERA> button is pushed
– The front parking sensors (where fitted) detect
an object.
Starting with the shift lever operation
•
When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Re-
verse) position Around View Monitor starts auto-
matically and the rear view and bird’s-eye view
are displayed
j2.
•
When the shift lever is shifted out of the R (Re-
verse) position jA , the monitor changes from
Around View Monitor screen to the audio or navi-
gation screen.
•
In R (Reverse) gear, the rear view and bird’s-eye
view j2 are shown. The passenger’s side view
on the monitor changes to the front side view
j4
when the <CAMERA> button is pushed.
Push the <CAMERA> button again change to
Rear View
j5 . When the shift lever is shifted out
of the R (Reverse), the screen changes to before
reversing screen.
Push the <CAMERA> button from
j5 to change
back to rear view and bird’s-eye view j2.
Starting with the CAMERA button
operation
•
When the <CAMERA> button is pushed, Around
View Monitor operates and the front view and
bird’s-eye view are displayed
j1.
•
The front view and bird’s-eye view are displayed
j1 . When the <CAMERA> button is pushed
again
j3 , the view on the screen on the passen-
ger’s side changes to the front-side view. Push-
ing the <CAMERA> button again turns the
Around View Monitor off.
•
To change the driver’s side screen between front
view and rear view use the shift lever.
•
When the shift lever is not in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed increases above
approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH), the monitor
changes from Around View Monitor screen to
the audio or navigation screen.
GUIDE LINES
WARNING
•
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
line should be used as a reference only when
the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for refer-
ence only and may be different than the ac-
tual distance between the vehicle and dis-
played objects.
•
Use the displayed lines and the bird-eye view
as a reference. The lines and the bird-eye view
are greatly affected by the number of occu-
pants, fuel level, vehicle position, road condi-
tion and road grade.
•
If the tyres are replaced with different sized
tyres, the predictive course line and the bird-
eye view may be displayed incorrectly.
•
When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects
viewed in the monitor are further than they
appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill,
objects viewed in the monitor are closer than
they appear. Use the mirrors or actually look
to properly judge distances to other objects.
The vehicle width and predictive course lines are
wider than the actual width and course.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-7
Guiding lines
Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width and
distances to objects with reference to the vehicle
body line
jA , are displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
•
Red line j1 : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
•
Yellow line j2 : approx.1m(3ft)
•
Green line j3 : approx.2m(7ft)
•
Green line j4 : approx. 3 m (10 ft)
Vehicle width guide lines and static predictive
course lines
j5:
Indicate the vehicle width when reversing.
Dynamic predictive course lines
j6:
The dynamic predictive course lines will be dis-
played on the monitor when the steering wheel is
turned. The course lines will move depending on
how much the steering wheel is turned and will not
be displayed while the steering wheel is in the
straight ahead position.
The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle
speed is above approximately 30 km/h (20 MPH).
WARNING
•
Objects in the monitor will appear visually op-
posite than when viewed in the rear view and
outside mirrors.
•
On a snow-covered or slippery road, there
may be a difference between the predictive
course line and the actual course line.
•
The displayed lines on the rear view will ap-
pear slightly off to the right because the rear
view camera is not installed in the rear centre
of the vehicle.
NOTE
When the monitor displays the front view and the
steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less
from the neutral position, both the right and left
predictive course lines
j6 are displayed. When
the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or
more, a line is displayed only on the opposite
side of the turn.
Bird-eye view
WARNING
•
Objects in the bird-eye view will appear fur-
ther than the actual distance because the
bird-eye view is a pseudo view that is pro-
cessed by combining the views from the cam-
eras on the outside mirrors, the front and the
rear of the vehicle.
•
Tall objects, such as a kerb or a vehicle, may
be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of
the views.
•
Objects that are above the camera cannot be
displayed.
•
The view for the bird-eye view may be mis-
aligned when the camera position alters.
•
A line on the ground may be misaligned and is
not seen as being straight at the seam of the
views. The misalignment will increase as the
line proceeds away from the vehicle.
The bird-eye view shows the overhead view of the
vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and
the predicted course to a parking space.
NAA1452
Example
NAA1236
4-8 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
The vehicle icon j1 shows the position of the ve-
hicle.
NOTE
The size of the vehicle icon on the bird-eye view
may differ somewhat from the actual vehicle.
At first operation, the blind spot corner lines
j2on
all four corners of the vehicle icon are blinking yel-
low for about 3 seconds. The four corners
j3 of the
vehicle are displayed in red if parking sensor is not
fitted, or is turned off.
NOTE
•
The areas that the cameras cannot cover are
indicated in black.
•
Blind spot corner lines j2 blink (yellow) on all
four corners of the vehicle icon as a reminder
to be cautious. This is not a malfunction.
Front-side view
*: For the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models, the
screen layout will be shown opposite.
Guiding lines:
CAUTION
The actual distance to objects may differ from
the distance shown.
Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front
end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line
j1 shows the front part of
the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line
j2 shows the vehicle width
including the outside mirror.
The extensions
j3 of both the front j1 and side j2
lines are shown with a green dotted line.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
WARNING
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line on the front and the rear view should
be used as a reference only when the vehicle is
on a level, paved surface. The distance viewed
on the monitor is for reference only and may be
different than the actual distance between the
vehicle and displayed objects.
NAA1348
Front–side view, Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models*
NAA1325
Front–side view, Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models*
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-9
Moving to a steep uphill
When moving the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide
lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown
closer than the actual distance. For example, the
display shows1m(3ft)totheplace
jA , but the
actual1m(3ft)distanceonthehill is the place
jB.
Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the moni-
tor further than it appears.
Moving to a steep downhill
When moving the vehicle down a hill, the distance
guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are
shown further than the actual distance. For example,
thedisplayshows1m(3ft)totheplace
jA , but the
actual1m(3ft)distance on the hill is the place
jB.
Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the moni-
tor closer than it appears.
Moving near a projecting object
The dynamic predictive course lines jA may show
that the vehicle is not touching the object. However,
the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the
actual moving course.
WARNING
The distance viewed on the monitor is for refer-
ence only and may be different than the actual
distance between the vehicle and displayed ob-
jects.
NAA1374 NAA1375
4-10 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
The predictive course lines jA do not touch the
object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit
the object if it projects over the actual moving
course.
There may be a small visible distance between the
vehicle and the object in the bird’s-eye view
jBon
the monitor.
Moving closer to a projecting object
The position jC is shown further than the position
jB in the display. However, the position jC is actu-
ally at the same distance as the position
jA . The
vehicle may hit the object when moving toward the
position
jA if the object projects over the actual
moving course.
NAA1349 SAA3575 NAA1376
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-11
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system can
inform the driver of the moving objects surrounding
the vehicle.
The MOD system detects moving objects by using
image processing technology on the image shown
on the Around View Monitor display.
The MOD system operates in the following condi-
tions when the camera view is displayed:
•
When the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position
(XTRONIC and MT models) or P (Park) position
(XTRONIC models) and the vehicle is stopped,
the MOD system detects the moving objects in
the bird-eye view.
•
When the shift lever is in the any position other
than R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed
is above 0 km/h and below approximately 8 km/h
(5 MPH), the MOD system detects moving ob-
jects in the front view.
•
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion and the vehicle speed is below approximately
8 km/h (5 MPH), the MOD system detects mov-
ing objects in the rear view. The MOD system
will not operate correctly if the back door is open.
The MOD icon will change to blue to show which
view is currently active.
The MOD system does not detect moving objects in
the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed
on the screen when in this view.
WARNING
•
The MOD system is not a substitute for proper
vehicle operation and is not designed to pre-
vent contact with the objects surrounding the
vehicle. When manoeuvring, always use the
outside mirror and rear view mirror and turn
and check the surroundings to ensure it is
safe to manoeuvre.
•
The MOD system does not have the function
to detect the surrounding stationary objects.
*: For the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model, the screen
layout will be opposite.
When the MOD system detects a moving object
surrounding the vehicle, the yellow frame will be dis-
played on the view where the objects are detected
and a chime will sound once. While the MOD sys-
tem continues to detect moving objects, the yellow
frame continues to be displayed.
The yellow frame
j2 is displayed on each view in
the front view, front-wide view, rear view and rear-
wide view modes.
A blue MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
MOD system is operative. A grey MOD icon is dis-
played in the view where the MOD system is not
operative.
WARNING
•
Do not use the MOD system when towing a
trailer (if available). The system may not func-
tion properly.
•
Excessive noise (for example, audio system
volume or open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
•
The MOD system performance will be limited
according to environmental conditions and
surrounding objects such as:
– When there is low contrast between back-
ground and the moving objects.
– When there is blinking source of light.
– When strong light such as another vehi-
cle’s headlight or sunlight is present.
– When camera orientation is not in its usual
position, such as when mirror is folded.
– When there is dirt, water drops or snow on
the camera lens.
– When the position of the moving objects in
the display is not changed.
NAA1499
Front view / rear view*
4-12 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
•
The MOD system might detect flowing water
droplets on the camera lens, white smoke
from the exhaust, moving shadows, etc.
•
The MOD system may not function properly
depending on the speed, direction, distance
or shape of the moving objects.
•
If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts
where the camera is installed, leaving it mis-
aligned or bent, the sensing zone may be al-
tered and the MOD system may not detect
objects properly.
•
When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not display objects
clearly. This is not a malfunction.
Camera maintenance
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera, the
MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the
camera.
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
VIEW
To adjust the display brightness of the Around View
Monitor, use the settings described in the sepa-
rately provided NissanConnect owner’s manual.
Do not adjust the settings while the vehicle is mov-
ing. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SETTINGS
To switch the Moving Object Detection between on
or off, proceed as follows:
1) Press the steering wheel button to enter the ve-
hicle information display, see “Vehicle informa-
tion display” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
2) Select the [Settings] key using the steering
wheel switch. Scroll by push up or down button
jB , select by pressing button jB.
3) Select the [Driving Aids] key.
4) Select the [Parking Aids] key.
5) Select the [Moving Objects Detection] key to
switch between on or off. If a marker is shown
the item is switched on.
View malfunction
When the [ ! ] icon is displayed on the screen, there
will be abnormal conditions in the Around View
Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving opera-
tion but the system should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
When the [ X ] icon is displayed on the screen, the
camera image may be receiving temporary elec-
tronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This
will not hinder normal driving operation but the sys-
tem should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop if it occurs frequently.
OPERATING TIPS
•
When the view is switched, the display images
on the screen may be displayed with some de-
lay.
•
When the temperature is extremely high or low,
the screen may not display objects clearly. This
is not a malfunction.
NIC2204
NAA1418
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-13
•
When strong light shines directly on to the cam-
era, objects may not be displayed clearly. This is
not a malfunction.
•
The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
This is not a malfunction.
•
The colours of objects on the Around View Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from the actual colour
of objects. This is not a malfunction.
•
Objects on the monitor may not be clear and the
colour of the object may differ in a dark environ-
ment. This is not a malfunction.
•
There may be differences in sharpness between
each camera view of the bird-eye view.
•
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera,
the Around View Monitor may not display ob-
jects clearly. Clean the camera.
•
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean
the camera. This will cause discoloration. To
clean the camera, wipe with a cloth that has
been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.
•
Do not damage the camera because the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
•
Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any
wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened
with a mild detergent diluted with water.
SIDE AND CENTRE VENTS
m
:
This symbol indicates that the vents are
closed. Moving the side control to this
position will close the vents.
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by mov-
ing the centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the
desired position is achieved.
NAA1378
Centre vents
VENTS
4-14 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
m
:
This symbol indicates that the vents are
closed. Moving the side control to this
position will close the vents.
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by mov-
ing the centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the
desired position is achieved.
WARNING
•
Do not leave children or adults who would
normally require the support of others alone
in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone
either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal inju-
ries to people or animals.
•
Do not use the recirculation mode for long
periods as it may cause the interior air to be-
come stale and the windows to fog up. It is
recommended that you use the outside air
mode in cold weather to keep the windows
clear.
•
Do not adjust the positioning of the heating/
ventilation or air conditioning controls while
driving.
NOTE
•
Condensation forms inside the air condition-
ing unit when the air conditioner is running,
and is safely discharged underneath your ve-
hicle.
Traces of water on the ground are therefore
normal.
•
Models with Stop/Start System:
Whilst the engine is stopped by the Stop/Start
System, selecting airflow to the front defog-
ger will cause the engine to be automatically
restarted.
Whilst the engine is running, selecting airflow
to the front defogger will prevent the Stop/
Start System automatically stopping the en-
gine.
The Stop/Start System will prevent unneces-
sary fuel consumption and exhaust emis-
sions. When the engine is stopped by the
Stop/Start System heater and air conditioner
performance may be reduced. To keep full
heater and air conditioner performance, re-
start the engine by pressing the Stop/Start
System OFF switch, or by turning the ignition
switch.
For more information on the Stop/Start Sys-
tem, see “Stop/Start System (where fitted)”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
•
Odours from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up inside the air conditioner unit
and it can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
•
When parking, set the air recirculation mode
to off to allow fresh air flowing into the pas-
senger compartment. This should help reduc-
ing the odours inside the vehicle.
NAA1377
Side vents
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
OPERATION
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-15
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
j
1
Fan speed control dial
j2
Windscreen defogger MAX button
j3
Air conditioner ON/OFF button
j4
Air recirculation button
j5
Rear window defogger button
(For details, see “Defogger switch” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section)
j6
Temperature control dial
j7
Floor outlets airflow selection button
j8
Centre and side vent outlets airflow selection
button
j9
Windscreen outlets airflow selection button
Controls
Fan speed control dial
m
:
To switch the fan on or off and to control the fan
speed, turn the fan speed control dial clockwise to
increase the fan speed. To decrease the fan speed,
turn the fan speed control dial anticlockwise.
Turning the dial completely anticlockwise turns off
the fan.
Temperature control dial:
Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired
air temperature from the vents and floor outlets.
Air flow control buttons:
Use these buttons to manually select the air flow
from the air outlets as described below:
: Air flows mainly from the windscreen defog-
ger outlets.
: Air flows from centre and side vents.
: Air flows mainly from floor outlets.
Air recirculation button
m
:
Outside air circulation
•
Press the air recirculation ( ) button to the
“OFF” position to draw outside air into the pas-
senger compartment (the indicator light goes
off). Use the “OFF” position for normal heating
ventilation, or air conditioner (where fitted) op-
eration.
NIC2185
Manual air conditioner
4-16 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
•
Air recirculation
Press the air recirculation ( ) button to the
“ON” position (the indicator light goes on). Use
the “ON” position in situations such as: driving
on a dust raised road, avoiding traffic fumes or
having maximum cooling from the air conditioner
(where fitted).
If the windows fog up, switch on the air condi-
tioning (where fitted).
A/C (Air Conditioner) button (where fitted):
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioner on
or off. When the air conditioner is on, the A/C indi-
cator light illuminates.
Operation
The heater and air conditioner operate when the
engine is running. The air blower will operate even if
the engine is turned off and the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
NOTE
The air conditioner cooling function operates only
when the engine is running and the fan is acti-
vated.
1. Press the air recirculation (
) button to the
“OFF” position.
2. Use the airflow control buttons for:
– Cooling: select the
or setting.
– Heating: select the or setting.
– Heating and defogging: select the
set-
ting.
– Ventilation: select the
or setting.
– Windscreen defogging: select the
set-
ting.
3. Set the fan speed to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired
position.
NOTE
When selecting the
or setting, turn
the temperature control dial to the desired
position between the middle and the maxi-
mum “HOT” (right) position.
5. Press the A/C button (where fitted) to the “ON”
position and the indicator light will come on.
Switch this mode on for dehumidified heating or
cooling.
NOTE
•
The air conditioner mode is used to cool and
dehumidify. For quick cooling when the out-
side temperature is high, select the air recir-
culation mode position (
). Be sure to re-
turn to the outside air mode to avoid windows
from fogging-up and interior air from becom-
ing stale.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly this is not a malfunction.
•
For quick heating, press the air recirculation
( ) button to the “ON” position. Be sure to
return to the “OFF” position for normal heat-
ing (no indicator light) in order to avoid win-
dow fog and stale interior.
Windscreen defogger
m
(manual mode):
Use this mode for defogging the windscreen as fol-
lows:
1. Press the
button.
The system will set the fan speed to maximum.
Air circulation is cancelled, the airflow mode
and the air conditioner is activated automatically.
Air flows mainly from the defogger outlets.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the maximum
(HOT) position.
3. To switch off, press the
button to return to
the previous mode.
NOTE
•
To quickly defrost/defog the windscreen, set
the fan speed to the maximum position.
•
As soon as possible after the windscreen has
been cleared of ice or fog, press the wind-
screen defogger button.
•
When the windscreen defogging mode is acti-
vated, the air conditioner will automatically
switch on at outside temperatures above –2°C
(28°F) and the air recirculation mode will be
switched off.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-17
Operating tips
•
In order to improve the heater operation, clear
any snow and ice from the wiper blade and air
inlet in front of the windscreen.
•
After parking in the sun, drive for two or three
minutes with the windows open to vent hot air
from the passenger compartment. Then close
the windows to allow the acceleration of the air
conditioner’s cooling operation.
•
Keep the windows closed while the air condi-
tioner is operating.
•
The air conditioning system should be operated
for about 10 minutes, at least once a month. This
helps prevent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
•
If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the
“HOT” position, turn the air conditioner off. For
additional information, see “Engine overheat” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section.
•
If the engine coolant reaches an extremely high
temperature, the air conditioning system will au-
tomatically turn off. This may happen for example
if the engine runs at idle speed for a long time on
a hot day.
Quick reference charts
The following charts show the button, air intake and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting.
NOTE
The air recirculation mode should not be selected
for either normal heating or defrosting.
m
NAA1401
HEATING
Controls Settings
j1 Fan speed control dial
Completely
clockwise
j2
Air conditioner button
(where fitted)
OFF
j3 Air recirculation button OFF
j4 Temperature control dial HOT
j5 Air flow control button
m
4-18 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
m
NAA1403
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
Controls Settings
j1 Defogger MAX button ON
j2 Air conditioner button ON
j3 Air recirculation button OFF
j4 Temperature control dial
Completely
clockwise
m
NAA1405
COOLING
Controls Settings
j1 Fan speed control dial
Completely
clockwise
j2
Air conditioner button
(where fitted)
ON
j3 Air recirculation button
ON (Max)
OFF (Normal)
j4 Temperature control dial COLD
j5 Air flow control button
m
Air conditioner filter (where fitted)
The air conditioning system is equipped with a filter
which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure
the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates effi-
ciently, replace the filter regularly. For filter replace-
ment, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
The filter should be replaced if the airflow is ex-
tremely reduced or when the windows fog up
easily during air conditioning system operation.
Servicing air conditioner
The air conditioning system (where fitted) in your
NISSAN vehicle is charged with an environmentally
friendly refrigerant.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
This refrigerant will not harm the earth’s ozone
layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant are re-
quired when servicing your vehicle’s air conditioner.
Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
severe damage to the air conditioning system. See
“Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in
the “9. Technical information” section of this manual.
A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop will be able
to service the air conditioning system.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-19
AUTOMATIC DUAL ZONE AIR
CONDITIONER (where fitted)
j
1
Windscreen defogger MAX button
j2
Temperature control dial (Driver’s side (LHD)/
Passenger’s side (RHD))
j3
Air recirculation button
j4
Fan speed control buttons
j5
ON/OFF button
j6
Temperature control dial (Driver’s side (RHD)/
Passenger’s side (LHD))
j7
ThermaClear Heated Windscreen button
(where fitted)
(For details, see “ThermaClear Heated
Windscreen button” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section)
j8
Rear window defogger button
(For details, see “Defogger switch” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section)
j9
Dual zone control ON/OFF button
j10
Floor outlets airflow selection button
j11
Centre and side vent outlets airflow selection
button
j12
Windscreen outlets airflow selection button
j13
Automatic climate control button
j14
Air conditioner ON/OFF button
WARNING
•
Do not leave children or adults who would
normally require the support of others alone
in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone
either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal inju-
ries to people or animals.
•
Do not use the recirculation mode for long
periods as it may cause the interior air to be-
come stale and the windows to fog up. It is
recommended that you use the outside air
mode in cold weather to keep the windows
clear.
NIC2182
Automatic air conditioner with windscreen defogger (where fitted)
4-20 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
•
Do not adjust the positioning of the heating/
ventilation or air conditioning controls while
driving.
NOTE
•
The air conditioner cooling function operates
only when the engine is running, and the am-
bient temperature is above -2°C (28°F).
•
The air conditioner can be used to dehumidify
when heating, or to reduce air temperature
and dehumidify when cooling. This is possible
in both auto or manual control mode as long
as the fan speed is at minimum (first bar) or
higher.
•
When the AUTO mode is selected, the tem-
perature of the passenger compartment will
be maintained automatically. Air flow distribu-
tion and fan speed will also be controlled au-
tomatically.
Controls
NOTE
Before any selection or change is made, press
the AUTO button to activate the heater and air
conditioner system.
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO
mode):
This mode may be used all year round. The system
works automatically to control the inside tempera-
ture, air flow distribution and fan speed after the
preferred temperature is set manually.
1. Press the AUTO button (the indicator light will
illuminate).
2. Operate the driver’s side temperature control dial
to set the desired temperature.
Adjust the temperature to about 22°C (72°F) for
normal operation.
3. Driver’s side and passenger side temperatures
can be set independently using the individual
temperature control dial. When the passenger
side temperature control dial is turned, the DUAL
indicator light will come on. To turn off the pas-
senger side temperature control, press the DUAL
button.
NOTE
•
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly, this is not a malfunction.
Heating (AUTO mode):
Use this mode for heating purposes only.
1. Press the A/C button to turn off the air condi-
tioner cooling function (A/C indicator light goes
off).
2. Select the desired temperature with the tempera-
ture control dial.
•
Do not set the temperature at a lower level than
the one of the outside air temperature. Other-
wise the system may not work properly.
•
This mode is not recommended if the windscreen
fogs up.
Airflow control buttons:
Use these buttons to manually select the air flow
form these outlets as described below:
: Air flows mainly from the windscreen defog-
ger outlets.
: Air flows from centre and side vents.
: Air flows mainly from floor outlets.
Windscreen defogger
m
(manual mode):
Use this mode for defogging the windscreen as fol-
lows:
1. Press the
button.
The system will set the fan speed to maximum.
Air circulation is cancelled, the airflow mode
and the air conditioner is activated automatically.
Air flows mainly from the defogger outlets.
2. To switch off, press the
button to return to
the previous mode or the AUTO button for auto
climate control mode.
NOTE
•
To quickly defrost/defog the windscreen, set
the fan speed to the maximum position.
•
As soon as possible after the windscreen has
been cleared of ice or fog, press either the
windscreen defogger button or AUTO button.
•
When the windscreen defogging mode is acti-
vated, the air conditioner will automatically
switch on at outside temperatures above –2°C
(28°F) and the air recirculation mode will be
switched off.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-21
Heating and defogging (Manual mode):
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
screen.
Use the airflow control buttons to select the
button is pressed. Switch on the air-conditioning to
improve the defogging and adjust the preferred fan
speed and temperature.
Fan speed control
m
(Manual mode):
Press the fan speed control buttons to adjust the fan
speed.
Press the AUTO button to change the fan speed to
automatic mode.
Air recirculation:
Use this mode to recirculate interior air inside the
passenger compartment in situations such as driv-
ing on a dust raised road, avoiding traffic fumes or
having maximum cooling from the air conditioner.
Press the <
> button to recirculate interior air.
The indicator light illuminates and the air conditioner
will automatically come on.
When the air recirculation mode is switched off, out-
side air is drawn into the passenger compartment.
Outside air circulation :
Use this mode to draw outside air into the passen-
ger compartment for normal heating, ventilation or
air conditioner operation.
Press the <
> button to change the air intake
from the air recirculation to the outside air mode.
The indicator light (
) turns off.
To turn the system on/off:
Press the “ON/OFF” button to turn the system on or
off.
Operating tips
•
In order to improve the heater operation, clear
the snow and ice from the wiper blade and air
inlet in front of the windscreen.
•
When the engine coolant temperature and out-
side air temperature are low, the airflow from the
floor outlets may not operate for a maximum of
150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction.
After the coolant temperature has warmed up,
the airflow from the floor outlets will operate nor-
mally.
•
After parking in the sun, drive for two or three
minutes with the windows open to vent hot air
from the passenger compartment. Then, close
the windows. This will allow the acceleration of
the air conditioner’s cooling operation.
•
Keep windows closed while the air conditioner is
operating.
•
The air conditioning system should be operated
for about 10 minutes, at least once a month. This
helps prevent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
•
If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the
“HOT” position, turn the air conditioner off. For
additional information, see “Engine overheat” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section.
•
If the engine coolant reaches an extremely high
temperature, the air conditioning system will au-
tomatically turn off. This may happen for example
if the engine runs at idle speed for a long time on
a hot day.
Air conditioner filter
The air conditioning system is equipped with a filter
which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure
the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates effi-
ciently, replace the filter regularly. To replace the fil-
ter, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
The filter should be replaced if the airflow is ex-
tremely reduced or when the windows fog up
easily while operating the heater or air condition-
ing system.
Servicing air conditioner
The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle
is charged with an environmentally friendly refriger-
ant.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
This refrigerant will not harm the earth’s ozone
layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant are re-
quired when servicing the NISSAN air conditioner.
Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
severe damage to the air conditioning system. See
“Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in
the “9. Technical information” section.
A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop will be able
to service the air conditioning system.
4-22 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
WARNING
Do not adjust the audio system while driving.
The audio system operates when the ignition switch
is in the Acc or ON position. If you want to listen to
the radio or CD while the engine is not running, turn
the ignition switch to the Acc position. Do not use
for an extended period of time with the engine
stopped.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
NOTE
Models with NissanConnect system, see the au-
dio operation precautions in the separately pro-
vided NissanConnect Owner’s Manual.
Radio
•
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
are normally caused by these external influences.
•
Using a mobile phone in or near the vehicle may
influence radio reception quality.
•
Use the antenna for the best reception.
Compact Disc (CD) player
•
During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or
ventilate the player completely.
•
The player may skip while driving on rough
roads.
•
Occasionally, the CD player may not function
when the compartment temperature is ex-
tremely high. Decrease the temperature be-
fore use.
•
Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
•
CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched,
covered with finger prints, or that have pin
holes may not work properly.
•
The following CDs may not work properly.
•
Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
•
Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
•
Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
•
Do not use the following CDs as they may
cause the CD player to malfunction.
•
8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adaptor
•
CDs that are not round
•
CDs with a paper label
ANTENNA
Removing the antenna
To remove the antenna, hold the lower part of the
antenna and turn it anticlockwise.
CAUTION
Make sure to remove the antenna before the ve-
hicle enters a garage with a low ceiling or an
automatic car wash otherwise the antenna can
be damaged.
NAA956Z
AUDIO SYSTEM
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-23
1.
(Day/Night) button
(Display brightness (Day/Night mode) button)
Turn the MENU button to set the display
brightness
The illumination brightness level is linked to the
headlight switch. When the headlights are
switched “ON” the brightness is dimmed
automatically. Press the button to toggle
illumination brightness levels between daytime
setting and nighttime setting independent of
headlamp status.
2.
CD slot
3.
Display
4.
CD eject button
5.
MEDIA button
Switch between the audio sources (CD, USB,
AUX, BT Audio)(if connected)
6.
Telephone button
7.
Radio mode: TUNE dial
Audio unit mode: MENU dial
Confirmation (ENTER) button
8.
Back button
9.
Radio mode: Preset button
USB/MP3 CD or Phone mode: Quick search
button
10.
SETUP button
11.
Radio mode: Preset buttons
12.
Fast Forward (Cue)/Forward Track and
Rewind/Previous Track buttons
13.
Radio mode: Preset button
CD/iPod/USB/Bluetooth audio mode: MIX
button
14.
Traffic Announcement (TA) button
15.
Radio mode: Preset button
CD/iPod/USB/Bluetooth audio mode: Repeat
(RPT) button
16.
Power ON·OFF button/Volume control (VOL)
knob
17.
DISP button
Provides on screen information when available
(music tags, RDS, etc.)
18.
RADIO button
NAA1387
FM AM RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (where fitted)
4-24 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
AUDIO MAIN OPERATION
The audio unit operates when the ignition switch is
in Acc or ON position.
m
Power ON/OFF button
Press the button to switch on the audio unit. If
the audio unit was switched off using the ignition
switch, it can also be switched on with the ignition
switch. The source that was playing immediately
before the unit was switched off will resume playing
and the volume will be set to the previous volume
level.
The audio unit can be switched off by pressing
,
or by turning the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
LOCK position.
m
Volume (VOL) level control
Turn the <VOL> dial clockwise or anticlockwise to
adjust the volume level.
The audio unit is equipped with a speed control vol-
ume function, this means that the audio system au-
tomatically adjusts the volume level in relation to
vehicle speed. For details, see “[Speed Volume]
menu” later in this section.
RADIO OPERATION
When the (power ON/OFF) button is pressed,
the audio unit will switch on with the last received
radio station, if the audio unit was previously
switched off in radio mode.
The radio is able to receive multiple kinds of audio
transmissions:
–FM
–AM
Radio band select buttons
Press the <RADIO> button to change the audio
transmission source as follows:
FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1
When <RADIO> button is pressed, the radio will
come on at the last received radio station. If audio is
already playing using one of the other input sources
(iPod, Bluetooth, CD, USB, AUX-in) pressing the
<RADIO> button will switch off the playing source
mode and the last received radio station will be se-
lected.
Setting preset stations
Auto populating the [FM List]:
When the <RADIO> button is pressed for more than
1.5 seconds the six stations with the strongest sig-
nals are stored in the preset (1 to 6) buttons of the
band. During the search, a notification message
[Updating FM List] appears in the display and the
sound is muted until the operation is complete. Once
completed, the radio reverts to the previously se-
lected radio station.
Manual tuning
When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency
manually access the [FM List] and turn the <MENU>
dial until the desired station is tuned in.
The frequency increases or decreases in steps of
100 kHz on the FM band, and 9 kHz on the AM
band.
WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving in
order for full attention to be given to the driving
operation.
SEEK tuning buttons
FM mode:
Pressing the
or button starts the tuning
mode. A short press of the button will increase or
decrease the frequency a single step. Pressing the
button longer will activate the seek mode. The radio
tuner seeks from low to high or high to low frequen-
cies and stops at the next broadcasting station. Dur-
ing seek mode, the audio output is muted. If no
broadcasting station can be found within the com-
plete band cycle, it will return to the initial frequency.
Preset station buttons j1 j2 j3 j4 j5 j6
Pressing a preset button for less than 2 seconds will
select the stored radio station.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-25
Pressing a preset button for more than 2 seconds
while in the [FM list] or radio main screen will cause
the station currently being received to be stored
against that preset button.
•
Twelve stations (if available) can be stored in the
FM bands. (Six each for FM1 and FM2)
•
Six stations (if available) can be set for the AM
band.
If the battery is disconnected, or if the fuse blows,
the radio memory will be erased. In that case, reset
the desired stations after battery connection or fuse
replacement.
Radio Data System (RDS) operation
(where fitted)
The RDS is a system through which encoded digital
information is transmitted by FM radio stations in
addition to the normal FM radio broadcasting. The
RDS provides information services such as station
name, traffic information, or news.
NOTE
•
In some countries or regions, some of these
services may not be available.
Alternative Frequency (AF) mode:
The AF mode operates in the FM (radio) mode.
•
The AF mode operates in the FM (radio), AUX or
CD mode (if FM was previously selected in the
radio mode).
•
The AF function compares signal strengths and
selects the station with the optimum reception
conditions for the currently tuned-in station.
RDS functions
Programme Service (PS) function (station name
display function):
– FM:
When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or
manual tuning, the RDS data is received and the
PS name is displayed.
TA Traffic announcement
This function operates in FM (Radio) mode. This
function will still operate in the background if any
media source is selected (CD, USB or MEDIA
mode).
•
Pressing the <TA> button selects the TA mode.
The TA indicator is displayed while TA mode is
on.
•
When <TA> is pressed again. The mode will be
switched off and the TA indicator will disappear
from the display.
Traffic announcement interrupt function:
When a traffic announcement is received, the an-
nouncement is tuned in and the display shows a
notification message with the radio station name e.g.
[TA: Radio 1].
Once the traffic announcement has finished, the unit
returns to the source that was active before the traf-
fic announcement started.
If <TA> is pressed during a traffic announcement,
the traffic announcement interrupt mode is can-
celled. The TA mode returns to the standby mode
and the audio unit returns to the previous source.
SETUP BUTTON
To configure [Audio], [Clock], [Radio], and [Lan-
guage] settings, perform the following procedure:
1. Press the <SETUP> button.
2. Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise or anticlock-
wise, the display will appear in the following or-
der:
[Audio] ⇔ [Clock] ⇔ [Radio] ⇔ [Language]
After the desired levels have been set, press either
the
(Back) button repeatedly, or the <SETUP>
button.
Audio adjustments
1. Press the <SETUP> button to enter the setup
menu screen then select [Audio].
2. Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise or anticlock-
wise, the display will appear in the following or-
der:
[Sound] → [AUX in] → [Speed Volume] → [Bass
Boost] → [Audio Default]
4-26 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
[Sound] menu:
Submenus in the sound menu:
[Bass] Use this control to enhance or
attenuate bass response sound.
Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise
or anticlockwise to adjust the bass
settings then press <ENTER> to
confirm.
[Treble] Use this control to enhance or
attenuate the treble.
Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise
or anticlockwise to adjust the
treble settings then press
<ENTER> to confirm.
[Balance] Use this control to adjust the bal-
ance of the volume between the
left and right speakers.
Turn the <MENU> dial
anticlockwise or clockwise to
adjust the left/right balance then
press <ENTER> to confirm.
[Fade] Use this control to adjust the bal-
ance of the volume between the
front and rear speakers.
Turn the <MENU> dial
anticlockwise or clockwise to
adjust the front/rear balance then
press <ENTER> to confirm.
[AUX in] menu:
Use this control to adjust the volume output from the
auxiliary source.
Turn the <MENU> dial anticlockwise or clockwise
to select [Low], [Medium], or [High] mode then
press <ENTER> to confirm.
Set the AUX-in volume. Select one of the submenus
in the [AUX in] menu:
– [Low]
– [Medium]
– [High]
[Speed Volume] menu:
Set the audio system to automatically adjust the vol-
ume level in relation to vehicle speed.
Turn the <MENU> dial anticlockwise or clockwise
to adjust the volume, higher (more) bars mean the
volume level relatively changes more when the ve-
hicle speed increase or decreases. Press <ENTER>
to confirm.
This mode controls the volume output from the
speakers automatically in relation to vehicle speed.
When [Speed Volume] is displayed, turn the
<MENU> dial clockwise or anticlockwise to adjust
the volume level.
Adjusting the setting to 0 (zero) turns off the speed
volume feature. Increasing the speed volume setting
results in the audio volume increasing more rapidly
with vehicle speed. Once chosen, press <ENTER>
to save the setting.
[Bass Boost] menu:
Switch [Bass boost] [ON] or [OFF]
[Audio default] menu:
The audio unit has a saved preset settings as a fac-
tory default. Select [Yes] to change all settings back
to the factory preset settings. Select [No] to exit the
menu keeping the current settings.
Setting the clock
The clock menu screen set up screen will appear
when selecting the [Clock] item from the set up
menu.
[Set Time]:
Select [Set Time] then adjust the clock as follows:
1. The hour display will start flashing. Turn the
<MENU> dial to adjust the hour.
2. Press the <ENTER> button. The minute display
will start flashing.
3. Turn the <MENU> dial to adjust the minute.
4. Press <ENTER> to finish the clock adjustment.
[On/Off]:
Set the clock display between on or off when the
audio unit is turned off.
If set in the [ON] position, the clock will be dis-
played when the audio unit is turned off either by
pressing the
button or when the ignition switch
is placed in the “OFF” position.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-27
[Format]:
Set the clock display between 24-hour mode and
12-hour clock mode.
[Radio] menu
For activation or deactivation details, see “SETUP
button” later in this section.
Language settings
Select the appropriate language and press the
<ENTER> button. Upon completion, the screen will
automatically adapt the language setting.
•
[AUTO]
(Factory preset language connected with the
meter language)
•
[Chinese]
•
[Chinese Simplified]
•
[Deutsch]
•
[Español]
•
[Français]
•
[Italiano]
•
[Nederlands]
•
[Polski]
•
[Português]
•
[Türkçe]
•
[UK English]
•
[русский]
COMPACT DISC (CD) OPERATION
The CD player can play a music CD or an encoded
MP3/WMA CD and while listening to those CD’s
music information tags (track and artist information)
can be displayed (when CD encoded with text is
being used).
Press the <MEDIA> button and the CD (if loaded)
will start to play.
When <MEDIA> is pressed and the radio or another
source mode is already operating, it will automati-
cally turn off the playing source and the CD play
mode will start.
CAUTION
•
Do not force the CD into the slot. This could
damage the player.
•
Do not use 8 cm (3.1 in) discs.
CD insert (CD player)
Insert the CD disc into the slot with the label side
facing up. The disc will be guided automatically into
the slot and will start playing. After loading the disc,
track information will be displayed.
NOTE
•
The CD player accepts normal audio CD or
CD recorded with MP3/WMA files.
•
Inserting a CD recorded with MP3/WMA files,
the audio unit will automatically detect and
[MP3CD] will be indicated.
•
An error notification message will be
displayed when inserting a wrong disc type
(e.g. DVD), or the player cannot read the CD
disc. Eject the disc and insert another disc.
MEDIA button
Load a CD disc. After a short loading period the CD
starts playing.
If the disc was already loaded:
Press the <MEDIA> button (depending on other
connected audio sources if necessary multiple
times) to select CD. Playing starts from the track
that was being played when the CD play mode was
switched off.
Audio main operation
List view:
While the track is being played, either press the
<ENTER> button or turn the MENU dial to display
the available tracks in a listed view mode. To select
a track from the list, or a track to start listening from,
turn the <MENU> dial then press <ENTER>.
Press the
button to return to the song.
Fast Forward (Cue), Fast
Reverse (Review) buttons:
When the
(Cue) or (Review) button is
pressed continuously, the track will be played at
high speed. When the button is released, the track
will be played at normal playing speed.
4-28 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Track up/down buttons:
Pressing the
or button once, the track will
be skipped forward to the next track or backward to
the beginning of the current played track. Press the
or button more than once to skip through
the tracks.
Folder browsing:
If the recorded media contains folders with music
files, pressing the
or button will play in
sequence the tracks of each folder.
To select a preferred folder:
1. Press the <ENTER> button or turn the <MENU>
dial and a list of tracks in the current folder is dis-
played.
2. Turn the <MENU> dial for the preferred folder.
3. Press <ENTER> to access the folder. Press
<ENTER> again to start playing the first track or
turn the <MENU> dial, and press <ENTER> to
select another track.
If the current selected folder contains sub folders,
press <ENTER>, a new screen with a list of sub
folders will be displayed. Turn the <MENU> dial for
the sub folder then press <ENTER> to select. Se-
lect the [Root] folder item when songs are recorded
additionally in the root folder.
To return to the previous folder screen, press
.
Repeat button:
Push the
j1 button and the current track will
be played continuously.
button:
Push the
j2 button and all the tracks in the
current folder (MP3 CD/USB) or playlist (iPod) will
be played in a random order.
When the entire folder/playlist has been played the
system will start playing the next folder/playlist.
button:
While a CD with recorded music information tags
(CD-text/ID3–text tags) is being played, the title of
the played track is displayed. If the title information
is not provided then [Track] is displayed.
When the
j5 button is pressed repeatedly,
further information about the track can be displayed
along with the track title as follows:
CD:
Track time → Artist name → Album title → Track
time
CD with MP3/WMA:
Track time → Artist name → Album title → Folder
name → Track time
The track name is always displayed.
Track details:
A long press on the
j5 button will turn the
display into a detailed overview and after a few sec-
onds it returns to the main display, or press
j5 briefly.
Quick search:
When a MP3 CD with recorded music information
tags (ID3–text tags) is being played from list view
mode, a quick search can be performed to find a
track from the list.
Push the <A-Z>
j6 button then turn the <MENU>
dial for the first alphabetic/numerical letter of the
track title then press <ENTER>. When found, a list
of the available tracks will be displayed. When there
is no match (the display shows [No match] the next
item will be shown. Select, and press <ENTER> to
play the preferred track.
CD eject button
CD player:
Press the
(eject) button and the CD will be
ejected.
Ejecting CD (with ignition switch in “OFF” or
LOCK):
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or LOCK
position it is possible to eject the currently played
CD. However the audio unit will not be activated.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-29
Press the button and the CD will be ejected.
NOTE
•
When the CD is ejected and not removed
within 8 seconds, it will automatically retract
into the slot to protect it from damage.
•
If an error message appears in the display,
press to eject the faulty CD and insert an-
other CD or check if the ejected CD is in-
serted upside down.
The AUX and USB sockets are located in the centre
console underneath the armrest.
j1
USB
j2
AUX
AUX SOCKET
Audio main operation
Open the console lid and connect the AUX jack of a
compatible player (e.g. MP3 player) to the socket
j2.
Press the <MEDIA> button for the AUX mode.
Use the play mode of the device to play the audio.
USB MEMORY OPERATION
(where fitted)
Connecting USB memory
Open the console lid and connect a USB memory
stick or another USB device. The display will show
the notification message [USB Detected Please
Wait...] for a few seconds, while it is reading the
data.
If the audio system has been turned off while the
USB memory was playing, pressing
will start
the USB device operation.
CAUTION
•
Do not force the USB device into the USB
port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-
side-down into the port may damage the USB
device and the port. Make sure that the USB
device is connected correctly into the USB
port. (Some USB devices come with a
mark as a guide. Make sure that the mark is
facing the correct direction before inserting
the device.)
•
Do not locate objects near the USB device to
prevent the objects from leaning on the USB
device and the port. Pressure from the ob-
jects may damage the USB device and the
port.
MEDIA button
To operate the USB device press <MEDIA> once or
repeatedly until [USB] is available.
Audio main operation
The following operations are identical to the audio
main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) opera-
tion. For details, see “Audio main operation” earlier
in this section.
•
List view
•
Quick search
•
,
•
MIX (Random play)
•
RPT (Repeat track)
•
Folder browsing
Quick search:
When a USB device with recorded music informa-
tion tags (ID3–text tags) is being played from list
view mode, a quick search can be performed to find
a track from the list.
Push the <A-Z>
j6 button then turn the <MENU>
dial for the first alphabetic/numerical letter of the
track title then press <ENTER>. When found, a list
of the available tracks will be displayed. When there
NAA1397
4-30 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
is no match (the display shows [No match] the next
item will be shown. Select, and press <ENTER> to
play the preferred track.
button j5
While a track with recorded music information tags
(ID3–tags) is being played, the title of the played
track is displayed. If the tags are not provided then
a notification message is displayed.
When the
j5 button is pressed repeatedly,
further information about the track can be displayed
along with the track title as follows:
Track time → Artist name → Album title → Track
time
Track details:
A long press on the
j5 button will turn the
display into a detailed overview and after a few sec-
onds it returns to the main display, or press
j5 briefly.
iPod® PLAYER OPERATION
(where fitted)
Connecting iPod®
Open the console lid and connect the iPod cable to
the USB connector. The battery of the iPod® will be
charged during the connection to the vehicle. The
display will show the notification message [iPod
<Name> Detected...] for a few seconds, while it is
reading the data.
If the audio system has been turned off while the
iPod® was playing, pressing
will start the iPod®
operation. During the connection, the iPod® can
only be operated with the audio controls.
* iPod® and iPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
CAUTION
•
Do not force the iPod cable into the USB
port. Inserting the iPod cable tilted or up-
side- down into the port may damage the
iPod cable and the port. Make sure that the
iPod cable is connected correctly into the
USB port. (Some iPod cables come with a
mark as a guide. Make sure that the
mark is facing the correct direction before
inserting the iPod cable.)
•
Do not locate objects near the iPod cable to
prevent the objects from leaning on the iPod
cable and the port. Pressure from the ob-
jects may damage the iPod cable and the
port.
Compatibility:
NOTE
•
At the time of publication, this audio system
was tested with the latest iPod® players/iP-
hone® available. Due to the frequent update
of consumer devices like MP3 players,
NISSAN cannot guarantee that all new iPod®
players/iPhone® launched will be compatible
with this audio system.
•
Some iPod® operations may not be available
with this system.
•
Make sure that the iPod®/iPhone® is updated
with the latest firmware.
•
iPod® Shuffle and iPod® mini cannot be used
with this system.
•
Full functionality of iPhone USB and Bluetooth
Audio may not be available to the user if the
same device is connected by USB and Blue-
tooth simultaneously.
MEDIA button
To operate the iPod press <MEDIA> once or re-
peatedly until [iPod <Name>] is shown.
Audio main operation
Interface:
The interface for iPod® operation shown on the
audio system display is similar to the iPod® inter-
face. Use the <MENU> dial and the <ENTER> but-
ton to play a track on the iPod®.
The following items can be chosen from the menu
list screen.
•
[Playlists]
•
[Artist]
•
[Albums]
•
[Tracks]
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-31
•
[Composers]
•
[Genre]
•
[Podcasts]
For further information about each item, see the
iPod® owner’s manual.
The following operations are identical to the audio
main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) opera-
tion. For details, see “Audio main operation” earlier
in this section.
•
List view
•
,
•
MIX (Random play)
•
RPT (Repeat track)
•
Folder browsing
m
button j5
While a track with recorded music information tags
(ID3–tags) is being played, the title of the played
track is displayed. If the tags are not provided then
a notification message is displayed.
When the
j5 button is pressed repeatedly,
further information about the track can be displayed
along with the track title as follows:
Track time → Artist name → Album title → Track
time
Track details:
A long press on the
j5 button, the screen
displays the song title, artist name, and album title.
After a few seconds it returns to the main display or
press
j5 briefly.
BLUETOOTH® OPERATION
Regulatory information
m
Bluetooth® is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
CE statement
Hereby Yanfeng Visteon Automotive Electronics
Co., Ltd. declares that this system is in compliance
with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
m
NOTE
The audio system only supports Bluetooth® de-
vices with AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
Profile) version 1.4 or earlier.
BLUETOOTH® settings
To pair a device, make sure the Bluetooth is
switched on and use the [Scan device] key or the
[Pair device] key For details, see “[Scan devices]”
later in this section.
Up to 5 different Bluetooth devices can be con-
nected. However, only one device can be used at a
time. If 5 different Bluetooth registered devices are
registered, a new device can only replace one of the
5 existing paired devices. Use [Del. device] key to
delete one of the existing paired devices. For de-
tails, see “[Del. device]” later in this section.
When successfully paired a notification message
will be displayed, then the audio system display will
return to the current audio source display. During
connection the following status icons will be dis-
played (top left of the display): Signal strength
(
), Battery status* ( ) and Bluetooth “ON”
(
).
*: If the low battery message comes on, the Blue-
tooth® device must be recharged soon.
NAA1392
*: a device with bluetooth capabilities
4-32 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
The pairing procedure and operation may vary ac-
cording to device type and compatibility. See the
Bluetooth® owner’s manual for further details.
NOTE
•
For device details, see your audio/mobile
phone Owner’s Manual.
•
For assistance with the Bluetooth® audio/
mobile phone integration, please visit your lo-
cal NISSAN dealer.
To set up the Bluetooth system with a device the
following items are available:
•
[Scan devices]
Bluetooth devices can be paired with the sys-
tem. A maximum of 5 Bluetooth devices can be
registered.
•
[Pair device]
Bluetooth devices can be paired with the sys-
tem. A maximum of 5 Bluetooth devices can be
registered.
•
[Sel. device]
Paired Bluetooth devices are listed and can be
selected for connection.
•
[Del. device]
A registered Bluetooth device can be deleted.
•
[Bluetooth]
If this setting is turned off, the connection be-
tween the Bluetooth devices and the in-vehicle
Bluetooth module will be cancelled.
[Scan devices]:
1) Press the
button. Select [Scan device]
The audio unit searches bluetooth devices and
shows all visible devices.
Make sure your Bluetooth device is visible at this
time.
2) Select the device to be paired.
Use the <MENU> dial and press to select.
3) The pairing procedure may depend on the de-
vice to be connected:
1) Device without PIN code:
The Bluetooth connection will be automati-
cally connected without any further input.
2) Device with PIN code:
Two different ways of pairing are possible
depending on the device:
– Type A:
The message [To pair] [Enter Pin] 0000
will be displayed.
Confirm the PIN code on the device.
The Bluetooth connection will be made.
– Type B:
The message [Pairing request] [Confirm
password] together with a 6 digit code
will be displayed. The unique and identi-
cal code should be displayed on the de-
vice. If the code is identical confirm on the
device.
The Bluetooth connection will be made.
[Pair device]:
•
Turn the audio unit Bluetooth® on. See [Blue-
tooth] description.
•
Use the audio unit to pair:
Press the
button. Select the [Pair Device]
key.
The pairing procedure depends on the Blue-
tooth® device to be connected:
1) Device without PIN code:
The Bluetooth® connection will be automati-
cally connected without any further input.
2) Device with PIN code:
Two different ways of pairing are possible
depending on the device, for the correct pro-
cedure details, see “[Scan devices]” earlier
in this section.
•
Use the Bluetooth® audio/mobile phone device
to pair:
1) Follow the instructions in the owner’s manual
for the Bluetooth® enabled device to search
for the audio unit.
If the search mode finds the audio unit it will
be shown on the device display.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-33
2) Select the audio unit shown as [My Car].
3) Follow the instructions in the owner’s manual
for the Bluetooth® enabled device to estab-
lish a connection with the audio unit.
4) Enter the PIN code shown on the relevant
device with the device’s own keypad, and
press the confirmation key on the device it-
self.
Refer to the relevant Bluetooth® device own-
er’s manual for further details.
[Sel. device]:
The paired device list shows which Bluetooth® au-
dio or mobile phone devices have been paired or
registered with the Bluetooth® audio system. If the
list contains devices then select the appropriate de-
vice to connect to the Bluetooth® audio system.
The following symbols (where fitted) indicate the
capability of the registered device:
•
: Mobile phone integration
•
: Audio streaming (A2DP – Advanced Audio
Distribution Profile)
[Del. device]:
A registered device can be removed from the Blue-
tooth audio system. Select a registered device then
press <ENTER> to confirm to deletion.
[Bluetooth]:
If Bluetooth® has been switched off a notification
message [ON/OFF] appears when you select [Blue-
tooth] from the phone menu (press
). To switch
the Bluetooth® signal on, press <ENTER> and a
follow up screen will appear. Then select [ON] and
press <ENTER> to display the Bluetooth® settings
menu screen.
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming main
operation
Turn the ignition switch to the Acc or ON position.
If the audio system was turned off while the Blue-
tooth® audio was playing, pressing the <
> but-
ton will start the Bluetooth® audio streaming.
MEDIA button:
To operate the Bluetooth® audio streaming use the
following method:
•
Press <MEDIA> repeatedly until [BT Audio] is
shown.
The type of display,
jAorjB , shown on the audio
system can vary depending on the Bluetooth® ver-
sion of the device.
Fast Forward (Cue), Fast
Reverse (Review) buttons:
When the
(Cue) or (Review) button is
pressed continuously, the track will be played at
high speed. When the button is released, the track
will be played at normal playing speed.
Track up/down buttons:
Pressing the
or button once, the track will
be skipped forward to the next track or backward to
the beginning of the current played track. Press the
or button more than once to skip through
the tracks.
m
button
If the song contains music information tags (ID3–
tags), the title of the played song will be displayed.
If tags are not provided then the display will not
show any messages.
When the
button is pressed repeatedly fur-
ther information about the song can be displayed
along with the song title.
A long press on
will turn the display into a
detailed overview which after a few seconds returns
to the main display; or press
briefly.
NAA1203
4-34 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Bluetooth
®
mobile phone feature
This system offers a hands-free facility for your mo-
bile telephone with Bluetooth® to enhance driving
safety, and comfort.
For details, see “Mobile phone integration for FM
AM radio with CD player (where fitted)” later in this
section.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-35
Specification chart
Supported media CD-R, CD-ROM, CD-RW, USB 2.0 MSC
CD Size 12 cm diameter. up to 1.9 mm thickness
Supported file systems for CD ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System Component (on a Windows Vista-based
computer) are not supported.
Supported file systems for USB FAT-16, FAT-32
Supported versions *1 MP3 Version MPEG1, Layer 3
Sampling frequency 32 KHz - 44.1 KHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, 288, 320, Kbps,
VBR *4
WMA *3 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency 16 KHz, 22.05 KHz, 32 KHz, 44.1KHz, 48 kHz
Bit rate 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 Kbps, VBR *4
AAC Version MPEG-4, AAC
Sampling frequency 8, 11.025, 16, 22.05, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
Bit rate 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 Kbps, VBR *4
Tag information (Song title and Artist
and Album name)
CD CDDA
MP3 ID3 tag ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.4
WMA WMA tag
AAC AAC tag
Tracks/Files support CDDA — 99 tracks
MP3/WMA/AAC in CD — 999 files
USB — 30000 files
4-36 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Folders support 100 folders in CD
2500 folders in USB
Depth — Till 8, Deeper folders shall be under 8, subject to the maximum.
Playlists support in USB M3U, WPL, PLS — 1000 playlists.
Text character support Adjustable character length,
depending upon content of
media.
File Name: Min 11 Characters ( Max 30 Characters) ID3 TAG : Min 24
Characters. (Max 60 Characters) *5
Displayable character codes *2 Unicode, ISO8859–15(French),
ISO8859–5(Russian Cyrillic),
GB18030–2000(Chinese), BIG-
5(Taiwanese), KSX1001–
2002(Korean)
01:ASCll, 02: ISO-8859-1, ISO8859–15(French), ISO8859–5(Russian Cyrillic),
03: UNICODE(UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Ncn-BOM Big
Endian), 05: UNICODE(UTF-8), 06:UNICODE(Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian),
07: SHIFT-JIS, GB18030–2000(Chinese), BIG-5(Taiwanese), KSX1001–
2002(Korean)
Browsing File/Folder browsing for CD/MP3, USB
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 Kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*3 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. WMA7 and WMA8 are not applied to VBR.
*5 Support 128 Bytes but it depends on display width and character type.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-37
For details, see the separately provided NissanCon-
nect Owner’s Manual.
MAIN OPERATION
The audio unit can be operated by using the con-
trols on the steering wheel.
jA
Seek up/Seek down buttons
jB
Volume control buttons
To use the steering wheel audio switch, push the
power “ON” button of the audio unit with the ignition
switch in either the Acc or ON position.
m
or
m
Seek up/Seek down
button
– Preset station change (radio mode)
Push the or button to select one of the
preset radio stations.
– Seek tuning (radio mode)
Push and hold the
or button to start the
tuning mode. The radio tuner seeks from low to
high or high to low frequencies and stops at the
next broadcasting station.
– Track up/down (in CD/USB/iPod/BT Audio
modes)
Push the
or button to select the next
track or to return to the beginning of the present
track. Push several times to skip forward or skip
back through the tracks.
m
Volume control buttons
Push the —or + button to adjust the volume
level.
LNV2389Z
NAA1383
NISSANCONNECT (where fitted) STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL (where fitted)
4-38 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Not for models with NissanConnect system, see the separately provided Owner’s Manual.
1
Microphone location (Located in roof console)
2
Supported mobile phone with bluetooth
capabilities
3
Audio unit with switches for phone control
4
Steering wheel switches for phone control
BLUETOOTH
®
MOBILE PHONE
FEATURE
WARNING
Whilst driving, using the mobile phone is ex-
tremely dangerous because it significantly im-
pairs your concentration and diminishes your re-
action capabilities to sudden changes on the
road, and it may lead to a fatal accident. This
applies to all phone call situations such as when
receiving an incoming call, during a phone con-
versation, when calling through the phone book
search, etc.
CAUTION
Certain country jurisdictions prohibit the use of
the mobile phone in the car without hands-free
support.
This chapter provides information about the NISSAN
hands-free phone system using a Bluetooth
®
con-
nection.
Bluetooth
®
is a wireless radio communication stan-
dard. This system offers a hands-free facility for your
mobile telephone to enhance driving comfort.
NAA1399
MOBILE PHONE INTEGRATION FOR FM AM RADIO WITH CD PLAYER
(where fitted)
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-39
In order to use your mobile phone with the Blue-
tooth
®
of the audio system, the mobile phone must
first be setup. For details, see “BLUETOOTH®
settings” later in this section. Once it has been
setup, the hands-free mode is automatically acti-
vated on the registered mobile phone (via Blue-
tooth
®
) when it comes into range.
A notification message appears on the audio display
when the phone is connected, when an incoming
call is being received, as well as when a call is initi-
ated.
When a call is active, the audio system, microphone
(located in the ceiling in front of the rear view mir-
ror), and steering wheel switches enable hands-free
communication.
If the audio system is in use at the time, the radio,
CD, iPod, USB audio, Bluetooth audio or AUX
source mode will be muted and will stay muted until
the active call has ended.
The Bluetooth
®
system may not be able to connect
with your mobile phone for the following reasons:
•
The mobile phone is too far away from the ve-
hicle.
•
The Bluetooth
®
mode on your mobile phone has
not been activated.
•
Your mobile phone has not been paired with the
Bluetooth
®
system of the audio unit.
•
The mobile phone does not support Bluetooth
®
technology (BT Core v2.0).
NOTE
•
For models with NissanConnect (Audio with
Navigation system) see the separately pro-
vided Owner’s Manual.
•
For details, see your mobile phone’s Owner’s
Manual.
•
For assistance with your mobile phone inte-
gration, please visit your local NISSAN dealer.
j1
Phone book quick search button A-Z
j2
(Back) button
j3
Phone button
j4
<MENU> or <ENTER> button (rotate and
push to select)
BLUETOOTH® settings
Enter the phone setup menu via the (phone)
button, select the [Bluetooth] key, and then check if
the bluetooth is set to on (default setting is on, push
the <ENTER> button if not).
To setup the Bluetooth system to pair (connect or
register) your preferred mobile phone, follow the fol-
lowing procedure.
To pair a device, use the [Scan device] key or the
[Pair device] key.
Up to 5 different Bluetooth devices can be con-
nected. However, only one device can be used at a
time. If 5 different Bluetooth registered devices are
registered, a new device can only replace one of the
5 existing paired devices. Use [Del. device] key to
delete one of the existing paired devices. For de-
tails, see “BLUETOOTH® settings” later in this sec-
tion.
When successfully paired a notification message
will be displayed, then the audio system display will
return to the current audio source display. During
connection the following status icons will be dis-
played (top left of the display): Signal strength
(
), Battery status* ( ) and Bluetooth “ON”
(
).
*: If the low battery message comes on, the Blue-
tooth® device must be recharged soon.
The pairing procedure and operation may vary ac-
cording to device type and compatibility. See the
Bluetooth® owner’s manual for further details.
NOTE
•
For device details, see your audio/mobile
phone Owner’s Manual.
•
For assistance with the Bluetooth® audio/
mobile phone integration, please visit your lo-
cal NISSAN dealer.
NAA1398
4-40 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
•
A maximum of 5 Bluetooth devices can be
paired with the system.
To set up the Bluetooth system with a device the
following items are available:
•
[Scan device]
Shows all available visible Bluetooth devices and
initializes Bluetooth connection from the audio
unit.
•
[Pair device]
Initializes Bluetooth connection from the mobile
device.
•
[Sel. device]
Paired Bluetooth devices are listed and can be
selected for connection.
•
[Del. device]
A registered Bluetooth device can be deleted.
•
[Bluetooth]
If this setting is turned off, the connection be-
tween the Bluetooth devices and the in-vehicle
Bluetooth module will be cancelled.
[Scan devices]:
1) Press the
button. Select [Scan device]
The audio unit searches bluetooth devices and
shows all visible devices.
Pressing the
button cancels the search.
2) Select the device to be paired.
Use the <MENU> dial and press to select.
3) The pairing procedure depends on the device to
be connected:
1) Device without PIN code:
The Bluetooth connection will be automati-
cally connected without any further input.
2) Device with PIN code:
Two different ways of pairing are possible
depending on the device:
– Type A:
The message [To pair] [Enter Pin] 0000
and a count down timer will be displayed.
Confirm the PIN code on the device.
The Bluetooth connection will be made.
If the count down timer reaches 0 the at-
tempt to pair the devices will be cancelled.
– Type B:
The message [Pairing request] [Confirm
password] together with a 6 digit code
will be displayed. The unique and identi-
cal code should be displayed on the de-
vice. If the code is identical confirm on the
device.
The Bluetooth connection will be made.
[Pair device]:
•
Turn the audio unit Bluetooth on. See [Bluetooth]
description.
•
Use the audio unit to pair:
Press the button. Select the [Pair device]
key. The Audio unit will wait for a connection
request from the mobile device.
The pairing procedure depends on the Bluetooth
device:
1) Device without PIN code:
The Bluetooth connection will be automati-
cally connected without any further input.
2) Device with PIN code:
Two different ways of pairing are possible
depending on the device, see under [Scan
device] for a description.
•
Use the Bluetooth® audio/mobile phone device
to pair:
1) Switch ON the Bluetooth® devices search
mode on the mobile device.
If the search mode finds the audio unit it will
be shown on the device display.
2) Select the audio unit shown as [My Car].
3) Enter the number code shown on the rel-
evant device with the device’s own keypad,
and press the confirmation key on the device
itself.
Refer to the relevant Bluetooth® device own-
er’s manual for further details.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-41
[Sel. device]:
The paired device list shows which Bluetooth® au-
dio or mobile phone devices have been paired or
registered with the Bluetooth® audio system. If the
list contains devices then select the appropriate de-
vice to connect to the Bluetooth® audio system.
The following symbols (where fitted) indicate the
capability of the registered device:
•
: Mobile phone integration
•
: Audio streaming (A2DP – Advanced Audio
Distribution Profile)
[Del. device]:
A registered device can be removed from the Blue-
tooth audio system. Select a registered device then
press <ENTER> to confirm the deletion.
[Bluetooth]:
If Bluetooth® has been switched off a notification
message [ON/OFF] appears when you select [Blue-
tooth] from the phone menu (press
). To switch
the Bluetooth® signal on, press <ENTER> and a
follow up screen will appear. Then select [ON] and
press <ENTER> to display the Bluetooth® settings
menu screen.
HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE
CONTROL
The hands-free mode can be operated using the
telephone
button on the audio system, or the
and (where fitted) on the steering wheel.
Receiving a call
When receiving an incoming call, the display will
show the caller’s phone number (or a notification
message that the caller’s phone number cannot be
shown) and three operation icons.
1. Answering and during a call:
Answer the call by pressing <ENTER> (the
is
highlighted).
By pressing <ENTER>, you can select the following
options:
•
Ending the call by selecting and press
<ENTER>.
•
Put the call on hold by selecting and press
<ENTER>.
•
[ ]
Use this item (the transfer handset command) to
transfer the call from the audio system to your
mobile phone.
To transfer the call back to hands-free via the
audio system select [
].
•
[#123]
Use this item to enter numbers during a call. For
example, if directed by an automated phone sys-
tem to dial an extension number the system will
send the tone associated with the selected num-
ber.
2. Put a call on hold:
Rotate the <MENU> dial until
is highlighted,
press <ENTER>. The call is on hold. Pressing
<ENTER> accepts the call, rotate the <MENU> dial
clockwise and press <ENTER> to reject.
3. Rejecting a call:
Rotate the <MENU> dial until
is highlighted,
press <ENTER>. The call is rejected.
Initiating a call
A call can be initiated using one of the following
methods:
– Making a call from the phone book
– Manually dialing a phone number
– Redialing
4-42 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
– Using call history (Call List menu)
•
Dialled
•
Received
•
Missed
Making a call from the phone book:
Once the Bluetooth
®
connection has been made,
between the registered mobile phone and the audio
system, phone book data will be transferred auto-
matically to the audio system. The transfer may take
a while before completion.
NOTE
Phone book data will be erased when:
•
Switching to another registered mobile
phone.
•
Mobile phone is disconnected.
•
The registered mobile phone is deleted from
the audio system.
1. Press <
>.
2. Turn the <MENU> dial and scroll down to [Phone
Book] then press <ENTER>.
3. Scroll down through the list, select the appropri-
ate contact name (highlighted), and press
<ENTER>.
4. A following screen will show the number to be
dialled. If correct, press <ENTER> again to dial
the number.
If the contact has more numbers assigned for
(home), (mobile), or (office), scroll,
and select the appropriate number to dial.
Alternatively, the quick search mode can be used as
follows:
1. While in the phonebook screen press <A-Z/
j6>.
2. Turn the <MENU> dial for the first alphabetic or
numerical letter of the contact name. Once high-
lighted, press <ENTER> to select the letter.
3. The display will show the corresponding contact
name(s). Where necessary, use the <MENU>
dial again to scroll further for the appropriate
contact name to call.
4. A following screen will show the number to be
dialled. If correct, press <ENTER> again to dial
the number.
Manually dialling a phone number:
WARNING
Park the vehicle in a safe location, and apply the
parking brake before making a call.
To dial a phone number manually use the audio sys-
tem display (virtual keyboard pad) as follows:
1. Press
, and turn the <MENU> dial to high-
light [Call Number].
2. Press <ENTER> to select [Call Number].
3. Turn the <MENU> dial to scroll along, and select
each number of the phone number. Once high-
lighted, press <ENTER> after each number se-
lection.
To delete the last number entered scroll to the
[←] (Backspace) symbol, and once highlighted
press <ENTER>. The last number will be de-
leted. Pressing <ENTER> repeatedly will delete
each subsequent number.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-43
4. After entering the last number, scroll to the
symbol, and press <ENTER> to dial the
number.
Redial:
To redial or call the last number dialled, press
for more than 2 seconds.
Using call history (Call List menu):
A number from the dialled, received, or missed call
lists can also be used to make a call.
•
[Dialed]
Use the dialled call mode to make a call which is
based on the list of outgoing (dialled) calls.
•
[Received]
Use the received call mode to make a call which
is based on the list of received calls.
•
[Missed]
Use the missed call mode to make a call which
is based on the list of missed calls.
1. Press
, and select [Call List].
2. Turn the <MENU> dial to scroll to an item, and
press <ENTER> to select it.
3. Scroll to the preferred phone number then press
<ENTER>, or press
to dial the number.
Second incoming call
Whenever there is a second incoming call is shown
in the display. By selecting the icon the call is
accepted and the current call is put on hold.
Selecting
by rotating <MENU> and pressing
<ENTER> rejects the second incoming call. When
this is done during the conversation it ends the call.
Selecting the
key using the <MENU> dial and
pressing <ENTER> switches between the phone
conversations.
(For the other selections, see Making a call from the
phone book earlier)
General settings
From the phone menu select [Settings]
Volume settings and manually downloading the
phonebook can be done using this menu.
Menu operation:
Press <ENTER> to select, rotate the <MENU> dial
to increase or decrease the volume.
Press <ENTER> to confirm.
Menu items:
•
[Volume]
– [Ring]
Set the phone ringing volume
– [Call]
Set the volume of the conversation during a
call.
•
[Ringtone]
– [Car]
Choose the in car ringtone.
– [Phone]
Choose the phone ringtone.
•
[PB download]
Download the phonebook of the mobile device
to the audio unit manually.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCHES
(where fitted)
j
1
Volume down button
j2
Volume up button
NAA1436
4-44 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
j3
Phone button
j4
Phone end/reject button
The hands-free mode can be operated using the
steering wheel switches.
Volume down button
Press the volume down button to decrease the vol-
ume of the speakers.
Volume up button
Press the volume up button to increase the volume
of the speakers.
Phone button
The phone button allows you to:
•
Accept an incoming call by pressing once.
•
Redial the last outgoing call by pressing the for
more than 2 seconds.
Phone END button
•
Reject an incoming call by pressing during
an incoming call.
•
End an active call by pressing once.
When installing large capacity wireless equipment
or a car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe
the following as it may adversely affect the Engine
control system and other electronic parts depend-
ing on its installation location.
CAUTION
•
Keep the antenna as far as possible away from
the Electric Control Module.
•
Also keep the antenna wire more than 20 cm
(8 inches) away from the Electro Injection har-
ness. Do not route the antenna wire next to
any harness.
•
Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
•
Connect the ground wire from the radio chas-
sis to the body.
NOTE
For further information, visit the NISSAN web site:
www.nissan-europe.com. Select your country
from the list and go to the “SERVICES” menu. If
not available on the web site, contact a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-45
5 Starting and drivingStarting and driving
Running-in schedule ................................................ 5-2
Before starting the engine........................................ 5-2
Precautions when starting and driving ...................... 5-3
Exhaust gas (Carbon Monoxide) ......................... 5-3
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)................ 5-4
Meter information................................................ 5-7
Activation............................................................ 5-7
TPMS sensor ID and position recognition ........... 5-7
Adjusting TPMS target pressure ......................... 5-8
Tyre pressure units ............................................. 5-8
[Check cold tyre] message ................................. 5-8
TPMS temperature calibration............................. 5-8
On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ......... 5-9
Three-way catalyst (Petrol engine models)................ 5-9
To help prevent damage ..................................... 5-9
Turbocharger system (Diesel engine models) ........... 5-10
Care when driving ................................................... 5-10
Engine cold start period...................................... 5-10
Loading luggage................................................. 5-10
Driving on wet roads........................................... 5-10
Driving under winter conditions ........................... 5-10
Ignition switch (where fitted) .................................... 5-11
Manual transmission ........................................... 5-11
XTRONIC transmission (CVT) ............................ 5-11
Steering lock ...................................................... 5-11
Key positions ...................................................... 5-11
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) (where
fitted).................................................................. 5-12
Push-button ignition switch (where fitted) ................. 5-12
Precautions on push-button ignition switch
operation ............................................................ 5-12
Intelligent Key system ......................................... 5-12
Ignition switch positions...................................... 5-13
Emergency engine shut off.................................. 5-14
Steering lock ...................................................... 5-14
Intelligent Key battery discharge.......................... 5-14
Starting engine ........................................................ 5-15
Models with Intelligent Key system...................... 5-15
Models without Intelligent Key system ................. 5-16
Driving the vehicle.................................................... 5-17
Driving with manual transmission......................... 5-17
Driving with XTRONIC Transmission (CVT) ........ 5-18
Stop/Start System (where fitted).............................. 5-22
Normal operation ................................................ 5-22
Precautions ........................................................ 5-24
Stop/Start System OFF switch ........................... 5-25
Environmental savings ........................................ 5-25
Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted)..................... 5-26
4WD mode operations........................................ 5-27
4WD shift tips .................................................... 5-27
4WD Mode indicator lights ................................. 5-28
Driving four-wheel drive (4WD) safely ................. 5-28
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system (where fitted)..... 5-30
BSW system operation....................................... 5-30
BSW driving situations ....................................... 5-32
BSW temporary disabled status.......................... 5-32
BSW automatic deactivation ............................... 5-33
BSW malfunction ............................................... 5-33
BSW camera unit maintenance........................... 5-33
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system (where
fitted)....................................................................... 5-33
LDW system operation ....................................... 5-34
LDW temporary disabled status.......................... 5-35
LDW automatic deactivation ............................... 5-35
LDW malfunction................................................ 5-35
Multi-sensing camera unit maintenance ............... 5-35
Cruise control (where fitted) .................................... 5-36
Precautions on cruise control.............................. 5-36
Cruise control system operations........................ 5-37
Speed limiter (where fitted) ...................................... 5-38
Speed limiter operations ..................................... 5-39
Forward emergency braking system (where fitted) ... 5-40
System operation................................................ 5-41
Parking.................................................................... 5-43
Ultrasonic Parking Sensors (where fitted)................. 5-45
Operation ........................................................... 5-45
Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) (where fitted) ............ 5-46
Deactivation of the IPA system............................ 5-47
Parking procedure using the IPA system............. 5-48
Operating tips..................................................... 5-52
Trailer towing........................................................... 5-54
Operating precautions ........................................ 5-54
Maximum load limits (for Australia) ...................... 5-55
Tyre pressure ..................................................... 5-55
Safety chains...................................................... 5-55
Trailer brakes...................................................... 5-55
Trailer detection (where fitted) ............................ 5-56
Installation of coupling device (except for
Australia) ............................................................ 5-56
Vehicle security........................................................ 5-57
Electric power steering system ................................ 5-57
Brake system........................................................... 5-58
Brake precautions .............................................. 5-58
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............................... 5-59
Using system...................................................... 5-59
Self-test feature .................................................. 5-59
Normal operation ................................................ 5-60
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system
(where fitted) ........................................................... 5-60
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF
switch................................................................. 5-61
Chassis control........................................................ 5-62
Active trace control............................................. 5-62
Active engine brake (for XTRONIC (CVT)
models only) ....................................................... 5-63
Active ride control............................................... 5-64
Hill Start Assist (HSA) system.................................. 5-64
ECO mode system (where fitted) ............................. 5-65
Cold weather driving................................................ 5-66
Battery ............................................................... 5-66
Engine coolant.................................................... 5-66
Tyre equipment................................................... 5-66
Special winter equipment.................................... 5-67
Corrosion protection........................................... 5-67
During the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles), follow these
recommendations for the future reliability and
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow the
recommendations may result in shortened engine
life and reduced engine performance.
•
Avoid driving for long periods at a constant
speed, either fast or slow.
•
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
•
Avoid quick starts.
•
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
•
Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500
miles).
NOTE
Models with K9K diesel engine will achieve top
performance only after approximately 5,000 km
(3,000 miles).
WARNING
The driving characteristics of your vehicle can be
changed remarkably by any additional load and
its distribution as well as by adding optional
equipment (trailer couplings, roof racks, etc.).
Your driving style and speed have to be adjusted
accordingly. Especially when carrying heavy
loads, your speed must be reduced adequately.
•
Make sure the area around the vehicle is free of
obstacles.
•
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant,
brake and clutch fluid, and window washer fluid
as frequently as possible, at least whenever you
refuel.
•
Visually inspect tyres for their appearance and
condition. Also check the tyre pressure for
proper inflation.
•
Maintenance items in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section should be checked peri-
odically.
•
Check that all windows and light lenses are
clean.
•
Check that all doors are closed.
•
Position the seat and adjust the head restraints.
•
Adjust the inside and outside mirrors.
•
Fasten your seat belt and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
•
Check the operation of the warning/indicator
lights when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
•
Do not place hard or heavy objects on the dash-
board or rear parcel shelf in order to prevent
injury in the event of a sudden stop.
RUNNING-IN SCHEDULE BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
5-2 Starting and driving
WARNING
•
Do not leave children or adults who would
normally require the support of others alone
in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left
alone. They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent opera-
tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause severe or pos-
sibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
•
To prevent luggage or packages from sliding
forward during braking, do not stack anything
in the cargo area higher than the seatbacks.
•
Secure all cargo with ropes or straps to pre-
vent it from sliding or shifting.
•
Failure to follow proper seating instructions
see “Seats” in the “1. Safety — Seats, Seat
belts and Supplemental Restraint System”
section, could result in serious personal injury
in an accident or sudden stop.
EXHAUST GAS (Carbon Monoxide)
WARNING
•
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain
colourless and odourless carbon monoxide.
Carbon monoxide is a dangerous gas and can
cause unconsciousness or death.
•
If you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-
ing the vehicle, drive with all windows fully
open and have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
•
Do not run the engine in closed spaces, such
as a garage, for any longer than is absolutely
necessary.
•
Do not park the vehicle with the engine run-
ning for any extended length of time.
•
Keep the back door closed while driving, oth-
erwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must drive in
this way for some reason, take the following
steps:
1) Open all the windows.
2) Set the air recirculation mode (
)tothe
“OFF” position.
3) Set the fan speed control to the maximum
position to circulate the air.
•
If electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass to a trailer through the seal of the
body, follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
dations to prevent carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle.
•
When a vehicle has been stopped in an open
area with its engine running for any significant
length of time, turn the fan on to force outside
air into the vehicle.
•
The exhaust system and body should be in-
spected by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop whenever:
– the vehicle is raised for service.
– you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-
ing into the passenger compartment.
– you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system.
– you have had an accident involving dam-
age to the exhaust system, underbody, or
rear of the vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
Starting and driving 5-3
ja
TPMS indicator light
jb
TPMS tyre location indicator
jA
Tyre valve with sensor
The tyre pressure monitoring system monitors the
tyre pressure of the four wheels while the vehicle is
in motion. Following a loss in pressure, the system
will warn the driver using a visual warning. Each
TPMS sensor
jA has a registered wheel location
and sends pressure and temperature data via radio
to a receiver inside the vehicle.
Each tyre, including the spare (where fitted), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tyre inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tyres of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle plac-
ard or tyre inflation pressure label, you should deter-
mine the proper tyre inflation pressure for those
tyres.)
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) con-
trols the TPMS indicator light
ja , which will illumi-
nate when one or more tyres are significantly under-
inflated. A warning and tyre location indicator
jb
will also appear in the vehicle information display to
identify the tyre or tyres with low pressure.
If you now press the <ENTER> switch on the steer-
ing wheel, a further screen is displayed to tell you
the tyre pressure of all four tyres.
Accordingly, when the TPMS indicator light illumi-
nates, safely stop the vehicle to check the tyres as
soon as possible and inflate the tyres to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tyre causes the tyre to overheat and can lead to tyre
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tyre tread life which may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
NOTE
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tyre main-
tenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tyre pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger the illumina-
tion of the TPMS indicator light
ja.
The TPMS indicator light flashes for a short period
and then turns on continuously if the system is not
operating properly. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists (missing or faulty TPMS sensor
or TPMS system malfunction). When the malfunc-
tion warning light is illuminated, the system may not
NIC2222
NCE373
NIC2223
NIC2225
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
5-4 Starting and driving
be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tyres or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS indicator light after replacing one
or more tyres or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tyres and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
•
The TPMS does not monitor the tyre pressure of
the spare tyre.
•
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH). Also,
this system may not detect a sudden drop in tyre
pressure (for example a flat tyre while driving).
•
The TPMS indicator light may not automatically
turn off when the tyre pressure is adjusted. After
the tyre is inflated to the recommended COLD
tyre pressure, drive the vehicle at speeds above
25 km/h (16 MPH) to activate the TPMS. See
“TPMS sensor ID and position recognition” later
in this section
•
Following a change in the outside temperature,
the TPMS indicator light may illuminate even if
the tyre pressure has been adjusted properly.
Adjust the tyre pressure to the recommended
COLD tyre pressure again when the tyres are
cold, and reset the TPMS.
For additional information, see “[Check cold tyre]
message” later in this section.
WARNING
•
If the TPMS indicator light illuminates while
driving:
– avoid sudden steering manoeuvres
– avoid abrupt braking
– reduce vehicle speed
– pull off the road to a safe location
– stop the vehicle as soon as possible
•
Driving with under-inflated tyres may perma-
nently damage the tyres and increase the like-
lihood of tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur which may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal injury.
•
Check the tyre pressure for all four tyres. Ad-
just the tyre pressure to the recommended
COLD tyre pressure shown on the tyre plac-
ard to turn the TPMS indicator light “OFF”. In
case of a flat tyre, replace it with a spare tyre
as soon as possible. (See “Flat tyre” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section for chang-
ing a flat tyre.)
•
When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function and the
TPMS indicator light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Be sure to follow all instructions for
wheel replacement and mount the TPMS sys-
tem correctly.
•
Replacing tyres with those not originally speci-
fied by NISSAN could affect the proper opera-
tion of the TPMS.
•
The Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tyre Repair
Sealant or equivalent can be used for tempo-
rarily repairing a tyre. Do not inject any other
tyre liquid or aerosol tyre sealant into the
tyres, as this may cause a malfunction of the
tyre pressure sensors.
•
NISSAN recommends using only Genuine
NISSAN Emergency Tyre Sealant provided
with your vehicle. Other tyre sealants may
damage the valve stem seal which can cause
the tyre to lose air pressure. Visit a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as pos-
sible after using tyre repair sealant (for mod-
els equipped with the emergency tyre punc-
ture repair kit).
CAUTION
•
The TPMS may not function properly when the
wheels are equipped with tyre chains or the
wheels are buried in snow.
•
Do not place metalised film or any metal parts
(antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may
cause poor reception of the signals from the
tyre pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not
function properly.
Starting and driving 5-5
Some devices and transmitters may tempo-
rarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS
and cause the TPMS indicator light to illumi-
nate. Some examples are:
– Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near
the vehicle.
– If devices which transmit electrical noise
are connected to the vehicle’s 12V power
supply.
•
When inflating the tyres and checking the tyre
pressure, never bend the valves.
•
Special aluminium valves are fitted to mount
the TPMS sensors on the wheels. The TPMS
sensor is fixed at the wheels by a nut. The nut
needs to be correctly fitted at a torque setting
of 7.5 ± 0.5 N•m. If the TPMS sensor is tight-
ened exceeding the limit, there is a possibility
the sensor grommet will be damaged. If the
sensor is tightened under the limit, there is a
possibility of causing an air leak.
•
Use Genuine NISSAN valve caps that comply
with the factory-fitted valve cap specifications.
•
Do not use metal valve caps.
•
Fit the valve caps properly. Without the valve
caps the valve and tyre pressure monitor sen-
sors could be damaged.
•
Do not damage the valves and sensors when
storing the wheels or fitting different tyres.
•
Replace the sensor grommet and washer dur-
ing a tyre change. Once they have been re-
moved, the sensor grommet and washer can-
not be reused and must be replaced. The
TPMS sensors can be used again.
•
Use caution when using tyre inflation equip-
ment with a rigid air supply tube, as leverage
applied by the long nozzle can damage the
valve stem.
5-6 Starting and driving
METER INFORMATION ACTIVATION
At ignition ON. Once the vehicle starts moving the
tyre pressure is monitored.
TPMS SENSOR ID AND POSITION
RECOGNITION
It is recommended that a NISSAN dealer performs
the registration of a new TPMS sensor or sensor
location.
It is also possible to register the sensor yourself fol-
lowing the procedure below:
Procedure:
1. Change tyre position or have new TPMS sensor
fitted.
2. Park with Ignition ON or Engine ON for more
than 20 minutes. You must perform this step be-
fore driving.
3. Drive the vehicle for several minutes between 25
km/h (16 MPH) and 100 km/h (64 MPH). The
TPMS sensor ID and position will automatically
be detected.
NOTE
The TPMS might not synchronise if one or more
of the following conditions apply:
•
Bad road conditions
•
The TPMS unit does not receive correct data
from tyre pressure sensors
•
Driving below 25 km/h (16 MPH)
TPMS indicator light(s) Possible cause Recommended action
m
Low tyre pressure Inflate tyre(s) to the correct pressure
m
Genuine NISSAN TPMS sensor is not
detected at one or more wheels
Check if the TPMS sensors are
present.
If no sensor is present add a genuine
NISSAN TPMS sensor
TPMS radio communication interfer-
ence between TPMS wheel sensor
and TPMS receiver due to external
sources.
Drive away from the area of interfer-
ence
TPMS parts malfunction
If the problem persists contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
Starting and driving 5-7
•
Driving above 100 km/h (64 MPH)
•
High acceleration
•
High deceleration
•
In stop and go traffic or traffic waves
ADJUSTING TPMS TARGET
PRESSURE
j
A
Tyre pressure
jB
Tyre pressure units
jC
Front target pressure
jD
Rear target pressure
If you are using your vehicle in a heavily laden condi-
tion, the tyre pressures should be inflated to the
‘Laden Pressure’ shown on the tyre placard.
The TPMS system can be adjusted in the vehicle
information display to set the target pressure to the
‘Laden ‘Pressure’ shown on the tyre placard. See
“Settings” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
tion. To adjust the target pressure use the steering
wheel switches to select the [Settings] menu, fol-
lowed by [Tyre Pressures]. Select [Target front] and
[Target rear] and set the desired tyre pressure.
The TPMS target pressures will be displayed in the
centre of the front and rear axle on the TPMS screen
of the vehicle information display.
TYRE PRESSURE UNITS
The units displayed by the TPMS system can be
selected using the vehicle information display. Se-
lect the [Settings] menu, followed by [Tyre Pres-
sures]. Select [Tyre pressure unit] and choose the
unit that you want.
[CHECK COLD TYRE] MESSAGE
If the tyre pressure becomes higher than the target
pressure during a low tyre pressure condition, the
[Check Cold Tyre] message will be displayed in the
vehicle information display (see “Settings” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section).
NOTE
Even if the pressure is above the preset target
pressure, the yellow colour in the tyre pressure
warning means that the tyre pressure is actually
too low. Tyre pressure is increasing during driv-
ing. Check the tyre pressure when the tyre is
cold.
TPMS TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION
The tyre pressure is affected by the temperature of
the tyre; the tyre temperature increases when the
car is driven. To be able to accurately monitor the
tyre air leakage and to prevent false TPMS warnings
due to reductions in temperature, the TPMS system
uses temperature sensors in the tyres to perform
temperature compensation calculations.
On rare occasions it may be necessary to recalibrate
the TPMS system reference temperature using the
vehicle information display. See “Settings” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section. This opera-
tion should only be performed when the actual tyre
pressure has been adjusted, whilst the current am-
bient temperature is significantly different to the cur-
rent calibration temperature.
To initiate TPMS temperature calibration use the
steering wheel switches to select the [Settings]
menu, followed by [Tyre Pressures]. Select [Cali-
brate] followed by [Start]. While the calibration pro-
cess is active, the message: [Resetting tyre pres-
sure system] will be displayed in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
NIC2227
NIC2224
5-8 Starting and driving
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than passenger
cars to make them capable of performing in a wide
variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.
This gives them a higher centre of gravity than ordi-
nary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearance
is a better view of the road, allowing you to antici-
pate problems. However, they are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional two-
wheel drive (2WD) vehicles any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions. If possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt manoeuvres, particularly at high
speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover accident an
unbelted person is significantly more likely to be
injured than a person who is wearing a seat belt.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device
installed in the exhaust system. In the converter,
exhaust gases are burned at high temperatures to
help reduce pollutants.
CAUTION
•
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are
very hot. While the engine is running, keep
people or flammable materials away from the
exhaust pipe.
•
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam-
mable materials such as dry grass, waste pa-
per or rags, as they may burn easily.
•
When parking, ensure that people or flam-
mable materials are kept away from the ex-
haust pipe.
TO HELP PREVENT DAMAGE
CAUTION
•
Use UNLEADED PETROL ONLY, specifically
the recommended type. For details, see “Ca-
pacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in
the “9. Technical information” section.
•
Do not use leaded petrol. Leaded petrol will
seriously damage three-way catalyst.
Deposits from leaded petrol will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to help
reduce exhaust pollutants.
•
Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in
the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical sys-
tems can cause over-rich fuel flow into the
converter, causing it to overheat.
•
Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level.
Running out of fuel could cause the engine to
misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
•
Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or
if noticeable loss of performance or other un-
usual operating conditions are detected. Have
the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop.
•
Do not race the engine while warming it up.
•
Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the
engine.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
THREE-WAY CATALYST (Petrol
engine models)
Starting and driving 5-9
The turbocharger system uses engine oil for lubrica-
tion and cooling of its rotating components. The tur-
bocharger turbine turns at extremely high speeds
and it can reach an extremely high temperature. It is
essential to maintain a flow of clean oil through the
turbocharger system. A sudden interruption to the
oil supply may cause a malfunction in the turbo-
charger.
To ensure prolonged life and performance of the
turbocharger, it is essential to comply with the fol-
lowing maintenance procedure:
CAUTION
•
Change the engine oil of the turbo-charged
diesel engine as prescribed. See the sepa-
rately provided Warranty Information & Main-
tenance Booklet for additional information.
•
Use only the recommended engine oil. See
“Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants” in the “9. Technical information”
section.
•
If the engine has been operating at high rpm
for an extended period of time, let it idle for a
few minutes prior to shutdown.
•
Do not accelerate the engine to high rpm im-
mediately after starting it.
Driving your vehicle to fit the circumstances is es-
sential for your safety and comfort. As a driver, you
should be the one who knows best how to drive in
the given circumstances.
ENGINE COLD START PERIOD
Due to the higher engine speeds when the engine is
cold, extra caution must be exercised when select-
ing a gear during the engine warm-up period after
starting the engine.
LOADING LUGGAGE
Loads, their distribution and the attachment of equip-
ment (coupling devices, roof luggage carriers, etc.)
will change the driving characteristics of the vehicle
considerably. Driving style and speed must be ad-
justed accordingly.
DRIVING ON WET ROADS
•
Avoid starting off, accelerating and stopping sud-
denly.
•
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
•
Extra distance should be kept from the vehicle in
front.
•
When water covers the road surface in puddles,
small streams, etc, REDUCE SPEED to prevent
aquaplaning which will cause skidding and loss
of control. Worn tyres increase this risk.
DRIVING UNDER WINTER
CONDITIONS
•
Drive safely.
•
Avoid starting off, accelerating or stopping sud-
denly.
•
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
•
Avoid sudden steering actions.
•
Extra distance should be kept from the vehicle in
front.
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
(Diesel engine models)
CARE WHEN DRIVING
5-10 Starting and driving
j1
OFF
WARNING
Never remove the key or turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position while driving. The steering
wheel will lock and could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. This could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
CAUTION
Use electrical accessories with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. If
you must use accessories while the engine is not
running, do not use them for extended periods of
time and do not use multiple electrical accesso-
ries at the same time.
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock de-
vice.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position and remove the key from the
ignition switch, then turn the steering clockwise. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the ignition key and
turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly
right and left.
The ignition key can only be removed when the
switch is in the LOCK position (Normal parking po-
sition) (0).
XTRONIC TRANSMISSION (CVT)
The ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot
be turned to LOCK and removed until the shift lever
is moved to the P (Park) position.
When removing the key from the LOCK position of
the ignition switch, make sure that the shift lever is
in the P (Park) position.
The shift lever can only be moved from the P (Park)
position when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion and the footbrake pedal is depressed.
To remove the key from the ignition switch:
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the
shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) posi-
tion.
When the key cannot be turned toward the LOCK
position, proceed as follows to remove the key:
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the key slightly in the ON direction.
3. Turn the key towards the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key.
STEERING LOCK
To lock the steering wheel
1. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
To unlock the steering wheel
1. Insert the key into the ignition switch.
2. Gently turn the key while rotating the steering
wheel slightly right and left.
KEY POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)
The ignition key can only be removed when in this
position.
The steering lock can only be locked in this position.
OFF/ACC (Accessories)/(1)
The engine is turned off without locking the steering
wheel. This position activates electrical accessories,
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
NSD477
IGNITION SWITCH (where fitted)
Starting and driving 5-11
ON (Normal operating position) (2)
This position turns on the ignition system and elec-
trical accessories.
START (3)
The engine starter activates and the engine will start.
As soon as the engine has started, release the key
immediately. It will return to the ON position.
NOTE
For vehicles fitted with Stop/Start System:
When the engine is automatically stopped by the
Stop/Start System the ignition switch can still be
operated as usual.
At the end of a journey turn the ignition OFF to
avoid a flat battery. The Stop/Start System does
not automatically turn ignition off.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)
(where fitted)
The NISSAN Anti Theft System (NATS)* will stop
the engine if someone tries to start the engine with-
out using the registered NATS key.
* Immobilizer
If you failed to start the engine using the NATS Key,
turn the ignition knob to the LOCK position, wait for
5 seconds and turn the key to the START position
again to start the engine.
For additional information, see “NISSAN Anti-Theft
System (NATS)” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
PRECAUTIONS ON PUSH-BUTTON
IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch
while driving the vehicle except in an emergency.
(The engine will stop when the ignition switch is
pushed 3 consecutive times in quick succession
or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the
vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash
and serious injury.
Before operating the push-button ignition switch:
•
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position or
depress the clutch pedal (for Manual Transmis-
sion (MT) models).
•
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (for
XTRONIC transmission (CVT) models).
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
The Intelligent Key system can operate the ignition
switch without taking the key out from your pocket
or bag. The operating environment and/or condi-
tions may affect the Intelligent Key system opera-
tion.
CAUTION
•
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
when operating the vehicle.
•
Never leave the Intelligent Key inside the ve-
hicle when you leave the vehicle.
•
If the Intelligent Key is too far away from the
driver, the vehicle may not start.
•
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the igni-
tion switch cannot be switched from the
“LOCK” position, and if the steering lock is
engaged, the steering wheel cannot be
moved. Charge the battery as soon as pos-
sible (See “Jump-starting” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.)
Operating range
The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting the
engine when the Intelligent Key is within the speci-
fied operating range
j1 as illustrated.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present near
the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s
operating range becomes narrower and may not
function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it
SSD0436Z
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION
SWITCH (where fitted)
5-12 Starting and driving
is possible for anyone, even someone who does not
carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch
to start the engine.
•
The luggage room area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key may func-
tion.
•
If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument
panel, inside the glove box, door pocket or the
corner of the interior compartment, the Intelli-
gent Key may not function.
•
If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or
window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key
may function.
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
When the ignition switch is pushed without depress-
ing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illumi-
nate:
Push the centre of the ignition switch:
•
Once to change to ON.
•
Two times to change to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the
LOCK position when any door is either opened or
closed with the switch in the OFF position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are dis-
played on the vehicle information display. See “Ve-
hicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
ON position (normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and elec-
trical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the igni-
tion switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle is not
running, after some time under the following condi-
tions:
•
All doors are closed
•
Shift lever is in P (Park) (for XTRONIC transmis-
sion models).
The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of
the following occur:
•
Any door is opened.
•
Shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position.
•
Ignition switch changes position.
CAUTION
•
Do not leave the vehicle for extended periods
of time when the ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position and the engine is not run-
ning. This can discharge the battery.
•
Use electrical accessories with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
tery. If you must use accessories while the
engine is not running, do not use them for
extended periods of time and do not use mul-
tiple electrical accessories at the same time.
LOCK position (normal parking position)
The ignition switch and steering lock can only be
locked at this position.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened
or closed with the ignition switched off.
XTRONIC transmission:
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be switched to the “LOCK” position
until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
When pushing the ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-
tion, make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) posi-
tion.
When the ignition switch cannot be switched to the
“LOCK” position:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch po-
sition will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the LOCK posi-
tion.
The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-
tion if the ignition switch is in the ON position and
the brake pedal is depressed.
NSD476
Starting and driving 5-13
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-
button ignition switch cannot be moved from the
LOCK position.
OFF position
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the
engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No
lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.
ACC position
With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelli-
gent key with you and the ignition placed from ON
to OFF, the radio can still be used for a period of
time, or until the driver’s door is opened.
After a period of time, functions such as radio, navi-
gation, and Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
may be restarted by pressing the “POWER button/
VOLUME control knob” (See “Monitor, climate, au-
dio, phone and voice recognition systems” in this
manual) or the keyfob unlock button up to a total of
30 minutes.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving, perform the following procedure:
•
Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3
consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
•
Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.
STEERING LOCK
The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theft
steering lock device.
To lock steering wheel
1. Push the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
where the ignition switch position indicator will
not illuminate.
2. Open or close the door. The ignition switch turns
to the “LOCK” position.
3. Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn to the right
or left from the straight up position.
To unlock steering wheel
Push the ignition switch to “ACC”, and the steering
wheel will be automatically unlocked.
CAUTION
•
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the
push-button ignition switch cannot be
switched from the “LOCK” position.
•
If the ignition switch position does not change
from the “LOCK” position, push the i gnition
switch again while rotating the steering wheel
slightly to the right and left.
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
DISCHARGE
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged, or
environmental conditions interfere with the Intelli-
gent Key operation, start the engine according to
the following procedure:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) (XTRONIC
transmission models) or N (Neutral) (MT models)
position.
2. Firmly apply the footbrake.
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor (MT mod-
els)
4. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key
as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
5. Push the ignition switch while depressing the
brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime
sounds. The engine will start.
SSD0860Z
5-14 Starting and driving
After step 4 is performed, when the ignition switch
is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the
ignition switch position will change to “ACC”.
NOTE
•
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
“ACC” or “ON” position or the engine is started
by the above procedures, the Intelligent Key
system warning light may blink in yellow (on
the meter) even if the Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To stop
the warning light from blinking, touch the ig-
nition switch with the Intelligent Key again.
•
If the Intelligent Key system warning light in
the meter is blinking in green, replace the bat-
tery as soon as possible. (See “Integrated
keyfob/Intelligent Key battery replacement” in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
tion.)
MODELS WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
SYSTEM
1. Apply the parking brake. For additional informa-
tion, see “Parking brake switch” in the “3. Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.
2. Manual transmission models:
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position,
and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while
starting the engine.
XTRONIC transmission (CVT) models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position. (P position is preferred).
The starter is designed to operate only when
the shift lever is in the proper position.
The Intelligent Key (where fitted) must be car-
ried while inside the vehicle when operating
the ignition switch.
3. To start the engine:
•
MT models – keep the clutch pedal
depressed and/or depress the brake pedal
then push the ignition switch to the “ON” po-
sition.
•
XTRONIC transmission models – depress the
brake pedal then push the ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
NOTE
•
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depress-
ing the brake pedal or clutch pedal with
the ignition switch in any position.
•
For diesel engine models: In cold condi-
tions there may be a delay for a few sec-
onds before the engine cranks. This is due
to the glow plugs heating to ensure ad-
equate engine starting conditions. The
glow indicator light (
) will illuminate
during this delay, then the engine will start.
4. Immediately release the ignition switch when the
engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedures.
NOTE
Petrol engine models:
•
If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 of the way to the floor)
and hold it and then crank the engine. Re-
lease the ignition switch and the accelera-
tor pedal when the engine starts.
•
If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank
the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off the ac-
celerator pedal by turning the ignition
switch to START. Release the switch when
the engine starts. If the engine starts, but
fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
STARTING ENGINE
Starting and driving 5-15
CAUTION
•
As soon as the engine has started, release
the ignition switch immediately.
•
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position and wait 10 seconds (Petrol
engine models) or 20 seconds (Diesel en-
gine models) before cranking again, oth-
erwise the starter could be damaged.
•
If it becomes necessary to start the engine
with a booster battery and jumper cables,
the instructions and cautions contained in
the “6. In case of emergency” section
should be carefully followed.
5. After starting, allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds to warm-up. Drive at moderate
speeds for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the
engine is warming up.
6. To stop the engine:
– Manual transmission models: apply the park-
ing brake and push the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position.
– XTRONIC transmission models: move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position, apply the
parking brake and push the switch to the
“OFF” position.
7. The steering wheel lock engages when ignition
is off and a door is opened or closed.
MODELS WITHOUT INTELLIGENT
KEY SYSTEM
1. Apply the parking brake. For additional informa-
tion, see “Parking brake switch” in the “3. Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.
2. Manual transmission models:
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position,
and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while
starting the engine.
XTRONIC transmission (CVT) models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position. (P position is preferred).
The starter is designed to operate only when
the shift lever is in the proper position.
3. Rotate the steering wheel left to right to release
the ignition lock whilst turning the ignition switch
to the ON position.
4. For diesel engine models: Wait until the glow
indicator light (
) goes out.
5. With your foot on the brake pedal, not on the
accelerator pedal, crank the engine by turning
the ignition switch to START.
6. Immediately release the ignition switch when the
engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedures.
NOTE
Petrol engine models:
•
If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 of the way to the floor)
and hold it and then crank the engine. Re-
lease the ignition switch and the accelera-
tor pedal when the engine starts.
•
If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank
the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off the ac-
celerator pedal by turning the ignition
switch to START. Release the switch when
the engine starts. If the engine starts, but
fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
•
As soon as the engine has started, release
the ignition switch immediately.
•
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position and wait 10 seconds (Petrol
engine models) or 20 seconds (Diesel en-
gine models) before cranking again, oth-
erwise the starter could be damaged.
5-16 Starting and driving
•
If it becomes necessary to start the engine
with a booster battery and jumper cables,
the instructions and cautions contained in
the “6. In case of emergency” section
should be carefully followed.
7. After starting, allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds to warm-up. Drive at moderate
speeds for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the
engine is warming up.
8. To stop the engine:
– Manual transmission models: apply the park-
ing brake and push or turn the ignition switch
to the “OFF” position.
– XTRONIC transmission models: move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position, apply the
parking brake and push or turn the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position.
9. Rotate the steering wheel left to lock the steering
wheel.
DRIVING WITH MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
CAUTION
•
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while
driving. This may cause clutch damage.
•
Stop your vehicle completely before shifting
into the R (Reverse) position.
•
When you are shifting from one gear to an-
other, be certain to depress the clutch pedal
all the way to the floor to avoid clashing or
chipping the gears.
•
Avoid abrupt starts and acceleration for your
safety.
•
When quick acceleration is required for some
reason, shift to a lower gear and accelerate
until the vehicle reaches the maximum speed
in each gear. Do not exceed the speed limit of
any gear. Pay special attention when acceler-
ating or when shifting into a lower gear on
slippery surfaces. Sudden acceleration or
down shifting could cause the wheels to skid
and result in loss of control.
Shifting
jA
RHD models
jB
LHD models
j1
Shift lever ring
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal,
shift into the appropriate gear, then release the
clutch slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the
clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the
clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the trans-
mission is shifted, a grating noise may be heard.
This could result in damage to the transmission.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift through the
gears in sequence according to the vehicle speed.
NSD525
6–speed MT (where fitted)
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Starting and driving 5-17
Shift lever indicator (where fitted):
The shift lever indicator jA located in the lower part
of the vehicle information display can help to im-
prove the level of environmentally friendly driving.
Following the shift lever indicator by changing to a
higher (or lower) gear whenever the UP (or DOWN)
arrow is displayed may improve fuel economy
An UP arrow suggests shifting to a higher gear, a
down arrow suggests shifting to a lower gear.
However, the driver remains responsible for decid-
ing the most suitable gear according to actual ve-
hicle, road and traffic conditions.
NOTE
No arrow is displayed is some circumstances in-
cluding:
– The actual gear matches recommended gear
– The vehicle speed is approx. 0 km/h
Reverse gear:
To reverse with 6–speed manual transmission, pro-
ceed as follows:
1) Stop the vehicle.
2) Move the shift lever into the N (Neutral) position.
3) Pull and hold the shift lever ring
j1 up.
4) Move the shift lever into the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
5) Release the shift lever ring and safely drive the
vehicle backwards.
The shift lever ring returns to its original position
when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral)
position.
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
either the NissanConnect monitor (where fitted) or
the ultrasonic parking sensor (where fitted) will be
activated. For details, see “Rear-view monitor
(where fitted)” or “Around View Monitor (where
fitted)” in the “4. Display screen, heater and air con-
ditioner, and audio system” section or “Ultrasonic
Parking Sensors (where fitted)” later in this section.
For details, see “Ultrasonic Parking Sensors (where
fitted)” later in this section.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse)
or 1st. Shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch
pedal. Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift
into R (Reverse) or 1st.
DRIVING WITH XTRONIC
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
CAUTION
•
The cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or re-
verse gear before the engine has warmed up.
•
Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle
is stopped. This could cause unexpected ve-
hicle movement.
Driving precautions
•
Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while
the vehicle is moving, this could result in dam-
age to the transmission.
•
Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N
(Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with
the transmission in the N position may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
•
Start the engine in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position. The engine will not start in any other
shift lever position. If it does, have your ve-
hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop.
•
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while
shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Re-
verse), D (Drive) or Manual shift modes posi-
tion. Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed.
NSD496
5-18 Starting and driving
•
On an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot-
brake should be used for this purpose, in or-
der to hold the vehicle in place and to prevent
overheating of the transmission.
•
Shift into the N (Neutral) position and apply
the parking brake when at a standstill for
longer than a short waiting period.
•
Keep the engine at idling speed while shifting
from the N (Neutral) position to any driving
position.
CAUTION (when starting the vehicle):
•
DEPRESS THE FOOTBRAKE PEDAL
When the engine is running, shifting the shift
lever into the R (Reverse), D (Drive) or Manual
shift mode position without depressing the
brake pedal causes the vehicle to move
slowly. Be sure the brake pedal is fully de-
pressed and the vehicle is stopped, before
shifting the shift lever.
•
BE AWARE OF THE SHIFT LEVER POSITION
Make sure that the shift lever is in the desired
position. Use the D (Drive), or Manual shift
mode to move forwards and the R (Reverse)
to move backwards. Release the parking
brake and the footbrake pedal, then depress
the accelerator pedal to start the vehicle in
motion and merge with traffic (avoid abrupt
starting and spinning the wheels).
•
Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle
is stopped, this could cause unexpected ve-
hicle movement [if the shift lever is in the R
(Reverse), D (Drive), or Manual shift mode po-
sition] or damage the engine [if the shift lever
is in the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position].
•
WARM THE ENGINE UP
Due to the higher idle speeds when the en-
gine is cold, extra caution must be taken when
shifting the shift lever into the driving position
immediately after starting the engine.
•
PARKING THE VEHICLE
Depress the footbrake pedal and, once the
vehicle stops, move the shift lever into the P
(Park) position, apply the parking brake and
release the footbrake pedal.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot-
brake pedal before shifting the shift lever from P
(Park) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or Manual shift
mode.
2. Keep the footbrake pedal depressed and push
the shift lever button to shift into a driving gear.
3. Release the parking brake and footbrake, then
gradually start the vehicle in motion by pressing
the accelerator pedal.
The XTRONIC transmission is designed so that the
footbrake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition
switch is ON.
Shifting
jA
LHD models
jB
RHD models
To move the shift lever:
m
Push the button while depressing the
brake pedal.
m
Push the button to shift.
m
Just move the shift lever.
Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R (Reverse).
All other positions can be selected without pushing
the button.
NSD499
Starting and driving 5-19
P (Park):
Use this position when the vehicle is parked or when
starting the engine. Always make sure that the ve-
hicle is completely stopped before moving the shift
lever into the P (Park) position. For maximum safety,
the footbrake pedal must be depressed before mov-
ing the shift lever into the P (Park) position. Use this
position together with the parking brake. When park-
ing on a hill, first depress the footbrake pedal, apply
the parking brake and then shift into the P (Park)
position.
R (Reverse):
CAUTION
Shift into this position only after the vehicle has
completely stopped.
Use this position to reverse the vehicle.
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
either the NissanConnect monitor (where fitted) or
the ultrasonic parking sensor (where fitted) will be
activated. For details, see “Rear-view monitor
(where fitted)” or “Around View Monitor (where
fitted)” in the “4. Display screen, heater and air con-
ditioner, and audio system” section or “Ultrasonic
Parking Sensors (where fitted)” later in this section.
N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may shift
to N and restart a stalled engine while driving the
vehicle.
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
Shift lever indicator:
The shift lever indicator
jA located in the lower part
of the vehicle information display shows the current
position of the transmission.
It shows the P,R,N,D modes when the transmission
is in auto mode or the shift position when the trans-
mission is in manual mode.
Ds (Drive Sport) and Manual shift mode
When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) to the
manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while
driving, the transmission enters Ds (Drive Sport)
mode. Ds mode will provide improved acceleration
response and engine braking. Moving the shift lever
forwards and backwards allows manual shifting.
In manual shift mode, the selected gear is displayed
on the position indicator in the combination meter.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1st ⇔ 2nd ⇔ 3rd ⇔ 4th ⇔ 5th ⇔ 6th ⇔ 7th
•
When shifting up, move the shift lever to the +
(up) side. (Shifts to higher range).
•
When shifting down, move the shift lever to the
– (down) side. (Shifts to lower range).
•
Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same side
twice will shift the ranges in succession.
•
Use the 1st position when driving slowly on steep
hills, slow driving through deep snow, sand or
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
downhill grades.
•
Use the 2nd, 3rd or 4th position when driving
steep hills or for engine braking on steep down-
hill grades.
•
Use the 5th position for driving up or down long
slopes.
•
Use the 6th position for all normal forward driv-
ing. However, you need to shift down the gears
when accelerating or passing another vehicle.
•
When cancelling manual shift mode, return the
shift lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmis-
sion returns to the normal driving mode.
•
In manual shift mode, the transmission may
not shift to the selected gear under certain
circumstances. This helps maintain driving
performance and reduces the chance of ve-
hicle damage or loss of control.
NSD498
5-20 Starting and driving
•
If the engine is revving up to a hazardous
speed in manual shift mode, the transmission
may shift up automatically. When the vehicle
speed decreases, the transmission automati-
cally shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before
the vehicle comes to a stop.
Accelerator downshift – In the D (Drive)
and Ds (Drive Sport) position
For rapid passing or driving uphill, fully depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the trans-
mission down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.
Shift lock release
j1
LHD models
j2
RHD models
jA
Shift lock release button
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift
lever may not move from the P (Park) position even
with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever
button pushed.
To move the shift lever, perform the following proce-
dure:
1. Models with Intelligent Key system:
Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” or LOCK
position.
Models without Intelligent Key system:
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position,
and remove the key if it is inserted.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Push down the shift lock release button
jA . Use
a suitable tool.
4. Push and hold the shift lever button and move
the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while
holding down the shift lock release button.
Place the ignition switch in the ON position to un-
lock the steering wheel. The vehicle may be moved
to the desired location.
For models with Intelligent Key system: If the battery
is discharged completely, the steering wheel cannot
be unlocked. Do not move the vehicle with the steer-
ing wheel locked.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park)
position, have a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop check the XTRONIC system as soon as pos-
sible.
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P
(Park) position while the engine is running and
the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may
not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
High fluid temperature protection mode
This transmission has a high fluid temperature pro-
tection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too
high (for example, when climbing steep grades in
high temperature with heavy loads, such as when
towing a trailer), engine power and, under some
conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased auto-
matically to reduce the chance of transmission dam-
age. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the ac-
celerator pedal, but engine and vehicle speed may
be limited.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the vehicle
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the
chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can
be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the
engine power may be limited. Have a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop check and repair the trans-
mission.
NSD502
Starting and driving 5-21
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions,
such as excessive wheel spinning and subse-
quent hard braking, the Fail-safe system may be
activated. This will occur even if all electrical cir-
cuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn
the ignition switch “OFF” and wait for 10 sec-
onds. Then turn the key back to the ON position.
The vehicle should return to its normal operating
condition. If it does not return to its normal oper-
ating condition have your NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop check the transmission and have
the transmission repaired by a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop, if necessary.
WARNING
When the fail safe operation occurs, the vehicle
speed may be lower than other traffic, which
could increase the chance of a collision. Be es-
pecially careful when driving. If necessary, drive
to the side of the road at a safe place and away
from traffic, to allow the transmission to return to
normal operation, or have the transmission re-
paired by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop,
if necessary.
The Stop/Start System is designed to prevent un-
necessary fuel consumption, exhaust emissions,
and noise during a journey:
•
When you stop the vehicle with the brake pedal
depressed (XTRONIC transmission) or with the
shift lever in N (Neutral) and clutch pedal re-
leased (MT), the engine is turned off automati-
cally.
•
When you release the brake pedal (XTRONIC
transmission) or push the clutch pedal (MT), the
engine is automatically turned on.
CAUTION
At the end of the journey the engine must be
stopped and ignition turned OFF. Lock the ve-
hicle as normal. Turning the ignition OFF will shut
down all electrical systems. Failure to do this may
result in a flat battery.
NORMAL OPERATION
The Stop/Start System has stopped the engine and
will automatically restart the engine. The Stop/Start
symbol is shown in the vehicle information display.
NOTE
The Stop/Start System will not activate under
the following conditions:
•
When the engine is kept idling without any driv-
ing after the engine is turned on.
•
When the engine coolant temperature is low.
•
When the battery capacity is low.
•
When the battery temperature is low or extremely
high.
•
When the vehicle is moved.
•
When the vacuum in the brake servo decreases.
•
When the engine bonnet is opened with the en-
gine running.
NSD491
STOP/START SYSTEM
(where fitted)
5-22 Starting and driving
•
When the engine is turned on with the engine
bonnet open.
•
When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
•
When the driver’s door is open.
•
When the steering wheel is operated.
•
When the Stop/Start System indicator blinks at
a low speed.
•
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
(XTRONIC transmission models).
•
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
•
When the fan speed control dial is in any posi-
tion other than “OFF” (0) while the air flow con-
trol dial is in the front defogger position (manual
air conditioner).
•
When the front defogger switch is on (automatic
air conditioner).
•
When the Stop/Start System OFF switch is
turned on.
•
When the electric power steering warning light,
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light, or the Electronic Stability Programme
(ESP) warning light illuminates.
•
When the brake pedal is not fully depressed
(XTRONIC transmission models).
•
When stopping the vehicle on steep sloping
roads (XTRONIC transmission models).
•
When the power consumption is large.
•
When the vehicle is travelling at altitudes higher
than 2000 m (6562 ft) (MT models).
•
When the vehicle is travelling at altitudes higher
than 1500m (4922 ft) (R9M engine in combina-
tion with XTRONIC transmission models).
NOTE
It may take some time until the Stop/Start Sys-
tem activates under the following conditions:
•
When the battery is discharged.
•
When the outside temperature is low.
•
When the battery is replaced or the battery ter-
minal is disconnected for extended periods and
then reconnected.
NOTE
The engine will not restart even if the brake pedal
is released (XTRONIC transmission ) or clutch
pedal is pressed (MT) while the Stop/Start Sys-
tem is activated under the following condition:
•
When the shift lever is in the P (Park) position
(XTRONIC transmission models).
•
When the engine bonnet is opened.
•
When the driver seat belt is unfastened and the
driver’s door is opened (MT models).
•
When the gear shift lever is not in the Neutral
position. (MT models)
NOTE
The engine will restart without releasing the
brake pedal (XTRONIC transmission models) or
without depressing the clutch pedal (MT models)
while the Stop/Start System is activated under
the following conditions:
•
When the Stop/Start System OFF switch is
pushed.
•
When the fan speed control dial is in any posi-
tion other than “OFF” (0) while the air flow con-
trol dial is in the front defogger position (manual
air conditioner).
•
When the front defogger switch is set to “ON”
(automatic air conditioner).
•
When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
(XTRONIC transmission models)
•
When the steering wheel is operated. (XTRONIC
transmission models)
•
When the battery capacity is low.
•
When the power consumption is large.
•
When the brake pedal is released on sloping
roads and the vehicle is moved.
•
When the force to the brake pedal is reduced
while the shift lever is in the D (Drive) or N (Neu-
tral) position. (XTRONIC transmission models)
•
When the shift lever is placed in the L (Low), D
(Drive) or R (Reverse) position from the N or P
position. (XTRONIC transmission models)
•
When the vacuum of the brake servo is insuffi-
cient as a result of depressing the brake pedal
several times.
Starting and driving 5-23
•
When the driver’s seat belt is released or the
driver’s door is open. (XTRONIC transmission
models)
Use this system while waiting at stoplight, etc. When
the vehicle is stopped for long periods of time, turn
off the engine.
When the engine bonnet is opened with the Stop/
Start System on, the engine will be in the normal
stopped state with the buzzer sounding. In this case,
restart the engine with the ignition switch.
When the engine is stopped by the Stop/Start Sys-
tem, heating, cooling and dehumidifying functions
will be deactivated. To avoid the air conditioning
functions from being deactivated, turn off the Stop/
Start System by pressing the Stop/Start System
OFF switch.
The Stop/Start System is always engaged at the
start of a journey (once the engine has been started).
The engine is automatically stopped and restarted
during the journey if conditions are suitable
When the engine is stopped the following informa-
tion is displayed for a few seconds.
See “Vehicle information display” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section for information about
the display.
m
NOTE
Automatic engine restart
is possible whenever the
Stop/Start System
symbol is illuminated at
the bottom of the
display.
Whilst the engine remains stopped the vehicle infor-
mation display shows the accumulated quantity (es-
timate) of carbon dioxide exhaust emissions (where
fitted) prevented by the Stop/Start System.
m
The [CO2 Saved] can
be reset in the Settings
menu; see “Vehicle
information display” in
the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
When automatic restart is not possible the following
information is displayed. The engine must be started
by turning the ignition switch.
m
The message can be
cleared by pressing the
steering wheel
ji button,
restarting the engine, or
turning the ignition OFF.
PRECAUTIONS
The following message is displayed when there may
be something wrong with the Stop/Start System.
You are advised to have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
m
The message can be
cleared by pressing the
steering wheel ENTER
button
NOTE
The Stop/Start System
symbol at the bottom of
the display flashes whilst
the fault condition
remains.
5-24 Starting and driving
STOP/START SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
The system can be temporarily disengaged by
pressing the Stop/Start System OFF switch. Press-
ing the button a second time will re-engage the
Stop/Start System.
•
When the Stop/Start System is disengaged
whilst the engine is running, the engine is pre-
vented from automatically stopping.
•
When the Stop/Start System is disengaged af-
ter the engine has been automatically stopped
by the Stop/Start System, the engine will imme-
diately restart if suitable conditions are present
as described under NORMAL OPERATION.
The engine will then be prevented from automati-
cally stopping during the same journey.
•
Whenever the Stop/Start System is disengaged
the indicator light on the Stop/Start System OFF
switch illuminates. In this condition the Stop/
Start System cannot prevent unnecessary fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions, or noise dur-
ing your journey.
NOTE
The following messages may be displayed for a
few seconds in the vehicle information display
when the Stop/Start System OFF switch is
pressed.
Stop/Start System
disengaged
m
Stop/Start System
re-engaged
m
More information about the Stop/Start System can
be checked using the [Settings] menu (see Instru-
ments and Controls)
ENVIRONMENTAL SAVINGS
The vehicle information display keeps a record of
the CO2 savings that can be viewed via the [Set-
tings] menu.
See “Vehicle information display” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section for information about
the display.
Information that can be displayed includes:
•
[Trip Saving]
Estimated CO2 exhaust emissions prevented
since last reset.
NOTE
The [Trip Saving] value is the same informa-
tion that is displayed when the engine is auto-
matically stopped by the Stop/Start System.
•
[Total Saving]
– Estimated CO2 exhaust emissions pre-
vented.
– Time that the engine has been stopped by
the Stop/Start System.
NOTE
The [Total Saving] values cannot be reset
and show accumulated Stop/Start System
information since the vehicle was built.
NSD492
Right hand drive (RHD)
NSD493
Left hand drive (LHD)
Starting and driving 5-25
The Four Wheel Drive (4WD) system is used to
select 2WD, AUTO, or LOCK depending on the
driving conditions.
The Four Wheel Drive (4WD) system controls the
coupling operation. Switch the control switch (see
illustration) to select each mode: 2WD, AUTO or
LOCK depending on the driving conditions.
AUTO: Switch the control switch to the neutral
(AUTO) position and the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
AUTO indicator light
on the combination meter
illuminates.
2WD: Switch the control switch to the 2WD posi-
tion.
LOCK: When the control is switched to the LOCK
position, it springs back to the AUTO position when
released. The 4WD LOCK mode indicator light
illuminates on the combination meter, to show
LOCK mode is engaged. To disengage LOCK
mode, switch the control switch again to the LOCK
position and release. The 4WD LOCK mode indica-
tor light will go out.
NSD494
Right hand drive (RHD)
NSD495
Left hand drive (LHD)
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
(where fitted)
5-26 Starting and driving
4WD MODE OPERATIONS
CAUTION
Depending on the driving conditions, the 4WD
mode may automatically change from 2WD to
4WD even when the 2WD mode is selected.
If this occurs while driving, the 4WD mode indi-
cator light will not illuminate.
Do not start the engine while in the 2WD, AUTO,
or LOCK mode:
•
When on free-roller or jacking the front tyres
with the rear tyres on the ground.
•
When towing with the rear tyres raised from
the ground.
4WD SHIFT TIPS
•
If the 4WD mode control is operated while cor-
nering, accelerating or decelerating, or if the ig-
nition is turned OFF while in the AUTO or LOCK
position you may feel a jolt - this is normal.
•
The oil temperature of power train parts will in-
crease if the vehicle is continuously operated
under conditions where the difference in rotation
between the front and rear wheels is large (wheel
slip), such as when driving the vehicle on rough
roads through sand or mud, or when freeing a
stuck vehicle. In these cases, the message [4WD
High Temp. Stop Vehicle] will appear in the ve-
hicle information display and the 4WD mode
changes to the 2WD condition to protect the
power train parts. If you stop the vehicle, with
4WD Mode Wheels driven
4WD mode
indicator light
(
m
,
m
)
Driving conditions
2WD
Front wheels-
The wheel drive mode is in
2WD when driving on a normal
road
*1
Goes off For driving on dry, paved roads
AUTO
Distribution of torque to the
front and rear wheels changes
automatically, depending on
road conditions encountered
[ratio; 100:0 (2WD) → 50:50
(4WD)]. This results in
improved driving stability
m
For driving on paved or slippery roads
LOCK Four wheels
*2
m
/
m
For driving on rough roads
*1
The 2WD mode may change to the 4WD mode automatically depending on the driving condition. The 4WD mode indi-
cator light does not illuminate.
*2
LOCK mode changes to AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle is sharply accelerated or when the vehicle speed
is over approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH). The 4WD LOCK indicator light goes off. Turning off the ignition automatically
cancels LOCK mode.
Starting and driving 5-27
the engine idling, and wait until the warning mes-
sage is no longer displayed, the 4WD mode re-
turns to the AUTO mode.
•
Braking distance in 4WD mode is the same as in
2WD mode.
•
Even if the mode automatically changes to AUTO
mode, when driving in the LOCK mode, the indi-
cator light stays in the LOCK mode.
CAUTION
•
Only use the 4WD mode control when driving
in a straight direction (to select 2WD, AUTO or
LOCK).
•
Do not use the 4WD mode control when turn-
ing or reversing.
•
Do not use the 4WD mode control with the
front wheels spinning (to select 2WD, AUTO,
or LOCK).
•
Be especially careful when starting or driving
on slippery surfaces with the 4WD mode set
to AUTO.
•
Never drive on dry hard surface roads in the
LOCK position as this will overload the power
train and may cause serious malfunctions.
4WD MODE INDICATOR LIGHTS
•
4WD mode indicator light (LOCK):
This light comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, and turns off within 1
second. When selecting LOCK mode while the
engine is running, this light will illuminate simul-
taneously along with the 4WD mode indicator
light (AUTO).
•
4WD mode indicator light (AUTO):
This light comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, and turns off within 1
second. If the engine is running, this light will illu-
minate when selecting AUTO mode.
The 4WD mode indicator light is located in the
instrument panel.
The light should turn off within 1 second of the
ignition switch being turned to the ON position.
While the engine is running, the 4WD mode indi-
cator light will display the position selected by
the 4WD mode control.
NOTE
The 4WD mode indicator light may blink while
shifting from one drive mode to another. Once
shifting is completed, the 4WD mode indicator
light will come on. If the indicator light does not
come on immediately, make sure that the area
around the vehicle is safe and free from ob-
stacles. Drive the vehicle straight (DO NOT ac-
celerate, decelerate or reverse), then turn the
4WD mode control.
If the 4WD warning lights comes on, the 4WD indi-
cator light(s) will go out.
DRIVING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
SAFELY
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-
road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or
mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure
use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that Two-Wheel drive (2WD) models are
less capable than Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models
for rough road driving and extrication when stuck,
for example, in deep snow or mud.
Please observe the following precautions:
•
Drive carefully when off-road and avoid danger-
ous areas. Always wear seat belts to help keep
you and your passengers in position when driv-
ing over rough terrain.
•
Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive
either straight up or straight down the slope. Off-
road vehicles can tip over sideways much more
easily than they can forwards or backwards.
•
Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you
drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down
them, you may not be able to control your speed.
If you drive across them, you may roll over.
•
Do not shift gears when driving on downhill
grades as this could cause loss of control of the
vehicle.
•
Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the
top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that
could cause an accident.
5-28 Starting and driving
•
If the engine of the vehicle stalls or you cannot
make it to the top of a steep grade, never at-
tempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or
roll over. Always drive backwards and straight
down in R (reverse) gear.
Never drive backwards with the shift lever in N
(Neutral) and/or with the clutch depressed and
using the brake as this could result in loss of
control.
•
Heavy braking down a hill could cause your
brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of
control and an accident. Apply the brakes lightly
and use a low gear to control your vehicle speed.
•
Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when
driving over rough terrain. Properly secure it so
that it will not be thrown forwards and cause
injury to you or your passengers.
•
To avoid raising the centre of gravity excessively,
do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack/
gear bin (where fitted) and evenly distribute the
load. Secure heavy loads in the luggage area as
far forwards and as low as possible. Do not equip
the vehicle with tyres larger than specified. This
could cause your vehicle to roll over.
•
Accelerating quickly, sharp steering manoeuvres
or sudden braking may cause loss of control.
•
Do not drive beyond the performance of the
tyres, even with 4WD. Sudden acceleration,
steering or braking may result in loss of control
and could cause the vehicle to become stuck.
•
If at all possible, avoid sharp turning manoeuvres,
particularly at high speeds. Your 4WD vehicle
has a higher centre of gravity than a 2WD ve-
hicle and can tip over more easily. The vehicle is
not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional 2WD models any more than low
sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
rily under off-road conditions. Failure to operate
this vehicle correctly could result in loss of con-
trol and/or a rollover accident.
•
Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering
wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel
could jerk and injure your hands. Instead, drive
with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of
the rim.
•
Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the
driver and all passengers have their seat belts
fastened.
•
Always drive with the floor mats in place as the
floor may become very hot. Particular care
should be taken if you are barefoot.
•
Lower your speed when encountering strong
crosswinds. With its higher centre of gravity your
NISSAN is more affected by gusty side winds.
Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.
•
Be sure to check the brakes immediately after
driving in mud or water as specified in “Wet
brakes” later in this section.
•
Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud
or water as deep as the wheel hub, more fre-
quent maintenance may be required. For details,
refer to the separately provided Warranty Infor-
mation and Maintenance Booklet.
•
Rinse the underside of the vehicle with fresh
water after driving through mud or sand. Re-
move any brush or sticks that are trapped.
•
Install the same size of winter tyres on all four (4)
wheels (such as studless tyres) or install snow
chains to the front wheels when driving on slip-
pery roads (e.g. after a snowfall) and drive care-
fully using 4WD.
•
Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you
get out of the vehicle and it rolls forwards, back-
wards or sideways, you could be injured.
Starting and driving 5-29
While driving, the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sys-
tem helps alert the driver to the presence of other
vehicles in adjacent lanes.
The BSW system uses the rear view monitor cam-
era unit
j1.
WARNING
•
The BSW system is not a replacement for
proper driving procedure and is not designed
to prevent contact with vehicles or objects.
When driving, always use the side and rear
mirrors and always turn your head and look in
the direction you will move to ensure it is safe
to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW
system.
•
The camera units may not function properly
under the following conditions:
– When towing a trailer.
– When strong light enters the camera unit.
(for example, light directly shines on the
front or rear of the vehicle at sunrise or
sunset.)
– When ambient brightness changes sud-
denly. (for example, when the vehicle en-
ters or exits a tunnel or passes under a
bridge.)
•
If the camera lens is excessively dirty, the au-
tomatic washer may not be able to completely
clean the lens. This could result in the camera
not detecting vehicles or lane markers.
•
Excessive noise (for example, audio system
volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 32
km/h (20 MPH).
The BSW light is shown in the vehicle information
display if the Blind Spot Warning system is active.
To switch the system on or off, see the description
later in this section.
When the camera unit detects a vehicle in the de-
tection zone, the Blind Spot Indicator light located in
the front corner of the door window (by the outside
NAA1426
NAA1425
Blind Spot Indicator light on the inside of the mirrors
NAA1427
BSW light in the vehicle information display
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
SYSTEM (where fitted)
5-30 Starting and driving
mirrors) will illuminate. If the turn signal is then acti-
vated, the system chimes (twice) and the Blind spot
indicator light will start flashing bright orange to alert
you to the presence of vehicle(s) in the adjacent
lane.
The Blind spot indicator light continues to flash until
the detected vehicle(s) leave the detection zone.
Detection zone
The camera unit can detect vehicles on either side
of your vehicle when part of another vehicle is within
the detection zone shown as illustrated.
This detection zone typically starts from the outside
mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 3
m (10 ft) behind the rear bumper, and approximately
3 m (10 ft) sideways.
The brightness of the Blind Spot Indicator lights is
adjusted automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
A chime sounds if the camera unit has already de-
tected vehicles when the driver activates the turn
signal. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal, then only
the Blind Spot Indicator light flashes and no chime
sounds. (See “BSW driving situations” later in this
section.)
Turning the BSW system on or off
Turning the BSW system on or off is done using the
[Settings] menu in the vehicle information display.
For details. see “Vehicle information display” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.
In the [Settings] menu, select the [Driver Assistance]
key. Then select [Driving Aids]. Select [Blind Spot
Warning] key by pressing <ENTER>. A tick mark
next to [Blind Spot Warning] indicates that the sys-
tem is turned on.
SYSTEM ON:
The BSW light on the vehicle information display will
light up.
SYSTEM OFF:
The BSW light on the vehicle information display will
turn off.
WARNING
•
The camera unit may not be able to detect
when certain objects are present such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height
vehicles, or high ground clearance
vehicles.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
(See “BSW driving situations” later in this
section.)
– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rap-
idly. (See “BSW driving situations” later in
this section.)
– A vehicle that merges or changes lanes
rapidly directly next to your vehicle.
•
The camera unit may not be able to detect
properly when your vehicle travels beside the
middle section of a vehicle with long wheel-
base (for example, trailer truck, semi-trailer,
tractor).
•
The camera detection zone is designed based
on a standard lane width. When driving in a
wider lane, the camera unit may not detect
vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a
narrow lane, the camera unit may detect ve-
hicles driving two lanes away.
•
The camera unit is designed to ignore most
stationary objects, however objects such as
guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles
may occasionally be detected. This is a nor-
mal operating condition.
•
The camera unit may detect the reflected im-
age of vehicles or roadside objects that are
not actually in the detection zone, especially
when the road is wet.
SSD1026Z
Starting and driving 5-31
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Another vehicle approaching from
behind
The Blind Spot Indicator light illuminates if a vehicle
enters the detection zone from behind in an adja-
cent lane.
However, if the overtaking vehicle is travelling much
faster than your vehicle, the indicator light may not
illuminate before the detected vehicle is beside your
vehicle.
If the driver activates the turn signal, then the Blind
Spot Indicator light flashes and a chime will sound
twice.
NOTE
If the driver activates the turn signal before a
vehicle enters the detection z one, the Blind Spot
Indicator light will flash but no chime will sound
when the other vehicle is detected.
Overtaking other vehicles
The Blind Spot Indicator light illuminates if you over-
take a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection
zone for approximately 3 seconds.
The camera unit may not detect slower moving ve-
hicles if they are passed quickly.
If the driver activates the turn signal while another
vehicle is in the detection zone, then the Blind Spot
Indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice.
BSW TEMPORARY DISABLED
STATUS
Under the following conditions the BSW system is
turned off temporarily and the BSW light will blink
when:
•
The back door is open.
•
The rear camera lens is dirty.
•
Rain, snow or dirt has adhered to the windscreen
in front of the multi-sensing camera unit.
SSD1026Z
SSD1031Z
SSD1033Z
SSD1034Z
5-32 Starting and driving
When the above conditions are corrected, the BSW
system will resume automatically.
BSW AUTOMATIC DEACTIVATION
When dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the rear
camera, or the windscreen in front of the multi-sens-
ing camera, the BSW system will be turned off auto-
matically. The BSW light will blink.
Action to take:
If the message appears, park the vehicle in a safe
place, clean the camera unit and/or windscreen with
a soft cloth. Then turn off and restart the engine.
BSW MALFUNCTION
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will be turned off
automatically and the BSW light (orange) will illumi-
nate.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off and re-
start the engine. If the BSW light (orange) continues
to illuminate, have the BSW system checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
BSW CAMERA UNIT MAINTENANCE
The rear camera unit j1 for the BSW system is
located above the rear number plate and it has a
automatic washer and blower for cleaning the lens.
To maintain the proper operation of the BSW sys-
tem and prevent a system malfunction be sure to
observe the following:
•
Always keep the camera unit clean. Be careful
not to damage the nozzle of automatic washer
and blower.
•
Do not attach “number plate accessories” that
reflect light.
•
Do not strike or damage the areas around the
camera unit.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system alerts
the driver when the vehicle is travelling close to ei-
ther the left or the right of a travelling lane.
The LDW system uses the multi-sensing front cam-
era unit situated in front of the interior rear view mir-
ror
j1.
WARNING
•
The LDW system is only a warning device to
help inform the driver of a potential unin-
tended lane departure. It will not steer the
vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driv-
er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely,
keep the vehicle in the travelling lane, and be
in control of the vehicle at all times.
•
The camera units may not function properly
under the following conditions:
– When towing a trailer.
NAA1429
NSD522
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
(LDW) SYSTEM (where fitted)
Starting and driving 5-33
– When strong light enters the camera unit.
(for example, light directly shines on the
front or rear of the vehicle at sunrise or
sunset.)
– When ambient brightness changes sud-
denly. (for example, when the vehicle en-
ters or exits a tunnel or passes under a
bridge.)
•
Excessive noise (for example, audio system
volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDW system operates above approximately 60
km/h (37 MPH).
When the vehicle approaches either the left or the
right of the travelling lane, the LDW system will
chime and the LDW light (orange) in the vehicle
information display will blink to alert the driver.
The LDW system is not designed to operate under
the following conditions:
•
When you operate the lane change signal and
change travelling lanes in the direction of the sig-
nal. (The LDW system will become operable
again approximately 2 seconds after the lane
change signal is turned off.)
•
When the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 60 km/h (37 MPH).
Turning on or off the LDW system
Turning the LDW system on or of is done using the
[Settings] menu in the vehicle information display.
For details, see “Vehicle information display” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.
In the [Settings] menu, select the [Driver Assistance]
key.
Then select [Driving Aids]. Select [Lane Departure
Warning] key by pressing <ENTER>.
A tick mark next to [Lane Departure Warning] indi-
cates that the system is turned on.
SYSTEM ON:
The LDW light in the vehicle information display will
light up.
SYSTEM OFF:
The LDW light in the vehicle information display will
turn off.
WARNING
•
The camera unit may not be able to detect
properly under the following conditions:
– On roads where there are multiple parallel
lane markers; lane markers that are faded
NAA1438
NAA1428
LDW light
5-34 Starting and driving
or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane
markers; non-standard lane markers; or
lane markers covered with water, dirt,
snow, etc.
– On roads where the discontinued lane
markers are still detectable.
– On roads where there are sharp curves.
– On roads where there are sharply contrast-
ing objects, such as shadows, snow, wa-
ter, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining
after road repairs. (The LDW system could
detect these items as lane markers.)
– On roads where the travelling lane merges
or separates.
– When the vehicle’s travelling direction
does not align with the lane marker.
– When the road surface is very dark due to
weak ambient light or impaired lamps.
– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the
windscreen in front of the LDW camera
unit.
•
When driving on a curved road, warning will
be late on the outside of the curve.
LDW TEMPORARY DISABLED
STATUS
The LDW system is turned off temporarily, and the
LDW light will blink when rain, snow, or dirt has
adhered to the windscreen in front of the multi-sens-
ing camera unit. When this condition is corrected,
the LDW system will resume automatically.
LDW AUTOMATIC DEACTIVATION
When dirt, rain, or snow accumulates on the wind-
screen in front of the multi-sensing camera unit, the
LDW system will be turned off automatically. The
LDW light will blink.
Action to take:
If the message appears, park the vehicle in a safe
place, clean the camera unit and/or windscreen with
a soft cloth. Then turn off and restart the engine.
LDW MALFUNCTION
When the LDW system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically and the LDW light (orange)
will illuminate.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off and re-
start the engine. If the LDW light (orange) continues
to illuminate, have the LDW system checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
MULTI-SENSING CAMERA UNIT
MAINTENANCE
The multi-sensing camera unit j1 for the LDW sys-
tem is located in front of the interior rear vier mirror.
To maintain the proper operation of the LDW sys-
tem and prevent a system malfunction be sure to
observe the following:
•
Always keep the windscreen clean.
•
Do not attach a sticker (including transparent
material) or install an accessory near the multi-
sensing lane camera unit.
•
Do not place reflective materials, such as white
paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The
reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the
multi-sensing camera unit’s detection capability.
NSD523
Starting and driving 5-35
•
Do not strike or damage the areas around the
multi-sensing lane camera unit. Do not touch the
camera lens or remove the screw located on the
camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due
to an accident, contact a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop.
The cruise control system allows driving at constant
speeds without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING
•
The cruise control system ONLY maintains a
constant vehicle speed, it does not replace
the driver.
•
Always observe the posted speed limits and
do not set the speed above them.
•
Do not use the cruise control system when
driving under the following conditions. Doing
so could cause a loss of vehicle control and
result in an accident.
– When it is not possible to keep the vehicle
at a constant speed
– When driving in heavy traffic
– When driving in traffic that varies speed
– When driving in windy areas
– When driving on winding or hilly roads
– When driving on slippery (rain, snow, ice,
etc.) roads
CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not shift into
N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal
when the cruise control is set. Should this occur,
depress the clutch pedal and turn the cruise con-
trol main switch off immediately. Failure to do so
may cause engine damage.
When the cruise control system is on the speed lim-
iter cannot be operated.
The cruise control system operation switches are
located on the steering wheel (right side).
The cruise control system operating condition is
shown in the vehicle information display.
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
•
The cruise control system will be automatically
cancelled when there is a malfunction. Have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
•
To properly set the cruise control system, per-
form the steps as described in “Setting a cruis-
ing speed” later in this section.
CRUISE CONTROL (where fitted)
5-36 Starting and driving
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
OPERATIONS
j
1
CANCEL switch
jA
RES/+ (Resume) switch
jB
SET/— switch
j2
Cruise control main “ON/OFF” switch
j3
Speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch
(For details, see “Speed limiter (where fitted)”
later in this section) (where fitted)
j4
Cruise control symbol
j5
Set speed value
Turning the cruise control system on
Push the cruise control main switch j2 . The cruise
control symbol j4 appears together with the last set
speed value (or———)
j5 in the top of the vehicle
information display.
Setting a cruising speed
1. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed.
2. Push the SET switch jB downwards and release
it.
3. The cruise control symbol
j4 appears together
with the set speed value (desired cruising speed)
j5 in the top of the vehicle information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will maintain the set speed.
If the vehicle speed is less than the minimum set
speed, it will not be possible to set the cruise
control system.
Changing a cruising speed
Use any one of the following methods to change the
cruising speed.
•
Slow the vehicle as normal using the footbrake
pedal.
When the vehicle reaches the desired cruising
speed, push and release the SET switch
jB
downwards.
The new set speed value will be displayed in the
top of the vehicle information display.
•
Press the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle reaches the desired cruising
speed, push and release the SET switch jB
downwards.
The new set speed value will be displayed in the
top of the vehicle information display.
•
Push and release the RES (resume) jA switch
upwards to increase or the SET switch jB down-
wards to decrease the set speed in steps of 1
km/h (1 MPH).
The new set speed value will be displayed in the
top of the vehicle information display.
•
Push and hold the RES (resume) jA switch up-
wards or the SET switch jB downwards. The
vehicle speed will increase or decrease to the
new set speed.
The new set speed value will be displayed in the
top of the vehicle information display.
NAA1385
Models with speed limiter (where fitted)
NAA1386
Models without speed limiter
NAA1431
Starting and driving 5-37
Passing another vehicle
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate. After
releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will re-
turn to the previously set speed.
The set speed value
j5 will flash until the vehicle
returns to the previously set speed.
Cancelling the cruise control system
To cancel a set speed limit, push the CANCEL
switch j1.
The cruise control symbol
j4 and the set speed
value j5 disappear from the top of the vehicle infor-
mation display.
The cruise control system will also be cancelled
automatically by any of the following:
•
Pressing the footbrake pedal.
•
Pressing the clutch pedal.
•
Shifting the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
First depress clutch pedal
•
If the vehicle slows down more than approxi-
mately 12 km/h (8 MPH) below the set speed.
Resuming a previous cruising speed
If the cruising speed has been cancelled, the last
set speed value will be stored in the cruise control
system memory. This cruising speed can be reacti-
vated by pressing the RES (Resume) switch
jA
upwards.
If the vehicle speed is less than a minimum set
speed, it will not be possible to resume to the
cruising speed.
Pressing the CANCEL switch prevents resuming
to the previous cruising speed.
Turn the cruise control system off
The cruise control system will be turned off when
one of the following operations is performed:
•
Push the cruise control main “ON/OFF” switch
j2 . The cruise control symbol j4 and the set
speed value j5 will turn off in the combination
meter display
•
Push the speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch
j3 . The cruise control system information in the
combination meter will be replaced with the
speed limiter information. For details see “Speed
limiter (where fitted)” later in this section.
•
When the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is
turned to the off position.
Turning off the cruise control system will erase
the cruise control system memory.
The speed limiter allows you to set the desired ve-
hicle speed limit. While the speed limiter is acti-
vated, you can perform normal braking and accel-
eration, but the vehicle will not exceed the set speed.
When the vehicle reaches the set speed limit or if
the set speed limit is lower than the actual vehicle
speed, the accelerator pedal will not work until the
vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit.
When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set
speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time
after the set speed is exceeded and driver interven-
tion is not detected.
When the speed limiter is on the cruise control sys-
tem cannot be operated.
WARNING
•
The speed limiter will not automatically brake
the vehicle to the set speed limit.
•
Always observe posted speed limits. Do not
set the speed above them.
•
Always confirm the setting status of the speed
limiter in the vehicle information display.
•
When the speed limiter is set, avoid hard ac-
celeration to reach the set limit to ensure that
the system can limit the speed of the vehicle
correctly.
SPEED LIMITER (where fitted)
5-38 Starting and driving
•
When additional floor mats are used, be sure
that they are correctly secured and that they
cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal.
Mats not adapted to the vehicle may prevent
proper operation of the speed limiter.
The speed limiter operation switches are located on
the steering wheel (right hand side).
The speed limiter operating condition is shown on
the top of vehicle information display. For details,
see “Vehicle information display” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section.
SPEED LIMITER OPERATIONS
j
1
CANCEL switch
jA
RES + (Resume) switch
jB
SET – (Set) switch
j2
Cruise control main “ON/OFF” switch. (For
details, see “Cruise control (where fitted)”
earlier in this section)
j3
Speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch
j4
Speed limiter symbol
j5
Set speed value
Turning the speed limiter on
The speed limiter can be switched on after engine
start or when driving.
Push the speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch
j3.
The speed limiter symbol
j4 and the set speed value
j5 will illuminate in the vehicle information display.
Setting speed limit
Push the SET switch jB (downwards).
Depending on the model:
•
The speed limit will be set at the current speed.
When driving less than 30 km/h (20 MPH), the
speed limiter will be set to the minimum possible
set speed of 30 km/h (20 MPH).
•
Set the speed limiter while driving over 30 km/h
(20 MPH).
When the speed limit is set, the speed limiter sym-
bol
j4 and the set speed value j5 will illuminate in
the vehicle information display. The limiter symbol
will turn green.
Changing a speed limit
Use either of the following operations to change an
active speed limit:
•
Push and release the RES (Resume) switch jA
upwards or SET switch jB downwards. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase or
decrease by 1 km/h (1 MPH).
•
Push and hold the RES (Resume) switch jA
upwards or SET switch jB downwards. The set
speed will increase or decrease to the next mul-
tiple of 5 km/h (5 MPH) and then in steps of 5
km/h (5 MPH).
The new set speed limit value
j5 will be displayed
in the vehicle information display.
When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set
speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time
after the set speed is exceeded and driver interven-
tion is not detected.
Cancelling a speed limit
To cancel a set speed limit, push the CANCEL
switch
j1 . The speed limiter symbol j4 and the set
speed value j5 in the vehicle information display will
be turned off.
It is also possible to override the speed limiter by
fully depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the
resistance point.
NAA1385
NAA1430
Starting and driving 5-39
WARNING
•
The vehicle may accelerate when the speed
limiter cancels.
•
When additional floor mats are used, be sure
that they are correctly secured and that they
cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal.
Mats not adapted to the vehicle may prevent
proper operation of the speed limiter.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
sistance point. The speed limiter will be suspended
to allow driving above the set speed. The set speed
value
j5 will flash and an audible warning will sound.
The speed limiter will automatically resume when
the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit.
Resuming a previous set speed
If a set speed limit has been cancelled, the set speed
will be stored in the speed limiter memory.
This speed limit can be reactivated by pressing the
RES (Resume) switch
jA upwards .
If the current vehicle speed is higher than the previ-
ous set speed, the accelerator pedal will not work
and the set speed value
j5 will flash until the vehicle
speed drops below the set speed limit.
When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set
speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time
after the set speed is exceeded and driver interven-
tion is not detected.
Turning the speed limiter off
The speed limiter system will be turned off when
one of the following operations is performed:
•
Push the speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch
j3 . The speed limiter symbol j4 and the set
speed value j5 in the vehicle information display
will be turned off.
•
Push the cruise control main “ON/OFF” switch
j2 . The speed limiter information in the vehicle
information will be replaced with the cruise con-
trol information. For details see “Cruise control
(where fitted)” earlier in this section.
•
When the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is
turned to the off position.
Turning off the speed limiter will erase the set
speed limit memory.
Speed limiter malfunction
If the speed limiter malfunctions, the speed limiter
symbol
j4 in the vehicle information display will
flash.
Turn the speed limiter off by pushing the speed lim-
iter main “ON/OFF” switch
j3 and have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
The forward emergency braking system can assist
the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision
with the vehicle ahead in the travelling lane.
The forward emergency braking system uses a ra-
dar sensor
jA located at the front of the vehicle to
measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the
travelling lane.
WARNING
•
The forward emergency braking system is a
supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a re-
placement for the driver’s attention to traffic
conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It
cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness
or dangerous driving techniques.
•
The forward emergency braking system does
not function in all driving, traffic, weather and
road conditions.
NSD508
FORWARD EMERGENCY
BRAKING SYSTEM (where fitted)
5-40 Starting and driving
SYSTEM OPERATION
The forward emergency braking system will func-
tion when your vehicle is driven at speeds above
approximately 5 km/h (3 MPH).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the for-
ward emergency braking system will provide the
first warning to the driver by flashing the forward
collision warning light (orange) and providing an au-
dible warning.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully
after the warning, and the forward emergency brak-
ing system detects that there is still the possibility of
a forward collision, the system will automatically in-
crease the braking force.
If the driver does not take action, the forward emer-
gency braking system issues the second visual
warning (red) and audible warning. If the driver re-
leases the accelerator pedal, then the system ap-
plies partial braking
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the for-
ward emergency braking system applies harder
braking automatically.
NOTE
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking
is performed by the forward emergency braking
system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the
vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway con-
ditions, the system may help the driver avoid a for-
ward collision or may help mitigate the
consequences if a collision should one be unavoid-
able.
If the driver is handling the steering wheel, acceler-
ating or braking, the forward emergency braking
system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the follow-
ing conditions:
•
When the steering wheel is turned as far as nec-
essary to avoid a collision.
•
When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
•
When there is no longer a vehicle detected
ahead.
If the forward emergency braking system has
stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a
standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the
brakes are released.
WARNING
•
The radar sensor does not detect the follow-
ing objects:
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the
roadway
– Oncoming vehicles
– Crossing vehicles
•
The radar sensor has some performance limi-
tations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehi-
cle’s path, the forward emergency braking
system will not function when the vehicle is
driven at speeds over approximately 45 MPH
(70 km/h).
•
The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle
ahead in the following conditions:
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering
the radar sensor.
– Interference by other radar sources.
– Snow or road spray from travelling
vehicles.
– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g. motor-
cycle).
– When driving on a steep downhill slope or
roads with sharp curves.
– When towing a trailer.
•
In some road or traffic conditions, the forward
emergency braking system may unexpectedly
apply partial braking. When acceleration is
necessary, continue to depress the accelera-
tor pedal to override the system.
•
Braking distances increase on slippery sur-
faces.
•
Excessive noise will interfere with the warn-
ing chime sound, and the chime may not be
heard.
•
The system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s functionality, within cer-
tain limitations. The system may not detect
some forms of obstruction of the sensor area
Starting and driving 5-41
of the front bumper such as ice, snow, stick-
ers, for example. In these cases, the system
may not be able to warn the driver properly.
Be sure that you check, clean and clear the
sensor area of the front bumper regularly
Turning the forward emergency braking
system ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the forward
emergency braking system ON or OFF.
1. Using the
or switches and the ENTER but-
ton on the left side of the steering wheel, select
the Settings menu in the vehicle information dis-
play. (See “Settings” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section
2. Using the
or switches and the ENTER but-
ton, navigate to the [Driver Assistance] menu,
followed by the [Driving Aids] menu.
3. In the [Driving Aids] menu, highlight the [Emer-
gency Brake] item and use the ENTER button to
toggle between ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled).
When the forward emergency braking system is
turned off, the forward emergency braking system
warning light (orange) will illuminate.
System temporarily unavailable
Condition A:
When the radar picks up interference from another
radar source, making it impossible to detect a ve-
hicle ahead, the forward emergency braking system
is automatically turned off. The forward emergency
braking system warning light (orange) and the for-
ward collision warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the for-
ward emergency braking system will resume auto-
matically.
Condition B:
When the sensor area of the front bumper is cov-
ered with dirt or obstructed, making it impossible to
detect a vehicle ahead, the forward emergency brak-
ing system is automatically turned off. The forward
emergency braking system warning light (orange)
and the forward collision warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the “front radar obstruction” warning
message will appear in the vehicle information dis-
play.
Action to take:
If the warning light (orange) comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe location and turn the engine off.
Check to see if the sensor area of the front bumper
is blocked. If the sensor area of the front bumper is
blocked, remove the blocking material. Restart the
engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate,
have the forward emergency braking system
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
System malfunction
If the forward emergency braking system malfunc-
tions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, the forward emergency braking system
warning light (orange) and the forward collision
warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warn-
ing message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take:
If the warning light (orange) comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and
restart the engine. If the warning light continues to
illuminate, have the forward emergency braking sys-
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
JVS0299XZ
5-42 Starting and driving
WARNING
•
Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate-
rials, such as dry grass, waste paper, or rags.
They may ignite and cause a fire.
•
Safe parking procedures require that:
– The parking brake is applied.
– The shift lever is placed in an appropriate
gear for manual transmission models.
– The shift lever is placed in the P (Park)
position for XTRONIC transmission (CVT)
models.
Failure to follow the above recommenda-
tions could cause the vehicle to move un-
expectedly or roll away and result in an
accident.
•
Never leave the engine running while the ve-
hicle is unattended.
•
Do not leave children or adults who would
normally require the support of others alone
in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left
alone either. On hot, sunny days, tempera-
tures in a closed vehicle could quickly be-
come high enough to cause severe or possi-
bly fatal injuries to people or animals.
•
Manual transmission models:
Depress the clutch pedal and place the shift le-
ver in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on
an uphill gradient, place the shift lever in the 1st
(Low gear) position.
•
XTRONIC transmission models:
Fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position.
WARNING
Make sure that the shift lever has been pushed
as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved
without depressing the button on the shift lever
handle.
NSD338
LHD models
PARKING
Starting and driving 5-43
•
When parked on a sloping driveway, turn the
wheels so the vehicle will not roll into the street
in case it moves.
•
FACING DOWNHILL: j1
Turn the wheels into the kerb, allow the vehicle
to move forward until the kerb side wheel gently
touches the kerb. Then set the parking brake.
•
FACING UPHILL: j2
Turn the wheels away from the kerb and allow
the vehicle to move back until the kerb side wheel
gently touches the kerb. Then set the parking
brake.
•
NO KERB — FACING DOWNHILL OR UPHILL:
j3
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so
the vehicle will move away from the centre of the
road if it moves. Then set the parking brake.
•
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
and remove the key.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
and remove the key/Intelligent Key (where fit-
ted).
•
Always turn off ignition after parking a vehicle
with Stop/Start System fitted to avoid a possible
flat battery.
NOTE
The Stop/Start System is designed to prevent
unnecessary fuel consumption, exhaust emis-
sions and noise during a journey. The Stop/
Start System does not automatically turn off
ignition at the end of a journey.
NSD339
RHD models
5-44 Starting and driving
Ultrasonic sensors j1 and j2 , fitted in the vehicle’s
front and rear bumpers, measure the distances be-
tween the vehicle and an obstacle when reversing.
When reverse gear is engaged a top view of the
vehicle is shown in the vehicle information display.
On the display the distances (1 meter and less) to
objects are shown. If the object(s) get(s) closer to
the vehicle colours change from green over yellow
to red. If the text [STOP] is shown, stop the vehicle
before actually touching the object.
WARNING
If there is any doubt the surroundings in the path
of the parking area and/or the parking area itself
are not free from obstacles immediately stop the
vehicle and check.
NOTE
•
This system is intended as an aid to parking,
to be used in conjunction with your rear view
mirror.
•
Make sure that the ultrasonic sensors are not
obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
OPERATION
Switch the system on or off by pressing the parking
sensor system button
j2
If the [Display] key in the [Parking Aids] menu is
selected (marked by the green marker) and R (Re-
verse) is engaged, the parking sensor display is
shown automatically without first pressing the but-
ton.
NAA1423
NAA1424
NAA1420
NAA1421
ULTRASONIC PARKING
SENSORS (where fitted)
Starting and driving 5-45
Using the settings menu
The settings of the parking sensor system can be
changed.
At ignition on (the [Settings] menu is shown in the
display), select
[Driver Assistance] —> [Parking Aids]
or when the parking sensor screen is displayed,
press the <ENTER> switch
jB on the steering
wheel. Press the BACK switch
jA to return to the
previous item.
The settings menu is shown
Set the following items on or off by selecting (high-
lighted) and pressing the <ENTER>
jB switch on
the steering wheel. When selected a green marker
is shown.
– [Front sensor]:
Switch the front sensors on or off
– [Rear sensor]:
Switch the rear sensors on or off
– [Display]:
Switch the parking sensor system automatically
on or off when selecting R (Reverse) gear.
By highlighting the colour of the to be set item:
– Set the volume of the parking sensor system
Select [Volume] and press <ENTER>
•
High
•
Med.
•
Low
– Set the range sensitivity
Select [Range] and press <ENTER>
•
Far
•
Mid.
•
Near
WARNING
Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) is a guidance sys-
tem for parking procedures. It does not prevent
collisions with objects. Always look through the
windows and check to be sure that it is safe to
move.
The Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) system controls
steering, guiding the vehicle when parking:
– In a bay
– Parallel to the road
NOTE
The IPA system instructs you to stop, drive for-
wards or drive backwards. Follow the instructions
given by the system.
The IPA system is not able to support parking when
the vehicle speed during the parking manoeuvre is
more than 7 km/h (4 MPH).
CAUTION
Do not use the IPA system under the following
conditions:
•
On unpaved roads.
•
On snow-covered or frozen roads.
•
On uneven roads with slants, bumps, kerb-
stones, wheel tracks, etc.
•
At mechanical parking facilities.
•
When tyre chains or a spare tyre are installed.
NIC2204
INTELLIGENT PARKING ASSIST
(IPA) (where fitted)
5-46 Starting and driving
•
When the vehicle is being towed
•
When the doors (including the back door) are
not closed.
The following conditions may reduce the ability
of the system to detect other vehicles:
•
Severe weather.
•
Road spray.
•
Ice build up on the vehicle.
•
Frost on the vehicle.
•
Dirt on the vehicle.
Do not attach stickers (including transparent ma-
terial), install accessories or apply additional
paint near the sonar sensors. These conditions
may reduce the ability of the system to detect
other vehicles.
The sonar sensors detect stationary objects be-
hind the vehicle. The sonar sensors may not de-
tect:
•
Small or moving objects.
•
Wedge-shaped objects.
•
Objects close to the bumper.
•
Thin objects such as rope, wire, or chain.
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the IPA may not
be able to predict precise courses and function
properly. There may be instances where sur-
rounding objects and vehicles are displayed in-
side the clearance guidelines (red), or where the
vehicle cannot be parked in the correct spot fol-
lowing the IPA operation.
•
When the shift lever is operated while driving.
•
When sudden start, sudden stop or sudden
operation of the shift lever occurs.
•
When tyre pressure is too low or a tyre is worn
out.
•
When tyres are installed that are of a different
size from the tyres that were equipped at the
time of factory shipment.
•
When the vehicle is heavily laden.
DEACTIVATION OF THE IPA SYSTEM
The IPA will deactivate under the following condi-
tions:
•
When the steering wheel is operated manually.
•
When 5 seconds have passed since the shift
lever was placed and kept in the Neutral (N)
position.
•
When reversing operations are conducted more
than 10 times for steering corrections.
•
When the system judges that conditions (such
as worn out or low pressure tyres, road condi-
tions for example) are not suitable for correct
course predictions.
•
When the vehicle reverses to a position behind
the position where the IPA operation started.
•
When the vehicle passes the reverse starting
position by more than 2 m (6.5 ft).
•
When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately
7 km/h (4 MPH).
•
When the driver does not follow the IPA guid-
ance.
Starting and driving 5-47
PARKING PROCEDURE USING THE
IPA SYSTEM
Using the lines and rectangles displayed on the
screen and the voice guidance, the system provides
step-by-step instructions for parking.
The IPA button
is located in the lower centre
of the screen j1.
Parallel parking
1. Stop the vehicle in the road where you want to
find a parking place.
Press the <CAMERA> button to display the
Around View Monitor on the centre display.
Press the IPA button
j1.
NOTE
If necessary, press the
button j2to
switch to parallel parking.
2. The parallel parking mode is displayed.
On one side of the screen a scanning area is
indicated
jA.
The IPA system will show the [Use turn signal to
switch side] text in the other side of the screen.
NOTE
Use the turn signal switch to select the side of
the vehicle the IPA system should use to find
a parking space. The scanning area
jA will
switch sides, depending upon the position of
the turn signal switch.
Drive the vehicle forward at a steady pace along-
side the row of parked vehicles. The system will
search for a parking space. The IPA system will
NAA1483
RHD models
NAA1493
LHD models
NAA1482
Parallel parking procedure
NAA1483
NAA1484
5-48 Starting and driving
inform you when it finds a suitable parking space
between the parked vehicles. You will be told to
drive a short distance past the parking space,
and then stop.
3. Slowly move the vehicle forward to the correct
position until the IPA system instructs you to stop.
WARNING
If there is any doubt that the surroundings in
the path of the parking area and/or the park-
ing area itself are not free from obstacles im-
mediately stop the vehicle and check.
NOTE
Make sure the vehicle is stopped completely
before shifting the shift lever to the Reverse
(R) position.
4. Follow the instructions given by the system.
Place the shift lever in the Reverse (R) position.
Gently place your hands on the steering wheel
and slowly reverse towards the parking space.
The steering will be operated automatically.
Carefully and slowly accelerate while checking
the surroundings.
Do not turn the steering wheel.
The system indicates when the parking proce-
dure has ended.
NOTE
•
Only the steering operates automatically.
•
Follow the instructions given by the sys-
tem.
•
Carefully and slowly accelerate while
checking the surroundings.
•
Use of the steering wheel will cancel the
IPA operation.
5. When the vehicle is in the target parking posi-
tion, check, then depress the brake pedal to stop
the vehicle.
When the vehicle reaches the approximate area
of the target parking space, a chime will sound,
“[Park assist finished]” will appear on the centre
display and the IPA operation will automatically
terminate.
Make any final adjustments that may be neces-
sary manually, after confirming the vehicle’s sur-
roundings.
NOTE
The system can be cancelled at any time:
•
By placing the shift lever in the Park (P) posi-
tion for vehicles with XTRONIC transmission.
•
By placing the shift lever in the Neutral (N)
position for MT vehicles.
•
By overriding the steering manoeuvre.
•
By pressing the [Cancel] button on the centre
display.
NAA1485
NAA1486
NAA1487
Starting and driving 5-49
Parking in a bay
1. Stop the vehicle near to the space where you
wish to park.
2. Press the <CAMERA> button, followed by the
IPA button
.
NOTE
If the bird’s-eye view is not displayed on the
front passenger side of the screen, press the
<CAMERA> button until the bird’s-eye view is
displayed.
The IPA system will show the [Use turn signal to
switch side] text.
NOTE
Use the turn signal switch to select the side of
the vehicle where the parking bay is situated.
The scanning area
jA will switch sides, de-
pending upon the position of the turn signal
switch.
3. Press the
button j2 to switch to bay park-
ing.
4. The bay parking mode is displayed.
Stop vehicle alongside, and approximately 1 m
(3 ft) from the parking place.
On one side of the screen the rear camera view
is shown.
On the other side of the screen, the blue lines
indicate the target parking area
j1.
Touch the
button j2.
NAA1481
Bay parking procedure
NAA1483
NAA1488
NAA1489
NAA1465
5-50 Starting and driving
Adjust the target parking rectangle j1 (blue) us-
ing the arrow keys on the screen so that the
clearance guidelines do not overlap any
obstacles around the vehicle.
CAUTION
After pressing [Start] the vehicle will park within
the blue area. Make sure this area is free of ob-
stacles.
5. Press [Start].
The vehicle starts the parking procedure. The
IPA operation can be started when the following
conditions are met:
•
The vehicle is completely stopped.
•
The steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position.
•
The shift lever is in the Drive (D) or a forward
shift position.
NOTE
If the vehicle deviates from the parking rect-
angle while following the parking procedure,
stop and adjust the position.
WARNING
If there is any doubt that the surroundings in the
path of the parking area and/or the parking area
itself are not free from obstacles immediately
stop the vehicle and check.
6. Gently place hands on the steering wheel and
slowly move forward the vehicle to the correct
position indicated in green in preparation for re-
versing.
Bring the vehicle to a standstill
The steering wheel will operate itself towards the
reverse starting position rectangle (green).
Depress the brake and stop the vehicle when it
approaches another vehicle or object, or when
the vehicle reaches the reverse starting position.
7. Place the shift lever in the Reverse (R) position
Gently place hands on the steering wheel and
slowly back up to the parking space
Steering will be operated automatically.
NOTE
•
Only the steering operates automatically.
•
Follow the instructions given by the sys-
tem.
•
Carefully and slowly accelerate while
checking the surroundings.
•
Use of the steering wheel will cancel the
IPA operation.
8. When the vehicle is in the target parking posi-
tion, check, then depress the brake pedal to stop
the vehicle.
When the vehicle reaches the approximate area
of the target parking space, a chime will sound,
“[Park assist finished]” will appear on the centre
display and the IPA operation will automatically
terminate.
Make any final adjustments that may be neces-
sary manually, after confirming the vehicle’s sur-
roundings.
NAA1490
NAA1491
Starting and driving 5-51
NOTE
The system can be cancelled at any time:
•
By placing the shift lever in the Park (P)
position for vehicles with XTRONIC trans-
mission.
•
By placing the shift lever in the Neutral (N)
position for MT vehicles.
•
By overriding the steering manoeuvre.
•
By pressing the [Cancel] button on the
centre display.
OPERATING TIPS
•
The screen displayed on the Around View Moni-
tor will automatically return to the previous screen
three minutes after the <CAMERA> button has
been pushed while the shift lever is in a position
other than the Reverse (R) position.
•
When the view is switched, the display of im-
ages on the screen may be displayed with some
delay.
•
When the temperature is extremely high or low,
the screen may not display objects clearly. This
is not a malfunction.
•
When strong light directly shines on the camera,
objects may not be displayed clearly. This is not
a malfunction.
•
The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
This is not a malfunction.
•
The colour of objects on the Around View Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from the actual colour
of objects. This is not a malfunction.
•
Objects on the monitor may not be clear and the
colour of the object may differ in a dark environ-
ment. This is not a malfunction.
•
There may be differences in sharpness between
each camera view of the bird view.
•
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera,
the Around View Monitor may not display ob-
jects clearly. Clean the camera.
•
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean
the camera. This will cause discoloration. To
clean the camera, wipe with a cloth that has
been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.
•
Do not damage the camera because the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
•
Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any
wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened
with a mild detergent diluted with water.
•
An intermittent tone will be heard when the ve-
hicle is moving during the guidance, and the
chime will ring when the vehicle comes to the
target position in each step. Stop the vehicle
when the chime rings and follow the next guid-
ance.
•
Depending on the situation, multiple parking ma-
noeuvres may be required.
NAA1492
5-52 Starting and driving
How to read displayed guide lines
Starting position rectangle for reversing j1
(Green):
Indicates the starting position for reversing. The po-
sition and colour of the rectangle will be changed
according to the steering angle.
•
Green: Indicates the recommended position.
•
Yellow: Indicates that multiple parking manoeu-
vres will be required.
•
Red: Indicates that parking guidance is not avail-
able. Driver must park without guidance.
Target parking rectangle
j2 (Blue):
Indicates the target parking position.
Clearance guidelines
j3 (Red):
Indicate locations of the obstacles that set the ap-
proximate space required for parking.
Target course lines
j4 (Green):
Indicate the course needed to park the vehicle into
the target parking position.
Predictive course lines
j5 (Orange):
Indicate the predictive course when operating the
vehicle.
Predictive course lines move when the steering
wheel is rotated. Turn the steering wheel until the
predictive course lines overlap with the target course
lines.
IPA malfunction
A warning message will be displayed and the sys-
tem will terminate operation if a malfunction is de-
tected in the IPA.
If the warning message is displayed during the IPA
operation, park the vehicle in a safe place and re-
start the engine.
If the warning message is shown on the display
repeatedly or if the IPA cannot be operated after
restarting the engine, this may indicate a system
malfunction. It should not hinder normal driving, but
the vehicle should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop.
NAA1447
Starting and driving 5-53
Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily
to carry passengers and luggage.
Remember that towing a trailer will place additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive-train, steering,
braking and other systems. Towing a trailer will also
exaggerate other conditions, such as sway caused
by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing
trucks. Driving style and speed must be adjusted
according to the circumstances. Before towing a
trailer, see a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
for an explanation of towing equipment and its
proper use.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
•
Avoid towing a trailer during the running-in
schedule.
•
Choose proper coupling devices (trailer hitch,
safety chain, roof carrier, etc.) for your vehicle
and trailer. These devices are available from a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop where you
can also obtain more detailed information about
trailer towing.
Heavy-duty kits are available at a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop.
•
It is advisable to contact a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop for towing details, before
towing a trailer up steep slopes for long dis-
tances.
•
Never allow the total trailer load (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) to exceed the maximum
set for the coupling device.
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
for more information on this matter.
•
The trailer must be loaded so that heavy goods
are distributed over the axle and as low in the
trailer as possible. Poor load distribution can se-
riously affect the stability of the trailer and tow
vehicle.
•
Do not exceed the maximum permitted vertical
load on the trailer hitch.
•
Before driving, make sure that the lighting sys-
tem of the trailer works properly.
•
When towing with 4WD models, the 4WD mode
switch should be in the AUTO position. Using
the vehicle in AUTO mode gives better traction,
particularly when moving off from stationary and/
or on an incline, as the vehicle is less likely to
wheel spin.
•
Avoid abrupt starts, accelerations and stops.
•
Avoid sharp turns and lane changes.
•
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
•
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Apply the handbrake (where
fitted) on the trailer. Parking on a steep slope is
not recommended.
If parking on a steep slope is unavoidable it is
also advisable to put the vehicle into gear, or
select P (Park (XTRONIC models)), and turn the
front wheels into the kerb (in addition to the other
precautions described). Before parking on a
steep slope consider the incline (the towing
weights quoted are for a 12% slope).
•
Follow the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
•
Have your vehicle serviced more often than at
the intervals specified in the separately provided
Warranty Information and Maintenance booklet.
•
Trailer towing requires more fuel than under nor-
mal circumstances because of a considerable
increase in traction power required and resis-
tance.
•
When towing a trailer, observe the following re-
stricted towing speed:
Speed: below 100 km/h (62 MPH)
•
Observe the legal maximum speeds for trailer
operation.
CAUTION
While towing a trailer, check the engine coolant
temperature gauge regularly to prevent engine
overheating.
NSD239Z
TRAILER TOWING
5-54 Starting and driving
jA
Tongue load
jB
Total trailer load
jC
Less than 10%
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS (for Australia)
Maximum trailer loads (including tyres and other
loaded equipment):
1) Never allow the total trailer load to exceed:
Engine –
Transmission
Axle Towing capacity
R9M – CVT 2WD
750 kg Trailer without brakes
1400 kg Trailer with brakes
MR20DD – 6MT 2WD
716 kg Trailer without brakes
1400 kg Trailer with brakes
MR20DD – CVT 2WD
727 kg Trailer without brakes
1200 kg Trailer with brakes
2) The total trailer load must be lower than the fol-
lowing three values, even if it does not exceed
the maximum permissible trailer load:
•
Towing capacity displayed on a tow-bar.
•
Trailer’s gross vehicle mass marked on a
coupling body.
•
Gross vehicle mass marked on a trailer data
plate.
The maximum trailer load that can be towed by your
vehicle depends on the towing equipment fitted to
the vehicle. Therefore, it is important to not only
have the correct equipment fitted, but also to use it
correctly. Towing loads greater than the value speci-
fied for your vehicle or using towing equipment that
is not provided by NISSAN could seriously affect
the handling and/or performance of your vehicle.
Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing pro-
cedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties. In-
formation on trailer towing and the required equip-
ment should be obtained from a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop.
Maximum rear gross axle weight
The rear gross axle weight must not exceed the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Engine – Transmission Axle GAWR
R9M – CVT 2WD 1015 kg
MR20DD – 6MT 2WD 985 kg
MR20DD – CVT 2WD 1000 kg
The trailer must be loaded so that heavy goods are
placed over the axle.
Maximum tongue load
Never allow the tongue load to exceed 10% of the
total trailer load. If the tongue load exceeds 10%,
rearrange the cargo in the trailer.
TYRE PRESSURE
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tyres to the
maximum recommended COLD tyre pressure, as
indicated on the tyre placard (for full loading). Make
sure the trailer tyre pressures are correct.
CAUTION
Do not tow a trailer when the vehicle is installed
with a temporary-use spare tyre.
SAFETY CHAINS
Always use a suitable chain between the vehicle
and trailer. The chain should be attached to the hitch
and not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to
leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning
corners. The chain should not drag on the ground:
passing the chain across the trailer hitch may be the
best practice depending on your trailer.
TRAILER BRAKES
Ensure that trailer brakes are installed as required
by local regulations. Also check that all other trailer
equipment conforms to local regulations.
CA0050Z
Starting and driving 5-55
TRAILER DETECTION (where fitted)
When towing a trailer and the turn signal switch is
used, the electrical system of the vehicle will detect
an additional electrical load of the trailer lighting. As
a result, the trailer direction indicator light comes
on.
INSTALLATION OF COUPLING
DEVICE (except for Australia)
NISSAN recommends that the coupling device for
trailer towing be installed under the following condi-
tions:
•
Maximum permissible vertical load on the cou-
pling device: 981 N (100 kg, 221 lb)
•
The coupling device, mounting points and instal-
lation parts on your vehicle: as shown as an ex-
ample in the illustration.
Follow all of the coupling device manufacturer’s in-
structions for installation and use.
Rear overhang of coupling device:
jA 914 mm (36 in)
jI Fixed towbar
jII Detachable towbar
NSD478
5-56 Starting and driving
When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:
•
Always remove the ignition key and take it with
you – even in your own garage.
•
Always remove the ignition key or Intelligent Key
(where fitted) and take it with you – even in your
own garage.
•
Close all windows completely and lock all doors.
•
Always park your vehicle where it can be seen.
At night, park in a well lit area.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with an alarm or immo-
bilization device, use it – even for short periods.
•
Do not leave children and pets in the vehicle
unattended.
•
Do not leave valuables on view to tempt a thief.
Always take your valuables with you. If you must
leave something in your vehicle, lock it in the lug-
gage compartment or hide it out of sight.
•
Do not leave the vehicle documents in your ve-
hicle. In the unfortunate event of your vehicle
being stolen, the documents will only help a thief
to sell the vehicle.
•
Do not leave articles on a roof rack as they are
particularly vulnerable. If possible, remove them
from the rack and lock them inside the vehicle.
•
Do not leave the spare key in the vehicle – keep
it in a safe place at home.
•
Do not leave the spare key or Intelligent Key in
the vehicle – keep it in a safe place at home.
•
Do not leave a note of your vehicle’s key number
in the vehicle. A thief may break into the vehicle,
note the key number and return with a new key
and drive the vehicle.
WARNING
•
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assistance for the
steering will not work. The steering will be
harder to operate.
•
When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, the power
assistance for the steering will cease opera-
tion. You will still have control of the vehicle
but the steering will be harder to operate.
The electric power steering system is designed to
provide power assistance while driving to allow you
to operate the steering wheel with light force.
The steering effort can be set to [Normal] or [Sport]
in the vehicle information display under the heading
[Driver assistance]. (See “[Driver assistance]” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.)
NOTE
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly
or continuously while parking or driving at a very
low speed, the power assistance for the steering
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-
heating of the electric power steering system and
protect it from becoming damaged. While the
power assistance is reduced, steering wheel op-
eration will become heavy. When the tempera-
ture of the electric power steering system de-
creases, the power assistance level will return to
normal. Avoid r epeating such steering wheel op-
erations that could cause the electric power
steering system to overheat.
VEHICLE SECURITY ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
SYSTEM
Starting and driving 5-57
You may hear a sound when the steering wheel
is operated quickly. However, this is not a mal-
function.
If the electric power steering warning light
illu-
minates while the engine is running, it may indicate
the electric power steering system is not functioning
properly and may need servicing. Have the electric
power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop. (See “ Power steering warn-
ing light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
tion.)
When the electric power steering warning light illu-
minates with the engine running, the power assis-
tance for the steering will cease operation. You will
still have control of the vehicle. However, greater
steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns
and at low speeds.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic cir-
cuits. If one circuit malfunctions, two wheels will still
have braking ability.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brake
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum or vacuum from an engine-driven pump. If
the engine stops or the drive belt is broken, you can
stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal.
However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal
will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping
distance will be longer.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through wa-
ter, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your brak-
ing distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull
to one side during braking.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the
brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal.
Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the
brakes function correctly.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake linings and pads faster and reduce fuel
economy performance.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes
from overheating, reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before going down a slope or long downhill
gradient. Overheated brakes may reduce braking
performance and could result in loss of vehicle con-
trol.
CAUTION
While driving on a slippery surface, be careful
when braking, accelerating or downshifting.
Abrupt braking actions or sudden acceleration
could cause the wheels to skid and result in an
accident.
Be aware that brakes will fade if repeated heavy
brake applications are made.
Driving uphill
When starting on a steep gradient, it is sometimes
difficult to operate the brake or both the brake and
clutch (MT models). Use the parking brake to hold
the vehicle. Do not slip the clutch (MT models).
When ready to start, make sure that the shift lever is
in an appropriate forward or reverse driving posi-
tion, slowly release the parking brake while depress-
ing the accelerator pedal and releasing the clutch
(MT models) or depressing the accelerator pedal
(XTRONIC transmission models). If your vehicle has
an electric parking brake, this will automatically re-
lease when you depress the accelerator pedal and
release the clutch (MT models) or depress the ac-
celerator pedal (XTRONIC transmission models).
BRAKE SYSTEM
5-58 Starting and driving
Driving downhill
The engine braking action is effective for controlling
the vehicle while descending hills.
The shift lever (MT models) should be placed in a
gear position low enough to obtain sufficient engine
braking.
For XTRONIC transmission models, a low gear po-
sition in the manual shift mode, low enough to obtain
sufficient engine braking, should be selected.
WARNING
•
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a so-
phisticated device, but it cannot prevent acci-
dents resulting from careless or dangerous
driving techniques. It can help maintain ve-
hicle control during braking on slippery sur-
faces. Remember that stopping distances on
slippery surfaces will be longer than on nor-
mal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough, gravel or
snow covered roads, or if you are using snow
chains. Always maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the
driver is responsible for safety.
•
Tyre type and condition may also affect brak-
ing effectiveness.
– When replacing tyres, install the specified
size of tyres on all four wheels.
– When installing a spare tyre, make sure
that it is the proper size and type as speci-
fied on the tyre placard. (See “Vehicle
identification” in the “9. Technical
information” section.)
– For detailed information, see “Wheels and
tyres” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard brak-
ing or when braking on slippery surfaces. The sys-
tem detects the rotation speed at each wheel and
varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel
from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel
from locking, the system helps the driver maintain
steering control and helps to minimise swerving and
spinning on slippery surfaces.
USING SYSTEM
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress
the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do
not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to pre-
vent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to
avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may re-
sult in increased stopping distances.
SELF-TEST FEATURE
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests
the system each time you start the engine and move
the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse.
When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk”
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This
is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the
computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS
off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-
test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
Starting and driving 5-59
NORMAL OPERATION
The ABS operates at speeds above 5 to 10 km/h (3
to 6 MPH). The speed varies according to road con-
ditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and
releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to
pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from
under the bonnet or feel a vibration from the actua-
tor when it is operating. This is normal and indicates
that the ABS is operating properly. However, the
pulsation may indicate that road conditions are haz-
ardous and extra care is required while driving.
When accelerating, driving on slippery surfaces or
suddenly avoiding obstacles on roads, the vehicle
might swerve or slip. The Electronic Stability Pro-
gramme (ESP) system continuously monitors and
compares the driver’s intended speed and the travel
direction. The system adjusts wheel brake pressure
and engine torque to assist in improving vehicle sta-
bility.
•
When the ESP system is operating, the “SLIP”
indicator light ( ) in the combination meter
blinks.
•
When only the traction control (TCS) system in
the ESP system is operating, the “SLIP” indica-
tor light (
) in the combination meter will also
blink.
•
If the “SLIP” indicator light ( ) blinks, the road
conditions are slippery. Be sure to drive care-
fully. See “Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
•
Indicator light
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the “SLIP”
indicator light (
) will come on in the combina-
tion meter.
As long as these indicator lights are on, the trac-
tion control function is cancelled.
The ESP system uses Active Brake Limited Slip
(ABLS) system to improve vehicle traction. The Ac-
tive Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system works when
one of the driving wheels is spinning on a slippery
surface. The Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) sys-
tem, brakes the spinning wheel to distribute the driv-
ing power to the other driving wheel.
If the vehicle is operated with the ESP system turned
off, all ESP and TCS functions will be turned off.
The Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system and
ABS will still operate with the ESP system off. If the
Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system is acti-
vated, the “SLIP” indicator light (
) will blink and
you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indi-
cate a malfunction.
While the ESP system is operating, you may feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or
vibration from under the bonnet. This is normal and
indicates that the ESP system is working properly.
The ESP computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time the engine is started
and the vehicle moves forwards or reverses at a
slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may
hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the
brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication
of a malfunction.
WARNING
•
The ESP system is designed to help improve
driving stability but does not prevent accidents
caused by abrupt steering operation at high
speeds, or careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be es-
pecially careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces. Always drive carefully.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAMME (ESP) SYSTEM (where fitted)
5-60 Starting and driving
•
If engine related parts, such as a muffler, are
not standard equipment or are extremely de-
teriorated, the “SLIP” indicator light (
) may
illuminate.
•
If brake related parts, such as brake pads,
rotors and callipers, are not standard equip-
ment or are extremely deteriorated, the ESP
system may not operate properly and the
“SLIP” indicator light (
) may illuminate.
•
Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If
suspension parts, such as shock absorbers,
struts, springs, stabiliser bars and bushings,
are not NISSAN-approved or are extremely
deteriorated, the ESP system may not oper-
ate properly. This could adversely affect ve-
hicle handling performance and the “SLIP” in-
dicator light (
) may illuminate.
•
When driving on extremely inclined surfaces,
such as higher banked corners, the ESP sys-
tem may not operate properly and the “SLIP”
indicator light (
) may illuminate. Do not
drive on these types of roads. If ESP OFF indi-
cator light
does illuminate after driving
on extreme surfaces, restart the engine to re-
set the ESP system.
•
If wheels or tyres other than the
recommended ones are used, the ESP sys-
tem may not operate properly and the “SLIP”
indicator light (
) may illuminate.
•
The ESP system is not a substitute for winter
tyres or snow chains on a snow covered road.
NOTE
•
The ESP system should be switched on under
normal circumstances although it may be ad-
vantageous to switch off the ESP system to
allow wheelspin under the following condi-
tions:
– When driving in deep snow or mud.
– When trying to rock a vehicle free that is
stuck in snow.
– When driving with snow chains.
•
If the ESP system has been switched off, drive
carefully with reduced speed. When road con-
ditions allow, ESP should be switched back
on.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY
PROGRAMME (ESP) OFF SWITCH
The vehicle should be driven with the Electronic
Stability Programme (ESP) system “ON” for most
driving conditions.
NSD487
Left hand drive (LHD)
NSD488
Right hand drive (RHD)
Starting and driving 5-61
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the ESP sys-
tem reduces the engine output to decrease wheel
spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the
accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum
engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn
the ESP system off.
To turn off the ESP system, push the ESP OFF
switch. The ESP OFF indicator light (
) will
come on.
NOTE
The ESP system cannot be switched off when
the ESP system is operating and the “SLIP” indi-
cator light (
) is blinking.
Push the ESP OFF switch again, or restart the en-
gine, to turn the system ON. See “Electronic Stabil-
ity Programme (ESP) system (where fitted)” earlier
in this section for operational details.
The chassis control is an electric control module
that includes the following functions:
•
Active Trace Control
•
Active Engine Brake
•
Active Ride Control
ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL
WARNING
The active trace control may not be effective de-
pending on the driving condition. Always drive
carefully and attentively.
This system senses driving based on the driver’s
steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and con-
trols brake pressure at individual wheels to aid trac-
ing at corners and help smooth vehicle response.
The Active trace control system is switched ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled) through the Vehicle In-
formation Display. See “[Driver assistance]” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section for more infor-
mation.
When the Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)
OFF switch is used to turn off the ESP system, the
active trace control is also turned off.
CHASSIS CONTROL
5-62 Starting and driving
When the active trace control is operated and the
“Chassis Control” mode is selected in the trip com-
puter, the active trace control graphics are shown in
the vehicle information display see “Trip computer”
in the “2. Instruments and controls” section for more
information.
If the chassis control warning message appears in
the vehicle information display, it may indicate that
the active trace control is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop as soon as possible (see also
“28. [Chassis control system fault] warning” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section).
When the active trace control is operating, you may
feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise,
this is normal and indicates that the active trace con-
trol is operating properly.
Even if the active trace control is set to OFF, some
functions will remain on to assist the driver (for ex-
ample, avoidance scenes).
ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE (for
XTRONIC (CVT) models only)
WARNING
The active engine brake may not be effective de-
pending on the driving condition. Always drive
carefully and attentively.
The Active Engine Brake function adds subtle de-
celeration by controlling gear ratio, depending on
the cornering condition calculated from driver’s
steering input and plural sensors. This benefits
easier traceability and less workload of adjusting
speed with braking at corners.
The Active Engine Brake also adds subtle decelera-
tion with gear ratio control according to driver’s
brake pedal operation.
The Active Engine Brake can be set to ON (en-
abled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle infor-
mation display see “28. [Chassis control system
fault] warning” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
When the active engine brake is operated at cor-
ners and the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in
the trip computer, the active engine brake graphics
are shown in the vehicle information display see
“Trip computer” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section for more information.
If the chassis control warning message appears in
the vehicle information display, it may indicate that
the active engine brake is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
When the active engine brake is operating, the
needle of the tachometer will rise up and you may
hear an engine noise. This is normal and indicates
that the active engine brake is operating properly.
NSD526
Chassis control
Starting and driving 5-63
ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL
This system senses upper body motion based on
wheel speed information and controls engine torque
(MR20DD engines only) and four wheel brake pres-
sure to enhance ride comfort in an effort to restrain
uncomfortable upper body movement. This system
come into effect above 40 km/h (25 MPH).
When the ESP OFF switch is used to turn off the
ESP system, the active ride control is also turned
off.
When the brake control of active ride control is op-
erated and the “Chassis Control” mode is selected
in the trip computer, the active ride control graphics
are shown in the vehicle information display see
“28. [Chassis control system fault] warning” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section for more infor-
mation.
If the chassis control warning message appears in
the vehicle information display, it may indicate that
the active ride control is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
When the active ride control is operating, you may
hear noise and sense slight deceleration. This is
normal and indicates that the active ride control is
operating properly.
WARNING
•
Never rely solely on the hill start assist system
to prevent the vehicle from moving backward
on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively.
Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is
stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful
when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy
roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing backwards may result in a loss of control
of the vehicle and possible serious injury or
death.
•
The hill start assist system is not designed to
hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. De-
press the brake pedal when the vehicle is
stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may
result in a collision or serious personal injury.
•
The hill start assist system may not prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill
under all load or road conditions. Always be
prepared to depress the brake pedal to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Fail-
ure to do so may result in a collision or seri-
ous personal injury.
The hill start assist system automatically keeps the
brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing backwards in the time it takes the driver to re-
lease the brake pedal and apply the accelerator
when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.
NSD527
Chassis control
HILL START ASSIST (HSA)
SYSTEM
5-64 Starting and driving
The hill start assist system will operate automatically
under the following conditions:
•
The shift lever is shifted into a forward (vehicle
facing uphill) or reverse gear (vehicle facing
downhill).
•
The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by
applying the foot brake.
•
The slope is greater than 3 degrees.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2
seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the
hill start assist system will stop operating completely.
If the slope is steep enough to activate the HSA sys-
tem, the green HSA indicator light in the combina-
tion meter will illuminate.
If the chassis control screen is selected, the vehicle
is displayed on a slope. The wheels flash to show
that the car is being held.
The hill start assist system will not operate when the
shift lever is shifted to the N (Neutral) or P (Park)
position or on a flat and level road.
When the Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)
warning light illuminates in the meter, the hill start
assist system will not operate. (See “Electronic Sta-
bility Programme (ESP) OFF indicator light (where
fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
The ECO mode system helps to enhance fuel
economy by turning on ECO functions within the
ECO Meter and modifying engine characteristics to
avoid rapid acceleration.
To turn on the ECO mode system, push the ECO
mode switch. The ECO mode system indicator light
will illuminate on the vehicle information display.
To turn off the ECO mode system, push the ECO
mode switch again. The ECO mode system indica-
tor will turn off.
•
If the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the
engine characteristics will temporarily return to
normal to give maximum available acceleration.
•
The ECO mode system will turn off automatically
if a malfunction occurs in the system.
NSD524
NSD475
ECO mode switch
ECO MODE SYSTEM (where fitted)
Starting and driving 5-65
•
Turn off the ECO mode system when accelera-
tion is required, such as when:
– driving with a heavy load of passengers or
cargo in the vehicle
– driving on a steep uphill slope
WARNING
•
Whatever the conditions, drive with caution.
Accelerate and decelerate with great care. If
accelerating or decelerating too fast, the drive
wheels will lose even more traction.
•
Allow more stopping distance in cold weather
driving. Braking should be started sooner than
on dry surfaces.
•
Keep at a greater distance from the vehicle in
front of you on slippery roads.
•
Wet ice (0°C, 32°F and freezing rain), very cold
snow and ice can be slick and very difficult to
drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less trac-
tion or grip under these conditions. Try to
avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted
or sanded.
•
Watch for slippery spots (black ice). These
may appear on an otherwise clear road in
shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead,
brake before driving on it. Try not to brake
while actually on the ice and avoid any sud-
den steering manoeuvres.
•
Do not use cruise control (where fitted) on
slippery roads.
•
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gas under
your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around your vehicle.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze
and damage the battery. To maintain maximum effi-
ciency, the battery should be checked regularly. For
details, see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.
ENGINE COOLANT
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze,
drain the cooling system. Refill before operating the
vehicle. For details, see “Engine cooling system” in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
TYRE EQUIPMENT
1) The SUMMER tyres are of a tread design to pro-
vide superior performance on dry surfaces. How-
ever, the performance of these tyres will be sub-
stantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,
NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW
or ALL SEASON tyres on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
for tyre type, size, speed rating and availability
information.
2) For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tyres may be used. However, some countries,
provinces and states prohibit their use. Check
applicable laws before installing studded tyres.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
5-66 Starting and driving
CAUTION
Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow
tyres on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tyres.
3) Snow chains may be used, if desired. But the
use of snow chains may be prohibited in some
areas. Therefore, check the local laws before
installing snow chains. When installing snow
chains, make sure they are of proper size for the
tyres on your vehicle and are installed according
to the snow chain manufacturer’s instructions.
Use chain tensioners when recommended by the
snow chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.
Loose end links of the snow chain must be se-
cured or removed to prevent the possibility of
whipping action damage to the wings or under-
carriage. In addition, drive at a reduced speed,
otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or
vehicle handling and performance may be ad-
versely affected.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended to carry the following items in the
vehicle during winter:
•
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice
and snow from the windows.
•
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack
to give it firm support.
•
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
•
Extra windscreen washer fluid to refill the reser-
voir tank.
CORROSION PROTECTION
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are ex-
tremely corrosive and will accelerate corrosion and
the deterioration of underbody components such as
the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan, and wings.
In the winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically. For additional information, see “Cor-
rosion protection” in the “7. Appearance and
care” section.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion,
which may be required in some areas, consult a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Starting and driving 5-67
NOTE
5-68 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergencyIn case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ................................. 6-2
Spare tyre................................................................ 6-2
Temporary-use spare tyre (where fitted).............. 6-2
Conventional spare tyre (where fitted)................. 6-2
Flat tyre ................................................................... 6-3
Stopping the vehicle ........................................... 6-3
Changing flat tyre (Models with spare wheel,
where fitted) ....................................................... 6-3
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(where fitted) ...................................................... 6-7
Repairing flat tyre (Models with emergency
tyre puncture repair kit)....................................... 6-8
Jump-starting ........................................................... 6-11
Push-starting ........................................................... 6-13
Engine overheat....................................................... 6-13
Tow truck towing ..................................................... 6-14
Towing precautions ............................................ 6-14
Recommended towing for two-wheel drive
(2WD) models .................................................... 6-15
Recommended towing for four-wheel drive
(4WD) models .................................................... 6-15
Towing eye......................................................... 6-16
Freeing the vehicle from sand, snow or mud ....... 6-16
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you
must stop or park under emergency conditions. All
direction indicator lights will flash.
TEMPORARY-USE SPARE TYRE
(where fitted)
The temporary-use spare tyre is designed for emer-
gency use only. This spare tyre should be used
ONLY for very short periods and NEVER be used
for long drives or extended periods.
Observe the following precautions if the temporary-
use spare tyre must be used, otherwise your vehicle
could be damaged or involved in an accident.
WARNING
Any continuous road use of this tyre could result
in tyre failure, loss of vehicle control, and pos-
sible personal injury.
CAUTION
•
The temporary-use spare tyre should be used
only in emergencies. It should be replaced by
the standard tyre at the first opportunity.
•
Drive carefully and do not drive your vehicle
faster than 80 km/h (50 MPH).
•
Avoid driving over obstacles. Also, do not take
the vehicle through an automatic car wash.
•
Avoid driving sharp turns and abrupt braking.
•
Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load
rating or the load-carrying capacity molded
on the sidewall of the temporary-use spare
tyre.
•
Do not use a snow chain on this tyre because
it will not fit properly. This could cause dam-
age to the vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
•
Do not use the temporary-use spare tyre on
any other vehicle because this tyre has been
designed specifically for your vehicle.
•
The vehicle must not be driven with more than
one temporary-use spare tyre at the same
time.
•
Do not tow a trailer.
•
As with all tyres, the temporary-use spare tyre
must be checked regularly to ensure pres-
sure is maintained.
For pressure details, see the tyre placard lo-
cated on the driver’s side centre pillar.
CONVENTIONAL SPARE TYRE
(where fitted)
A standard wheel and tyre is supplied with your
vehicle.
NIC2215
NCE069Z
Temporary-use spare tyre label
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
SPARE TYRE
6-2 In case of emergency
In case of a flat tyre, follow the instructions as de-
scribed below:
STOPPING THE VEHICLE
WARNING
•
Make sure that the parking brake is securely
applied.
•
For Manual Transmission (MT) models: Make
sure the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
For XTRONIC models: Make sure that the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
•
Never change tyres when the vehicle is on a
slope, ice or a slippery area. This is hazard-
ous.
•
Never change tyres if oncoming traffic is close
to your vehicle. Wait for professional road as-
sistance.
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road, away from
traffic.
2. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the shift lever (MT models) into the R (Re-
verse) position [XTRONIC models, move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position].
6. Turn off the engine.
7. Open the bonnet (for details, see “Bonnet
release” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section) in order to:
•
Warn other traffic.
•
Signal to professional road assistance that
you require assistance.
8. Have all passengers exit the vehicle and stand in
a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the
vehicle.
CHANGING FLAT TYRE (Models with
spare wheel, where fitted)
Blocking the wheels
WARNING
Make sure to block the appropriate wheel to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving, which may cause
personal injury.
Place suitable blocks
j1 in front of and behind the
wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre
jA to prevent
the vehicle from moving when it is on the jack.
Getting the tools and spare wheel
The spare wheel, jack and tools are located inside
the luggage compartment.
1. Open the back door.
2. Remove the luggage boards and luggage com-
partment floor cover.
3. Remove the retainer by turning it anticlockwise.
4. Remove the jack, tools and spare wheel.
MCE0001DZ
NCE395
FLAT TYRE
In case of emergency 6-3
Removing wheel cover (where fitted)
WARNING
Take care when removing the wheel cover as the
cover may detach suddenly.
Remove the wheel cover as illustrated with a suit-
able tool or carefully remove the wheel cover with
both hands.
Removing the wheel
WARNING
•
Make sure to read the caution label attached
to the jack body before use.
•
DO NOT GET UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS
SUPPORTED BY A JACK.
•
Never use a jack which was not provided with
your vehicle.
•
The jack, which is provided with your vehicle
is designed only to lift your vehicle during a
tyre change.
•
Use the correct jacking points. Never use any
other part of the vehicle for jack support.
•
Never lift the vehicle more than necessary.
•
Never use blocks on or under the jack.
•
Do not start or run the engine while the ve-
hicle is on the jack. The vehicle may move
suddenly, and this may cause an accident.
•
Never allow passengers to stay in the vehicle
while the tyre is off the ground.
•
Make sure to read the caution label attached
to the jack body before use.
•
Remove all loads before lifting the vehicle with
the jack.
1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as
illustrated so that the top of the jack contacts the
vehicle at the jack-up point.
CAUTION
The jack should be placed on firm level
ground.
2. Align the centre of both the jack head and the
notches at the jack-up point as shown.
3. Fit the groove of the jack head between the two
notches as shown.
Alloy wheels (where fitted): Alloy wheel bolts have
a chrome finish plastic cap that can be removed
using tweezers (where fitted) from the tool kit.
SCE0173AZ
NCE256Z
Jack-up points
NCE411
6-4 In case of emergency
4. Loosen each wheel bolt by one or two turns
anticlockwise with the wheel wrench.
Do not remove the wheel bolts until the tyre is
off the ground.
Models with wheel lock bolts (where fitted):
If the wheel is equipped with a wheel lock bolt,
insert the wheel lock key
j1 and loosen it as pre-
viously described.
The wheel lock bolt can only be removed with the
wheel lock key. A key number is necessary if you
need to duplicate the wheel lock key.
Record the key number as shown on the key
code card on the “Security information” page at
the end of this manual and keep it in a safe place,
not in the vehicle. If you loose the wheel lock key,
see your NISSAN dealer for a duplicate with the
original wheel lock key code.
Make sure to keep the lock key in the vehicle.
Otherwise, wheels cannot be removed and the
service cannot be performed.
5. To lift the vehicle, securely hold and turn the
handle clockwise as shown.
6. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tyre clears the
ground.
7. Remove the wheel bolts, then remove the wheel
with the flat tyre.
CAUTION
The wheel is heavy. Be sure that your feet are
clear of the wheel and use gloves as necessary
to avoid injury.
Installing the wheel
WARNING
•
The temporary use spare tyre (where fitted) is
designed for emergency use. See “Spare tyre”
earlier in this section.
•
Never use wheel bolts other than those pro-
vided with your vehicle. Incorrect wheel bolts
or improperly tightened wheel bolts may
cause the wheel to become loose or come
off. This could cause an accident.
•
Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts.
This may cause the wheel bolts to become
loose.
jA
Tighten
jB
Loosen
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between
the wheel and the hub.
2. Carefully fit the wheel and tighten the wheel bolts
with your fingers. Check that all the wheel bolts
contact the wheel surface horizontally and on the
bevelled side.
Models with wheel lock bolt (where fitted):
Insert the wheel lock key into the wheel lock bolt
and tighten into the wheel finger tight.
NCE143Z
NCE309
NCE198Z
In case of emergency 6-5
3. With the wheel wrench, tighten the wheel bolts
alternately and evenly in the sequence as illus-
trated (
j1-j5 ) until they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tyre touches
the ground.
5. Tighten the wheel bolts securely using the wheel
wrench in the sequence as illustrated.
6. Lower the vehicle completely.
7. Install the wheel cover (where fitted).
NOTE
Before installation, align NISSAN logo (centre
cap) with the wheel bolts/or perpendicular to
valve hole (where fitted), to correctly align to
the centre.
Wheel bolt tightening torque:
113 N•m (12 kg-m, 83 ft-lb)
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel bolts to
the specified torque with a torque wrench.
WARNING
Retighten the wheel bolts after the vehicle has
been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (also in
cases of a flat tyre, etc.).
The wheel bolts must be kept tightened to specifi-
cation at all times. It is recommended that the wheel
bolts be tightened to specification at each mainte-
nance interval.
Adjust the tyre pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure is the tyre pressure as measured
after the vehicle has been parked for three hours or
more or driven for less than 1.6 km (1 mile).
COLD tyre pressures are shown on the tyre placard
affixed to the driver’s side centre pillar.
Stowing the wheel and tools
Securely store the wheel with the flat tyre, the jack
and the tools in the specified storage areas.
Wheel lock bolts (where fitted)
In order to prevent theft, the specially designed
wheel lock bolt is installed to each wheel. The wheel
lock bolt cannot be removed with the commonly
used tools.
When removing tyres, use the lock key provided
with your vehicle.
Removing the wheel lock bolt:
1. Insert the wheel lock key
j1 to the wheel lock
bolt.
2. To remove the wheel lock bolt, turn the wheel
lock key anticlockwise using the wheel wrench.
CAUTION
•
Do not use a power tool to remove the wheel
lock bolts.
•
When installing the wheel, tighten the wheel
lock bolts to the same tightening torque as
the normal wheel bolts. For details, see “In-
stalling the wheel” earlier in this section.
NOTE
•
The wheel lock bolt has an individual code.
A wheel lock key with other than the indi-
vidual code cannot remove the wheel lock
bolt. If you lose the wheel lock key, con-
tact a NISSAN dealer for a duplicate with
the original wheel lock key code.
•
Record the key number as shown on the
key code card on the “Security informa-
tion” page at the end of this manual and
keep it in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
•
When you ask for a service at a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop, make sure
to keep the lock key in the vehicle. Other-
wise, wheels cannot be removed and the
service cannot be performed.
NCE143Z
6-6 In case of emergency
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (where fitted)
j
A
Tyre valve with sensor
WARNING
•
If the TPMS indicator light illuminates while
driving:
– avoid sudden steering manoeuvres
– avoid abrupt braking
– reduce vehicle speed
– pull off the road to a safe location
– stop the vehicle as soon as possible
•
Driving with under-inflated tyres may perma-
nently damage the tyres and increase the like-
lihood of tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur which may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal injury.
•
Check the tyre pressure for all four tyres. Ad-
just the tyre pressure to the recommended
COLD tyre pressure shown on the tyre plac-
ard to turn the TPMS indicator light “OFF”. In
case of a flat tyre, replace it with a spare tyre
as soon as possible.
•
When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function and the
TPMS indicator light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Be sure to follow all instructions for
wheel replacement and make sure the TPMS
system is mounted correctly.
•
Replacing tyres with those not originally speci-
fied by NISSAN could affect the proper opera-
tion of the TPMS.
•
The Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tyre Repair
Sealant can be used for temporarily repairing
a tyre. Do not inject any other tyre liquid or
aerosol tyre sealant into the tyres, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tyre pressure sen-
sors.
•
NISSAN recommends using only Genuine
NISSAN Emergency Tyre Sealant provided
with your vehicle. Other tyre sealants may
damage the valve stem seal which can cause
the tyre to lose air pressure. Visit a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as pos-
sible after using tyre repair sealant (for mod-
els equipped with the emergency tyre punc-
ture repair kit).
CAUTION
•
The TPMS may not function properly when the
wheels are equipped with tyre chains or the
wheels are buried in snow.
•
Do not place metalised film or any metal parts
(antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may
cause poor reception of the signals from the
tyre pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not
function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may tempo-
rarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS
and cause the TPMS indicator light to illumi-
nate. Some examples are:
– Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near
the vehicle.
•
When inflating the tyres and checking the tyre
pressure, never bend the valves.
•
Special aluminium valves are fitted to mount
the TPMS sensors on the wheels. The TPMS
sensor is fixed at the wheels by a nut. The nut
needs to be correctly fitted at a torque setting
of 7.5 ± 0.5 Nm. If the TPMS sensor is tight-
ened exceeding the limit, there is a possibility
NCE373
In case of emergency 6-7
the sensor grommet will be damaged. If the
sensor is tightened under the limit, there is a
possibility to cause an air leak.
•
Use Genuine NISSAN valve caps that comply
with the factory-fitted valve cap specifications.
•
Do not use metal valve caps.
•
Fit the valve caps properly. Without the valve
caps the valve and tyre pressure monitor sen-
sors could be damaged.
•
Do not damage the valves and sensors when
storing the wheels or fitting different tyres.
•
Replace the sensor grommet and washer dur-
ing a tyre change. Once they have been re-
moved, the sensor grommet and washer can-
not be reused and must be replaced. The
TPMS sensors can be used again.
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) moni-
tors the tyre pressure of the four wheels except the
spare wheel. When the TPMS indicator light comes
on together with the TPMS tyre location indicator
light (in the meter panel), one or more of the tyres is
significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being
driven with low tyre pressure, the TPMS will activate
and TPMS indicator light together with the TPMS
tyre location indicator light remains on. This system
will deactivate only when tyre pressure is corrected
and the vehicle is driven at speeds above 25 km/h
(16 MPH).
For more details about the TPMS, see “Tyre Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.
REPAIRING FLAT TYRE (Models with
emergency tyre puncture repair kit)
The emergency tyre puncture repair kit is supplied
with the vehicle instead of a spare tyre. This repair
kit must be used for temporarily fixing a minor tyre
puncture. After using the repair kit, see a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as possible for
tyre inspection and repair/replacement.
CAUTION
Do not use the emergency tyre puncture repair
kit under the following conditions. Contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop or profes-
sional road assistance.
•
when the sealant has passed its expiration
date (shown on the label attached to the
bottle)
•
when the cut or the puncture is approximately
4 mm (0.16 in) or longer
•
when the side of the tyre is damaged
•
when the vehicle has been driven with a con-
siderable loss of air from the tyre
•
when the tyre is completely displaced inside
or outside the rim
•
when the tyre rim is damaged
•
when two or more tyres are flat
Getting emergency tyre puncture repair
kit
Take the emergency tyre puncture repair kit out of
the boot. The repair kit consists of the following
items:
j1
Tyre sealant bottle
j2
Air compressor
j3
Speed restriction sticker
NOTE
For models with the emergency tyre puncture
repair kit, a spare tyre, jack and rod are not
equipped as standard. These parts are dealer
options. Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop about obtaining these parts. See “Re-
moving the wheel” earlier in this section for us-
age of jacking tools and tyre replacement.
NCE371
6-8 In case of emergency
Before using emergency tyre puncture
repair kit
•
If any foreign object (for example, a screw or
nail) is embedded in the tyre, do not remove it.
•
Check the expiration date of the sealant (shown
on the label attached to the bottle). Never use a
sealant which has passed its expiration date.
Repairing tyre
1. Shake the sealant bottle well.
2. Remove the bottle cap
j3 and the orange plug
j2 from the top of the compressor.
3. Screw the bottle
j4 into the opening of the com-
pressor (where the orange plug was).
4. Remove the speed restriction sticker from the
compressor, then place it in a location where the
driver can see it while driving.
5. Screw the air tube
jA of the compressor se-
curely onto the tyre valve. Make sure that the air
compressor switch is in the “OFF” (0) position
and the pressure release valve
jB is securely
closed.
NCE343
NCE315
NCE344
In case of emergency 6-9
6. Insert its power plug into the power outlet in the
vehicle. Make sure no other accessories are fit-
ted to the power outlet. For details, see “Power
outlet” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
tion.
7. Turn the ignition switch to the Acc position.
8. Switch on the compressor, and inflate the tyre to
the pressure that is specified on the tyre placard
affixed to the driver’s side centre pillar.
CAUTION
Do not operate the compressor for more than 10
minutes.
If the tyre pressure does not increase to the speci-
fied pressure within 10 minutes, the tyre may be
seriously damaged and the tyre cannot be repaired
with this tyre repair kit. Contact a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop.
9. Remove the air compressor from the tyre valve.
Immediately drive the vehicle at a speed of 80
km/h (50 MPH) or less.
10. After 10 minute or 10 km (6 miles) drive, check
the tyre pressure. The temporary repair is com-
pleted if the tyre pressure does not drop.
If the tyre pressure is lower than specified, re-
peat the steps from step 5.
If the pressure drops again or under 130 kPa
(1,3 bar, 19 psi), the tyre cannot be repaired
with this tyre repair kit. Contact a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop.
After repairing tyre
See a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for tyre
repair/replacement, inspection/replacement of the
TPMS sensor and for a new tyre sealant bottle and
hose, as soon as possible.
6-10 In case of emergency
WARNING
•
Incorrect jump-starting can lead to a battery
explosion. The battery explosion may result in
severe injury or death. It may also result in
damage to the vehicle. Be sure to follow the
instructions in this section.
•
Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in
the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and
flames away from the battery.
•
Always wear suitable eye protection glasses
and remove rings, bracelets, and any other
jewellery whenever working on or near a bat-
tery.
•
Never lean over the battery while jump-start-
ing.
•
Never allow battery fluid to come into contact
with eyes, skin, clothes or the vehicle’s
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive
sulphuric acid which can cause severe burns.
If the fluid comes into contact with anything,
immediately flush the contacted area with
plenty of water.
•
Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
•
The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts.
Use of an incorrectly rated battery will dam-
age your vehicle.
•
Never attempt to jump-start a frozen battery.
It could explode and cause serious injury.
1. Check if the parking brake is applied.
If not, after connecting the vehicle with the
booster battery (after step 8), apply the parking
brake.
Vehicle has an electric parking brake, for more
information see, “Parking brake switch” in the
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section
2. Prepare vehicle
jA with the booster battery for
the vehicle jB being jump-started.
CAUTION
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
3. Shift the shift lever (MT models) into the N (Neu-
tral) position [CVT models, move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position].
NCE397
JUMP-STARTING
In case of emergency 6-11
4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems
(headlights, hazard lights etc,).
5. Ensure that the ignition switch of the vehicle be-
ing jump-started is in the LOCK position.
6. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet
release” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
7. Remove the vent caps (where fitted) on the bat-
tery and cover the battery with an old cloth.
8. Connect the jump leads in the sequence (
j1 →
j2 → j3 → j4 ) as illustrated.
CAUTION
•
Always connect positive j+ to positive j+
and negative
j- to body ground (for ex-
ample, engine mount, etc.) – not to the
battery’s negative
j-.
•
An incorrect connection could damage the
charging system.
•
Be sure that the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compart-
ment.
•
Be careful not to allow contact between
the positive jump lead connector and the
vehicle or the negative lead during con-
nection and disconnection.
9. Start the engine of the other vehicle
jA and let it
run for a few minutes. Keep the engine speed at
about 2,000 rpm.
10. Start the engine of your vehicle
jB in the nor-
mal way.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not
start immediately, turn the ignition switch to
“OFF” and wait 10 seconds before trying
again.
11. After starting the engine of your vehicle, care-
fully disconnect the negative lead and then the
positive lead (
j4 → j3 → j2 → j1).
12. Remove and dispose of the cloth that was used
to cover the vent holes as it may be contami-
nated with corrosive acid.
13. Install the vent caps (where fitted).
14. Close the bonnet.
NOTE
For models which incorporate the Stop/Start
System:
•
Ensure that the battery fitted is the special
battery that is enhanced with regard to the
charge-discharge capacity and life perfor-
mance. Avoid using any other battery for the
Stop/Start System, as this may cause early
deterioration of the battery or a malfunction
of the Stop/Start System. It is recommended
that a Genuine NISSAN battery is fitted. For
more information, contact a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop
•
If the battery terminal is disconnected (for bat-
tery replacement, etc.) and then reconnected,
there may be some delay before the Stop/
Start System reactivates.
6-12 In case of emergency
CAUTION
•
Three-way catalyst equipped models (where
fitted) should not be started by pushing the
vehicle as the three-way catalyst may be dam-
aged.
•
XTRONIC transmission (CVT) models cannot
be started by pushing the vehicle. This may
cause transmission damage.
•
Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when
the engine starts, the forward surge could
cause the vehicle to collide with the tow ve-
hicle.
WARNING
•
Never continue driving if the engine of your
vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a ve-
hicle fire.
•
Never open the bonnet if steam is coming
out.
•
Never remove engine coolant reservoir cap
when the engine is hot. If the engine coolant
reservoir cap is removed while the engine is
hot, pressurised hot water will spurt out and
possibly cause burning, scalding or serious
injury.
•
If steam or coolant is coming out of the en-
gine, stand clear of the vehicle to prevent get-
ting injured.
•
The engine cooling fan will start whenever the
coolant temperature exceeds preset degrees.
•
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewel-
lery or clothing to come into contact with, or
get caught in, the cooling fan or drive belts.
If the engine of your vehicle is overheating (indi-
cated by the engine coolant temperature gauge) or
if you feel a lack of engine power, detect unusual
noise, etc., proceed as follows:
1. Move and park the vehicle safely off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flasher lights.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the shift lever (MT models) into the N (Neu-
tral) position, XTRONIC transmission (CVT)
models: move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
DO NOT STOP THE ENGINE.
5. Open all windows.
6. Switch off the air conditioner system (where fit-
ted).
7. Set the heater or air conditioner temperature
control to maximum “HOT” and fan speed con-
trol to maximum speed.
8. Exit the vehicle.
9. Visually inspect and listen for steam or coolant
escaping from the radiator before opening the
bonnet. Wait until no steam or coolant can be
seen before proceeding.
10. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet
release” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
11. Visually check if the cooling fan is running.
12. Visually check the radiator and radiator hoses
for leakage.
WARNING
If coolant is leaking, the cooling fan belt is
missing or loose or the cooling fan is not run-
ning, stop the engine.
PUSH-STARTING ENGINE OVERHEAT
In case of emergency 6-13
13. After the engine cools down, check the coolant
level in the engine coolant reservoir with the
engine running.
14. If the level is low, remove the engine coolant
reservoir cap and add coolant slowly into the
reservoir. After refilling the reservoir to the MAX
level, install the reservoir cap.
WARNING
Before removing the engine coolant reservoir
cap and to avoid the danger of being scalded,
cover the reservoir cap with a rag and loosen
the reservoir cap to the first notch to allow the
steam to escape.
15. Close the bonnet.
Have your vehicle inspected or repaired by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
When towing your vehicle, local regulations for tow-
ing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment
could damage your vehicle. To assure proper tow-
ing and to prevent accidental damage to your ve-
hicle, NISSAN recommends that you have a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the
service operator carefully read the following precau-
tions.
WARNING
•
Do not allow any occupants in the vehicle that
is being towed.
•
Never get under your vehicle after it has been
lifted by a tow truck.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS
•
When towing: Make sure that the transmission,
axles, steering system and power train are in
working condition. If any unit is damaged, the
vehicle must be towed using a dolly or be placed
on a flat bed lorry.
•
Release the parking brake and shift the manual
transmission (MT) or XTRONIC transmission
(CVT) into the N (Neutral) position before start-
ing to tow the vehicle.
•
Always attach safety chains before towing.
NCE302
2WD models
TOW TRUCK TOWING
6-14 In case of emergency
RECOMMENDED TOWING FOR
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE (2WD) MODELS
CAUTION
NEVER tow XTRONIC transmission (CVT) models
with the front wheels on the ground or with all
four wheels on the ground (forwards or back-
wards), this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, al-
ways use towing dollies under the front wheels.
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle should be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground
or that the vehicle be placed on a flat bed lorry as
illustrated.
When towing with the front wheels – on the
ground (MT models only) or – on towing dollies:
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position, then
secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead posi-
tion using a rope or similar device. Never place the
ignition switch in the LOCK position. This will re-
sult in damage to the steering lock mechanism.
RECOMMENDED TOWING FOR
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) MODELS
CAUTION
NEVER tow the vehicle with any wheels on the
ground as this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission.
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used
when towing your vehicle or that the vehicle be
placed on a flat bed lorry as illustrated.
When towing with the front wheels on towing dol-
lies:
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position, then
secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead posi-
tion using a rope or similar device. Never place the
ignition switch in the LOCK position. This will re-
sult in damage to the steering lock mechanism.
NCE303
4WD models
In case of emergency 6-15
TOWING EYE
The towing eye is stored with the vehicle tools and
located in the spare wheel recess (luggage com-
partment area).
1) Remove the cover from the bumper.
2) Securely install the towing eye, as illustrated.
Make sure that the towing eye is properly stored in
its designated location after use.
FREEING THE VEHICLE FROM SAND,
SNOW OR MUD
WARNING
•
Never allow anyone to stand near the towing
line during the pulling operation.
•
Never spin the tyres at high speed. This could
cause them to explode and result in serious
injury. Parts of the vehicle could also overheat
and be damaged.
Towing eye usage
The towing eye should be used in the event that
your vehicle becomes trapped in sand, snow or mud,
and is unable to drive away without being pulled,
use the towing eye.
•
Use the towing eye only, not other parts of the
vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be dam-
aged.
•
Only use the towing eye to free a vehicle stuck
in sand, snow, mud, etc.
•
Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using
only the towing eye.
•
The towing eye is under tremendous force when
used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable
straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull on the towing eye at a sideways angle.
CAUTION
In order not to break the towing line, tension it
slowly.
NCE283Z
6-16 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and careAppearance and care
Cleaning exterior...................................................... 7-2
Washing............................................................. 7-2
Removing spots.................................................. 7-2
Waxing ............................................................... 7-2
Cleaning glass.................................................... 7-3
Cleaning rear-view camera (where fitted) ............ 7-3
Underbody ......................................................... 7-3
Care of wheels ................................................... 7-3
Cleaning alloy wheels ......................................... 7-3
Chrome parts ..................................................... 7-3
Cleaning interior ...................................................... 7-4
Monitor display’s maintenance (where fitted)....... 7-4
Air fresheners ..................................................... 7-4
Floor mats .......................................................... 7-4
Cleaning Glass................................................... 7-5
Plastic parts........................................................ 7-5
Seat belts ........................................................... 7-5
Corrosion protection................................................ 7-5
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion ............................................................ 7-5
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion ............................................................ 7-5
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ................ 7-6
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle,
it is important to take proper care of it.
Whenever possible, park your vehicle inside a ga-
rage or in a covered area to minimise the chances
of damaging the paint surface of your vehicle.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady
area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be
careful not to scratch the paint surface when put-
ting on or removing the body cover.
WASHING
In the following instances, wash your vehicle as soon
as possible to protect the paint surface:
•
After a rainfall, to prevent possible damage from
acid rain.
•
After driving on coastal roads.
•
When contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
pings, tree sap, metal particles or insects get on
the paint surface.
•
When dust or mud builds up on the paint sur-
face.
1. Wash the vehicle surface with a wet sponge and
plenty of water.
2. Clean the vehicle surface gently and thoroughly
using a mild soap or a special vehicle wash sham-
poo mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) wa-
ter.
CAUTION
•
Do not wash the vehicle with strong house-
hold soap, strong chemical detergents, petrol
or solvents.
•
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or
while the vehicle body is hot, as the paint sur-
face may become water-spotted.
•
Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths,
such as washing mitts. Care must be taken
when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign
substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
3. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
4. Use a damp chamois to dry the paint surface to
avoid leaving water spots.
When washing the vehicle, take care of the follow-
ing:
•
Inside flanges, joints and folds on the doors, back
door and bonnet are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly.
•
Be sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of
the doors are not clogged.
•
Spray water to the underbody and in the wheel
wells to loosen the dirt and/or wash away road
salt.
•
If using a high pressure washer always follow
the recommendations on the equipment (pres-
sure and spraying distance).
CAUTION
Do not spray directly into the engine compart-
ment with a high-pressure washer/hose this
could damage the engine.
•
If there are damaged areas on the vehicle (e.g.
painted bumpers or headlamp assembly), it is
not recommended to direct the high pressure jet
on to them. Carefully wash these areas by hand.
•
Avoid the entry of water into the locks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint
surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special
cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps
to retain a new vehicle appearance.
After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove
built-up residue.
A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop can assist
you in choosing the appropriate waxing products.
CAUTION
•
Wash your vehicle thoroughly and completely
before applying wax to the paint surface.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
7-2 Appearance and care
•
Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions
supplied with the wax.
•
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may dam-
age the vehicle finish.
•
If the vehicle surface cannot polish easily, ap-
ply a road tar remover prior to waxing the ve-
hicle.
•
Machine compounding or aggressive polish-
ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
CLEANING GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked
in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will
easily remove this film.
CLEANING REAR-VIEW CAMERA
(where fitted)
Clean the transparent camera cover regularly. If dirt,
rain or snow attaches to the cover, the monitor may
not display objects clearly.
CAUTION
•
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean
the transparent camera cover. This will cause
discoloration. To clean the cover, first use a
cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.
•
Do not use body wax on the transparent cam-
era cover.
•
When washing the vehicle with a high pres-
sure water spray, make sure not to spray it
around the transparent camera cover. Other-
wise, water may enter the camera unit caus-
ing water condensation on the lens and it may
result in a malfunction or an electric shock.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in the winter, the
vehicle’s underbody must be cleaned regularly. This
will prevent dirt and salt from building up and caus-
ing underbody and suspension corrosion.
Before the winter period and again in the spring, the
underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-
treated.
CARE OF WHEELS
•
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to
maintain their appearance.
•
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle
is washed.
•
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the
wheels.
•
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corro-
sion. This may cause loss of pressure or damage
the tyre bead.
•
NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be
waxed to protect against road salt in areas where
it is used during winter.
CLEANING ALLOY WHEELS
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during win-
ter in areas where road salt is used. The salt residue
from road salt could discolour the wheels if it is not
washed off regularly.
CAUTION
Follow the directions as described below in order
to avoid staining or discolouring of the wheels.
•
Do not use a cleaner that contains strong con-
tents of acid or alkali to clean the wheels.
•
Do not apply wheel cleaner when the wheels
are hot. The wheel temperature should be the
same as ambient temperature.
•
Rinse the wheel to completely remove the
cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner
has been applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive
chrome polish to maintain the finish.
Appearance and care 7-3
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner
or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather sur-
faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap
solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protec-
tors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the
seat material.
Use a soft cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens covers.
CAUTION
•
Never use benzine, thinner or any similar ma-
terial.
•
Small dirt particles can be abrasive and dam-
aging to leather surfaces and should be re-
moved promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car
waxes, polishes, oils cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents or ammonia based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural finish.
•
Never use fabric protectors unless recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
•
Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter
or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens
covers.
MONITOR DISPLAY’S MAINTENANCE
(where fitted)
•
To clean the display screen, first turn the ignition
off and wipe it with a dry soft cloth.
•
Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thin-
ner, any kind of solvent, or paper tissues with
chemical cleaning agent. They would scratch or
deteriorate the panel.
•
Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fra-
grance on the display. Contact with liquid will
cause the system to malfunction and damage
the hardware.
•
In case of extreme stain, use a small amount of
neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never soak
the screen display with water detergent.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take
the following precautions:
•
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause perma-
nent discoloration when they contact vehicle in-
terior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a loca-
tion that allows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.
•
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the
vents. These products can cause immediate
damage and discoloration when spilled on inte-
rior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions before using air fresheners.
FLOOR MATS
The use of NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of
your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the
interior. Regardless of what mats are used, be sure
they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly posi-
tioned in the foot well to prevent interference with
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with
regular cleaning and replaced if they become exces-
sively worn.
Floor mat positioning aid
Note that the above illustration is for LHD models.
This vehicle includes front floor mat brackets
jAto
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your vehicle.
Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket
hook through the floor mat grommet hole while cen-
tering the mat in the foot area.
Periodically check that the mats are properly posi-
tioned.
SAI0037Z
CLEANING INTERIOR
7-4 Appearance and care
CLEANING GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked
in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will
easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not
use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlo-
rine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could
damage elements in the rear windows (such as
the window defogger).
Inside rear-view mirror (Automatic
anti-dazzling, where fitted)
Use a soft cloth dampened only with water to clean
the automatic anti-dazzling inside rear view mirror
(where fitted).
CAUTION
Do not use glass cleaner. Doing so will reduce
the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in improper
operation.
PLASTIC PARTS
Plastic parts can be cleaned with a mild soap solu-
tion. If the dirt cannot be easily removed, use a plas-
tic cleaner. Do not use any solvents.
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
•
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor.
•
Never use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to
clean the seat belts, since these materials
may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with
a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before
using them.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
•
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and
debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other
areas.
•
Damage to the paint surface and other protec-
tive coatings caused by gravel and stone chips
or minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle
body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor
coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle,
and should be removed for drying to avoid floor pan-
els corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high rela-
tive humidity, especially those areas where the tem-
peratures stay above freezing, where atmospheric
pollution exists and road salt is used.
Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well venti-
lated.
CORROSION PROTECTION
Appearance and care 7-5
Corrosion will also accelerate in areas where the
temperatures stay above freezing.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in
coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate
the corrosion process. Road salt will also acceler-
ate the disintegration of paint surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
•
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
•
Always check for minor damage to the paint sur-
face and if any exists, repair it as soon as pos-
sible.
•
Keep the drain holes at the bottom of the doors
and back door opened to avoid water accumula-
tion.
•
Check the vehicle underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
CAUTION
•
Never remove dirt, sand or other debris from
the passenger compartment by washing it out
with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum
cleaner or broom.
•
Never allow water or other liquids to come in
contact with electronic components inside the
vehicle as this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are ex-
tremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and
deterioration of underbody components such as the
exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,
floor pan and fenders.
In the winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion,
which may be required in some areas, consult a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
7-6 Appearance and care
NOTE
Appearance and care 7-7
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourselfMaintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements ....................................... 8-2
Scheduled maintenance...................................... 8-2
General maintenance.......................................... 8-2
Where to go for service ...................................... 8-2
General maintenance............................................... 8-2
Explanation of general maintenance items ........... 8-2
Maintenance precautions ......................................... 8-4
Engine compartment................................................ 8-5
Engine cooling system ............................................. 8-6
Checking engine coolant level............................. 8-6
Changing engine coolant .................................... 8-6
Engine oil................................................................. 8-8
Checking engine oil level .................................... 8-8
Changing engine oil............................................ 8-9
Changing engine oil filter .................................... 8-10
Protect the environment ...................................... 8-12
Fuel filter (Diesel engine models) ............................. 8-13
Draining water .................................................... 8-13
Bleeding the fuel system ..................................... 8-13
XTRONIC Continuously variable transmission
(CVT) fluid............................................................... 8-13
Brakes..................................................................... 8-13
Checking parking brake...................................... 8-13
Checking brake pedal......................................... 8-13
Brake booster..................................................... 8-14
Brake and clutch fluid .............................................. 8-14
Window washer fluid/headlight cleaner fluid
(where fitted) ........................................................... 8-15
Battery..................................................................... 8-16
Vehicle battery.................................................... 8-16
Jump-starting ...................................................... 8-18
Integrated keyfob/Intelligent Key battery
replacement........................................................ 8-18
Drive belts ............................................................... 8-20
Spark plugs (Petrol engine models).......................... 8-21
Air duct removal....................................................... 8-21
Air cleaner filter........................................................ 8-23
Viscous paper type ............................................. 8-23
Dry paper type (where fitted) .............................. 8-23
Wiper blades ........................................................... 8-24
Cleaning............................................................. 8-24
Front window wiper replacement ........................ 8-24
Back door window wiper replacement ................ 8-24
Windscreen washer nozzle ................................. 8-25
Fuses ...................................................................... 8-25
Passenger compartment ..................................... 8-25
Engine compartment........................................... 8-26
Lights ...................................................................... 8-27
Headlights .......................................................... 8-28
Exterior lights...................................................... 8-29
Interior lights....................................................... 8-29
Light locations .................................................... 8-30
Wheels and tyres..................................................... 8-33
Tyre inflation pressure......................................... 8-33
Types of tyres..................................................... 8-33
Snow chains....................................................... 8-34
Tyre rotation ....................................................... 8-34
Tyre wear and damage ....................................... 8-35
Tyre age ............................................................. 8-35
Changing tyres and wheels................................. 8-35
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essen-
tial to maintain your NISSAN’s good mechanical
condition, as well as its emission and engine perfor-
mance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the
specified maintenance, as well as general mainte-
nance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can
ensure that your vehicle receives the proper mainte-
nance care.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
For your convenience, the required scheduled main-
tenance items are described and listed in the sepa-
rate Warranty Information and Maintenance book-
let. You must refer to that booklet to ensure that
necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN vehicle at regular intervals.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day opera-
tion of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle
is to continue to operate properly. It is your respon-
sibility to perform these procedures regularly as pre-
scribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and a few general automo-
tive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by your-
self, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems checked
and tuned by an authorised NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the ve-
hicle, general maintenance should be performed
regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect
any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to
check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop if repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work,
closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” later
in this section.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following items with
an asterisk (*) is found later in this section.
The maintenance items listed here should be per-
formed from time to time, unless otherwise speci-
fied.
Outside the vehicle
Back door, doors and bonnet:
Check that the back door, all doors and the bonnet
operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock
securely. Lubricate hinges and latches if necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the bon-
net from opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other cor-
rosive materials, check for lubrication frequently.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Lights*:
Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure
that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal
lights, and other lights are all operating properly and
installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Tyres*:
Check the pressure with a gauge periodically when
at a service station (including the spare) and adjust
to the specified pressure if necessary. Check care-
fully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tyre rotation*:
Tyres should be rotated every 10,000 km (6,000
miles) for Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models and
5,000 km (3,000 miles) for Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
models. However, the timing for tyre rotation may
vary according to your driving habits and road sur-
face conditions.
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components (where fitted):
Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve
core and cap when the tyres are replaced due to
wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance:
If the vehicle pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tyre wear, there may be a need for wheel
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
Wheel nuts:
When checking the tyres, make sure no wheel nuts
are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts.
Tighten if necessary.
Windscreen:
Clean the windscreen on a regular basis. Check the
windscreen at least every six months for cracks or
other damage. Have a damaged windscreen re-
paired by a qualified repair facility.
Wiper blades*:
Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe prop-
erly.
Under the bonnet and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically, e.g. each time you check the
engine oil or refuel.
Battery*:
Check if the green indicator on the top of the main-
tenance free battery is visible. If it is not visible,
replace the battery as soon as possible.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions, check the fluid level frequently.
Brake and clutch fluid level*:
Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid level is
between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*:
Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*:
Make sure that the drive belts are not frayed, worn,
cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*:
Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level
surface and turning off the engine.
Fluid leaks:
Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other
fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a
while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after
use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if
petrol fumes are evident, check for the cause and
have it corrected immediately.
Window washer fluid*:
Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when perform-
ing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal:
Check the pedal for smooth operation and make
sure that the pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal.
Brake pedal*:
Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake
pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the
pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
longer to stop, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop immediately. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.
Parking brake*:
Confirm that your vehicle is held securely on a fairly
steep hill with only the parking brake applied.
Seats:
Check seat position controls such as seat adjust-
ers, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate
smoothly and all latches lock securely in every posi-
tion. Check that the head restraints move up and
down smoothly and the locks hold securely in all
latched positions.
Seat belts:
Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g.
buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate
properly and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or
damage. See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
Seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System” sec-
tion for further details.
Steering wheel:
Check for any change in the steering conditions,
such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange
noises.
Warning lights and audible reminders:
Make sure that all warning/indicator lights and au-
dible reminders are operating properly.
Windscreen defogger:
Check that the air comes out of the defogger outlets
properly when operating the heater or air condi-
tioner.
Windscreen wiper and washer*:
Check that the wipers and washer operate properly
and that the wipers do not streak.
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precautions
which should be closely observed.
•
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the
parking brake securely and block the wheels
to prevent the vehicle from moving. For
manual transmission models, move the shift
lever to N (Neutral) position.For continuously
variable transmission models: move the shift
lever to P (Park) position.
•
Do not work under the engine bonnet while
the engine is hot. Turn off the engine and wait
until it cools down.
•
Be sure to turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
or LOCK position.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or Acc
position, the cooling fan may start to operate
suddenly even when the engine is not run-
ning. To avoid injury, always disconnect the
negative battery cable before working near
the engine.
•
If you must work with the engine running,
keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away
from moving fans, belts and any other moving
parts.
•
It is advisable to remove ties and any jewel-
lery, such as rings, watches, etc. before work-
ing on your vehicle.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
•
If you must run the engine in an enclosed
space such as a garage, be sure there is
proper ventilation for exhaust gases.
•
DO NOT GET UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS
SUPPORTED BY A JACK.
•
Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks
away from fuel and battery.
•
Never connect or disconnect either the bat-
tery or any transistorised component connec-
tor while the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
•
Never leave the engine or transmission re-
lated component harness connector discon-
nected while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
•
On petrol engine models with the multiport
fuel injection (MFI) system, the fuel filter or
fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop because the fuel
lines are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.
•
Always wear eye protection whenever you
work on your vehicle.
•
Failure to follow these or other common sense
guidelines may lead to serious injury or ve-
hicle damage.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
Improperly disposed engine oil and/or other
vehicle fluids can pollute the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for disposal
of vehicle fluid.
This section gives instructions regarding only those
items which are relatively easy for an owner to per-
form.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or ex-
cessive emissions, and could affect your warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it
done by your NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
For an overview of the engine compartment, see
“Engine compartment” in the “0. Illustrated table
of contents” section.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
WARNING
•
Never remove t he engine coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure fluid es-
caping from the engine coolant reservoir. Wait
until the engine and radiator have cooled
down.
•
Engine coolant is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers out of
the reach of children.
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a high-quality, year-round and extended life en-
gine coolant. The high quality engine coolant con-
tains the specific solutions effective for the anti-cor-
rosion and the anti-freeze function. Therefore, addi-
tional cooling system additives are not necessary.
CAUTION
•
Never use any cooling system additives such
as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the
cooling system and cause damage to the en-
gine, transmission and/or cooling system.
•
When adding or replacing engine coolant, be
sure to use Genuine NISSAN engine coolant
or equivalent.
•
The use of other types of engine coolant may
damage the engine cooling system.
•
The engine coolant reservoir tank is equipped
with a pressure cap, use a Genuine NISSAN
cap or its equivalent when replacement is re-
quired.
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the
engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN j2,
add coolant up to the MAX
j1 level.
CAUTION
If the cooling system frequently requires coolant,
have it checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
CAUTION
•
Major cooling system repairs should be per-
formed by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop. The service procedures can be found in
the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.
•
When checking or replacement is required,
NISSAN recommends contacting a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop for servicing.
•
Improper servicing or engine coolant change
can result in reduced heater performance and
engine overheating.
WARNING
•
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never
change the coolant when the engine is hot.
•
Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If
skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with
soap or hand cleaner and plenty of water as
soon as possible.
•
Keep coolant out of reach of children and
pets.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
NDI1426
NDI1478
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
MR20DD, MR16DE or R9M engine
1. Set the heater or air conditioner temperature
control to the maximum “HOT” position.
2. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet
release” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
3. Open the engine coolant reservoir cap
j1to
help drain the coolant.
4. Loosen the engine coolant radiator drain plug
j3
to help drain the coolant.
5. Disconnect the end of the hose
j2 to drain the
coolant.
6. Flush the cooling system by running clean water
through the engine coolant reservoir.
7. Install the hose
j2.
8. Tighten the engine coolant radiator drain plug
j3.
9. Fill the coolant reservoir up to the MAX level.
See “Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants” in the “9. Technical information” sec-
tion for cooling system capacity.
10. Install the engine coolant reservoir cap.
11. Start the engine, and rev the engine two or
three times under no load.
12. Touch the radiator hose and feel if the water
flows.
13. Keep racing the engine at a speed of 3,000 rpm
for about 10 minutes.
14. Observe the coolant temperature gauge for
signs of overheating.
15. Stop the engine and check coolant level, allow
to cool and refill up to the MAX level.
16. Check radiator lower hose for any signs of leak-
age.
17. Close the bonnet.
HRA2DDT or K9K engine
1. Set the heater or air conditioner temperature
control to the maximum “HOT” position.
2. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet
release” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
3. Loosen the engine coolant radiator drain plug
j1
to help drain the coolant.
4. Disconnect the radiator lower hose
j2 and open
the drain plug
j3 on the engine block.
5. Open the engine coolant reservoir cap to help to
drain the coolant.
6. Flush the cooling system by running fresh water
through the engine coolant reservoir.
7. Install the hose
j2 and securely tighten the en-
gine block drain plug j3.
8. Tighten the engine coolant radiator drain plug
j1.
9. Fill the reservoir up to the MAX level with cool-
ant. See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical information”
section for cooling system capacity.
10. Install the engine coolant reservoir cap.
11. Start the engine, and rev the engine two or
three times under no load.
12. Touch the radiator hose and feel if the water
flows.
13. Keep racing the engine at a speed of 2,000 –
2,500 rpm for about 10 minutes.
14. Observe the coolant temperature gauge for
signs of overheating.
15. Stop the engine and check coolant level, allow
to cool and refill up to the MAX level.
16. Check the radiator lower hose for any signs of
leakage.
17. Close the bonnet.
NDI1491
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CAUTION
The oil level should be checked regularly. Oper-
ating with an insufficient amount of oil can dam-
age the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
jA
MR20DD engine
jB
HRA2DDT
jC
R9M engine
jD
K9K engine G6
j1
Normal range
j2
MIN level
j3
MAX level
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the
parking brake.
2. Start the engine. If the engine is cold, start and
let the engine idle until it reaches the operational
temperature.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to
drain back into the oil pan.
NDI983Z
MR20DD engine
NDI984Z
HRA2DDT engine
NDI1427
K9K engine
NDI1266
R9M engine
NDI1494
ENGINE OIL
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
5. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet
release” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Models with K9K engine: the engine oil dipstick
is attached to the engine oil filler cap. Remove
the engine oil filler cap and wipe the dipstick
clean.
7. Reinsert it all the way.
Models with K9K engine: install the engine oil
filler cap.
8. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level.
It should be in the normal range
j1.
9. If the oil level is below MIN
j2 , remove the en-
gine oil filler cap and pour the recommended oil
through the opening. Do not overfill
j3.
10. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.
11. Install the engine oil filler cap securely.
12. Close the bonnet.
It is normal to add some engine oil between oil
maintenance intervals depending on the severity
of operating conditions or depending on the prop-
erty of the engine oil used. More engine oil is
consumed by frequent acceleration/deceleration
especially when the engine rpm is high. Con-
sumption is likely to be higher when the engine
is new. If the rate of oil consumption, after hav-
ing driven for 5,000 km (3,000 miles), is more
than 0.5 litre per 1,000 km (621 miles), consult a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
WARNING
•
NISSAN recommends contacting a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop for engine oil
servicing.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
Used oil must not be poured into the ground,
canals, rivers, etc. It should be disposed of at
a rubbish tip having proper facilities. Check
your local regulations.
•
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine
oil is hot.
•
Prolonged and repeated contact with used
engine oil may cause skin cancer.
•
Avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin
contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap
or hand cleaner and plenty of water as soon
as possible.
•
Store used engine oil in marked containers
out of the reach of children.
NDI653Z
MR20DD engine
NDI1064
K9K engine
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the
parking brake.
2. Start the engine. If the engine is cold, start and
let the engine idle until the engine temperature
reaches the operational temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait at least 10 minutes
to let the engine oil drain back into the oil pan.
4. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet
release” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
5. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
6. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable
floor jack and safety jack stands.
Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle
jack-up points.
For details, see “Flat tyre” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.
7. Remove the engine compartment under cover.
8. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.
9. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and com-
pletely drain the oil.
If the engine oil filter needs to be changed, re-
move and replace it at this time. See “Changing
engine oil filter” later in this section.
10. Clean and re-install the drain plug along with a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug
with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torques:
MR20DD engine:
34.3 N•m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
K9K engine:
20 N•m (2.1 kg-m, 15 ft-lb)
R9M engine:
50 N•m (5.1 kg-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
11. Refill the engine with recommended engine oil
and quantity.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical information”
section.
12. Check the oil level with the dipstick. For details,
see “Checking engine oil level” earlier in this
section. If necessary, add engine oil.
13. Install the engine oil filler cap securely.
14. Start the engine.
15. Check for any leakage around the drain plug.
Correct as required.
16. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes.
17. Check the oil level again with the dipstick. If
necessary, add engine oil.
18. Install the engine compartment under cover.
19. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
20. Close the bonnet.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
WARNING
•
NISSAN recommends contacting a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop for engine oil fil-
ter servicing.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
A used oil filter should be disposed of at a
rubbish tip having proper facilities.
NDI978Z
R9M engine
NDI1477
HRA2DDT engine
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
MR20DD and K9K engines
Removal:
1. Drain the engine oil. For details, see “Changing
engine oil” earlier in this section.
2. Loosen the engine oil filter unit with an oil filter
wrench. Depending on the engine model, a spe-
cial cap type wrench may be required. See a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop, if in doubt.
3. Remove the engine oil filter unit.
4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a
clean rag.
CAUTION
If any oil is spilled on the engine or the ve-
hicle, thoroughly wipe it clean.
Installation:
1. Clean and re-install the drain plug along with a
new washer. For tightening torque details, see
“Changing engine oil” earlier in this section.
2. Coat the rubber gasket on the new engine oil fil-
ter unit with clean engine oil.
3. Install the engine oil filter unit by hand until a
slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally
2/3 of a turn.
Engine oil filter tightening torques:
MR20DD engine
17.7 N•m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
K9K engine:
14 N•m (1.4 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
4. Add engine oil and check the oil level with the
engine oil dipstick. For details, see “Checking
engine oil level” earlier in this section and “Ca-
pacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the
“9. Technical information” section.
5. Install the engine oil filler cap.
6. Start the engine.
7. After the engine has been warmed up, make sure
there are no leaks around the engine oil filter unit
and the drain plug. Correct as required.
8. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes.
Check the oil level and add engine oil, if neces-
sary.
9. Install the engine compartment under cover.
10. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
11. Close the bonnet.
NDI656Z
MR20DD engine
NDI985Z
K9K engine
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
R9M and HRA2DDT engines
Removal:
1. Drain the engine oil. For details, see “Changing
engine oil” earlier in this section.
2. Loosen the engine oil filter cover with a wrench.
3. Remove the engine oil filter cover then the oil fil-
ter element.
4. Remove the rubber O-ring from the filter cover.
5. Wipe the oil filter cover entirely with a clean rag.
Installation:
1. Clean and re-install the drain plug along with a
new washer. For tightening torque details, see
“Changing engine oil” earlier in this section.
2. Install the rubber O-ring, in its housing, on the
outside of the engine oil filter cover.
3. Insert the new oil filter element into the engine oil
filter cover.
4. Coat the rubber O-ring with clean engine oil.
5. Install the engine oil filter cover until a slight re-
sistance is felt, then tighten additionally 2/3 of a
turn.
Tightening torque:
25 N•m (2.6 kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
6. Add engine oil and check the oil level with the
engine oil dipstick. For details, see “Checking
engine oil level” earlier in this section and “Ca-
pacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the
“9. Technical information” section.
7. Install the engine oil filler cap.
8. Start the engine.
9. After the engine has been warmed up, make sure
there are no leaks around the engine oil filter
cover and the drain plug. Correct as required.
10. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes.
Check the oil level and add engine oil, if neces-
sary.
11. Install the engine compartment under cover.
12. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
13. Close the bonnet.
PROTECT THE ENVIRONMENT
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil.
Use authorised waste collection facilities, including
civic amenity sites and garages providing facilities
for the disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If in
doubt, contact your local authority for advice on dis-
posal.
The regulations concerning the pollution of the
environment will vary from country to country.
NDI1267
R9M
NDI1476
HRA2DDT
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
DRAINING WATER
Drain the water from the fuel filter. Contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.:
BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM
There is no need to perform any special operation to
bleed air from the system.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
Fuel bled from the fuel filter must not be poured into
the ground, canals, rivers, etc. It should be disposed
of at a rubbish tip having proper facilities. Check
your local regulations.
When checking or replacement is required, NISSAN
recommends contacting a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop for servicing.
CAUTION
•
Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS3*. Do
not mix with other fluids.
•
Using transmission fluid other than Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS3* will damage the
XTRONIC transmission, which is not covered
by the warranty.
*: For details, contact a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
CHECKING PARKING BRAKE
Periodically check the holding ability of the parking
brake by parking on a steep hill and restraining the
vehicle by using only the parking brake. If it does not
hold satisfactorily, see a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop.
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than
normal, the pedal feels “spongy” or the vehicle
seems to take longer to stop, see a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for a
brake system check if the brake pedal height
does not return to normal.
DI1020MMZ
FUEL FILTER (Diesel engine
models)
XTRONIC CONTINUOUSLY
VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
FLUID
BRAKES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
With the engine running, check the distance be-
tween the upper surface of the pedal and the metal
floor. If it is out the range listed, see a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop.
Depressing force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb)
183.7 – 193.7 mm (7.23 – 7.63 in.)
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake
pedal is applied.
BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows:
1. With the engine off, depress and release the
footbrake pedal several times. When the foot-
brake pedal movement (distance of travel) re-
mains the same from one pedal application to the
next, continue on to the next step.
2. While depressing the footbrake pedal, start the
engine. The pedal height should drop a little.
3. With the footbrake pedal depressed, stop the
engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about 30
seconds. The pedal height should not change.
4. Run the engine for 1 minute without depressing
the footbrake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the
footbrake pedal several times. The pedal travel
distance will decrease gradually with each de-
pression as the vacuum is released from the
booster.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop.
jA
LHD models
jB
RHD models
WARNING
•
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contami-
nated fluid may damage the brake and clutch
systems. The use of improper fluids can dam-
age the brake system and affect the vehicle’s
stopping ability.
•
Clean the filler cap before removing.
•
Brake and clutch fluids are poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked contain-
ers out of the reach of children.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level
is between the MIN
j2 and MAX j1 lines or the
brake warning light comes on, add fluid up to the
MAX line.
NDI1038
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants”
in the “9. Technical information” section for the rec-
ommended brake and clutch fluid type.
If fluid must be added frequently, the system should
be thoroughly checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
CAUTION
•
NISSAN recommends that refilling and check-
ing the brake and clutch systems should be
left to a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
who will have the necessary fluids and techni-
cal knowledge.
•
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This
will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash
with water.
WARNING
Anti-freeze window washer is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked containers
out of the reach of children.
•
Check the fluid level in the window washer res-
ervoir. If the fluid level is low, add window washer
fluid up to the MAX level.
•
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of win-
dow washer fluid.
•
Add a washer solvent to the water for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a window
washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.
CAUTION
•
Do not substitute anti-freeze engine coolant
for window washer solution. This may result
in damage to the paint.
•
Always use window washer fluid recom-
mended by NISSAN.
NDI919Z
WINDOW WASHER FLUID/HEADLIGHT CLEANER FLUID (where fitted)
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the bat-
tery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher
load on the battery which can generate heat, re-
duce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
•
Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any cor-
rosion should be washed off with a solution of
baking soda and water.
•
Make certain the terminal connections are clean
and securely tightened.
•
If the vehicle is not used for 30 days or longer,
disconnect the “–” negative battery terminal
cable to prevent discharge.
•
If battery replacement or check is required, con-
tact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Caution symbols for battery
m
WARNING
j1
m
No smoking
No exposed flames
No sparks
Never smoke around the battery. Never expose the battery to open flames or
electrical sparks.
j2
m
Shield eyes
Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect
against explosion or battery acid.
j3
m
Keep away from
children
Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of reach of
children.
j4
m
Battery acid
Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces.
After handling the battery or battery cap, immediately wash your hands
thoroughly. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes, or onto your skin or clothing,
flush with water immediately for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it
could cause eyesight loss or burns.
j5
m
Note operating
instructions
Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and
safe handling.
j6
m
Explosive gas Hydrogen gas, generated by battery fluid, is explosive.
BATTERY
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Battery (Type A)
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be be-
tween the UPPER
j1 and LOWER j2 level lines.
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water
to bring the level to the indicator in each filler open-
ing. Do not overfill.
1. Remove the cell plugs
jA using a suitable tool.
j1
OK
j2
ADD
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER level line
j1.
If the side of the battery is not clear, check the
electrolyte water level by looking directly above
the cell, as illustrated.
3. Tighten cell plugs.
CAUTION
Do not overfill battery cells. Excessive electrolyte
may leak out of the battery during charging, and
cause paint damage.
Maintenance free battery (Type B)
For a maintenance free battery it is not required to
check the fluid level. However, NISSAN recom-
mends to visually check the green indicator jA sta-
tus periodically. If it is not visible, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Reinitialisation procedure after battery
reconnection
If the battery has been reconnected, check the fol-
lowing items:
•
Clock setting (where fitted). For details, see “Ve-
hicle information display” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section, or the separately provided
NissanConnect Owner’s Manual, or the audio
device descriptions in “FM AM radio with CD
player (where fitted)” in the “4. Display screen,
heater and air conditioner, and audio system”
section.
•
Reset the desired radio stations to the preset
station buttons. For details, see the audio device
descriptions in the “4. Heater and air conditioner,
and audio system”.
Models with Stop/Start System
•
Ensure that the battery fitted is the special bat-
tery that is enhanced with regard to the charge-
discharge capacity and life performance. Avoid
using any other battery for the Stop/Start Sys-
tem, as this may cause early deterioration of the
battery or a malfunction of the Stop/Start Sys-
tem. It is recommended that a Genuine NISSAN
battery is fitted. For more information, contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
•
If the battery terminal is disconnected (for bat-
tery replacement, etc.) and then reconnected,
there may be some delay before the Stop/Start
System reactivates.
DI0137MAZ
NDI688Z
Indicator
NDI920Z
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
JUMP-STARTING
If jump-starting is necessary, see “Jump-starting” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the engine
does not start by jump starting, the battery may have
to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
INTEGRATED KEYFOB/INTELLIGENT
KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
•
Be careful not to touch a circuit board or a
battery terminal.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
An improperly disposed battery can harm the
environment. Always conform to local regula-
tions for battery disposal.
•
The Integrated keyfob/Intelligent Key is wa-
ter-resistant; however, if it does get wet, im-
mediately wipe it until it gets completely dry.
To replace the battery, open the Integrated
keyfob/Intelligent Key carefully in the
sequence shown in the illustration.
•
When changing the battery, do not let dust or
oil get on the Integrated keyfob/Intelligent
Key.
CAUTION
Always hold the battery by the edges, as shown.
Holding the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
SPA0784Z
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Replacement
1. Insert a flat blade screwdriver or a suitable tool
into the slot and twist it to open the lid.
2. Keeping the front
jA pointing downward as
shown lift the rear jB of the key.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
For models equipped with Integrated keyfob, use
the following battery type:
CR2032
•
Do not touch the internal circuit and electric
terminals as doing so could cause a malfunc-
tion.
•
Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of
the case, as illustrated.
4. Install the lid in the reverse order of removal and
press firmly.
5. Operate the buttons to check that the key works
correctly.
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if
you need assistance for battery replacement.
NDI1429
Integrated keyfob
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Replacement
1. Slide the locking pin to the unlock position.
2. Remove the key.
3. Insert a flat blade screwdriver or a suitable tool
into the slot and twist it to open the lid.
4. Replace the battery with a new one with the same
specifications.
For models equipped with Intelligent Key, use
the following battery type:
CR2032
•
Do not touch the internal circuit and electric
terminals as doing so could cause a malfunc-
tion.
•
Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of
the case, as illustrated.
5. Install the lid in the reverse order of removal.
6. Operate the buttons to check that the key works
correctly.
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
if you need assistance for battery replacement.
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
LOCK position. Otherwise the cooling fan or the
engine may start to operate suddenly.
1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in
poor condition or loose, have it replaced or ad-
justed by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition
and tension in accordance with the maintenance
schedule as shown in a separately provided War-
ranty Information and Maintenance booklet.
NDI1455
Intelligent Key
DRIVE BELTS
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off
and that the parking brake is engaged securely.
CAUTION
•
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove
the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can
cause damage to the spark plugs.
•
Always replace spark plugs with recom-
mended or equivalent ones.
Replace spark plugs according to the maintenance
schedule shown in the separately provided War-
ranty Information & Maintenance Booklet.
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop for servicing.
NOTE
Some maintenance procedures require the re-
moval of the air duct.
Be sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
LOCK position before working in the engine com-
partment.
SPARK PLUGS (Petrol engine
models)
AIR DUCT REMOVAL
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
1) Remove the clips.
2) Remove the bolt.
3) Push the top of the retaining clips together to
release the air duct.
4) Slide the air duct towards the front of the vehicle
to remove it.
Install the air duct in the reverse order of removal.
NDI1431
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WARNING
•
Operating the engine without the air cleaner
filter, can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner filter not only cleans the intake
air, it also stops flame if the engine backfires.
If the air cleaner filter is not installed and the
engine backfires, you could be burned.
•
Do not drive without the air cleaner filter.
•
Be careful when working on the engine with-
out the air cleaner filter.
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
The filter element jA should not be cleaned and
reused.
Replace it according to the maintenance schedule
shown in the separately provided Warranty Informa-
tion & Maintenance Booklet. When replacing the fil-
ter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and
the cover with a damp cloth.
DRY PAPER TYPE (where fitted)
Check the filter element jA to see if it is dirty. If it is
dirty, shake the element to remove dust.
Clean or replace it according to the maintenance
schedule shown in the separately provided War-
ranty Information & Maintenance Booklet. When
cleaning or replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the
air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.
NDI1430
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
CLEANING
If the windscreen or back door window is not clear
after using the window washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other material may be
on the blade or windscreen.
Clean the outside of the windscreen or back door
window with a washer solution or a mild detergent.
The windscreen or back door window is clean if
beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.
Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the
blade with clear water. If the windscreen or back
door window is still not clear after cleaning the
blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.
CAUTION
•
After wiper blade replacement, return the
wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it
may be damaged when the bonnet is opened.
•
Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass.
Otherwise, the arm may be damaged from
wind pressure.
•
Do not open the bonnet when the front wiper
is in the servicing position other wise it can
damage the paint surface of the bonnet.
FRONT WINDOW WIPER
REPLACEMENT
1. Pull up the wiper arm j1.
2. Press the lock pin j2 , then remove the wiper
blade as illustrated
j3.
3. Install the new wiper blade in the reverse order
of removal.
4. Return the wiper arm to its original position.
BACK DOOR WINDOW WIPER
REPLACEMENT
1. Lift the wiper arm j1.
2. Hold and rotate carefully the wiper blade clock-
wise until the blade becomes free j2.
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm
and snap it into place.
4. Return the wiper arm to its original position.
NDI1432
NDI1456
WIPER BLADES
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WINDSCREEN WASHER NOZZLE
If you wax the surface of the engine bonnet, be care-
ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
jA . This
may cause clogging or improper windscreen washer
operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with
a needle or small pin
jB.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
•
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage
rating than that specified on the fuse box
cover.
•
Never pull the harness or wires when discon-
necting the connector.
NDI892Z
NDI1433
Left hand side
NDI1434
Right hand side
FUSES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
•
Be careful not to damage the connector sup-
port bracket when disconnecting the connec-
tor.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check
for an open fuse.
The fuse box is located in the lower part of the
instrument panel at the driver’s side.
The affected circuits
j2 are shown on the inside of
the fuse box lid.
1. Make sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are in the “OFF” position.
2. Open the fuse box lid.
3. Locate and remove the fuse with the fuse puller
j1 (where fitted).
NOTE
The fuse puller is stored in the fuse box.
4. If the fuse is open
jA , replace it with a new fuse
jB.
5. Close the fuse box lid.
NOTE
If the new fuse opens again, after installing,
have the electrical system checked and re-
paired by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
Extended storage fuse switch
To reduce battery drain, the extended storage fuse
switch
j3 comes from the factory switched off. Prior
to delivery of your vehicle, the switch is pushed in
(switched on) and should always remain on.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, re-
move the extended storage fuse switch and check
for an open fuse.
NOTE
If the extended storage fuse switch malfunctions
or if the fuse is open, it is not necessary to re-
place the switch. In this case, remove the ex-
tended storage fuse switch and replace it with a
new fuse of the same rating.
How to remove the extended storage fuse
switch:
1. To remove the extended storage fuse switch, be
sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or LOCK
position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the “OFF”
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs found on each side of the
extended storage fuse switch
j3.
5. Pull the extended storage fuse switch straight
out from the fuse box.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage
rating than that specified on the fuse box cover.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check
for an open fuse.
NDI1089
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
1. Make sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are in the “OFF” position.
2. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet
release” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
3. Remove the air duct, see “Air duct removal” ear-
lier in this section.
4. Remove the fusible link covers.
5. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
6. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller (where fit-
ted). The fuse puller is located in the fuse box of
the passenger compartment.
7. If the fuse is open
jA , replace it with a new fuse
jB.
8. Install the fusible link covers.
9. Install the air duct in the reverse order of re-
moval.
10. Close the bonnet.
NOTE
If the new fuse opens again, after installing,
have the electrical system checked and re-
paired by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
NDI1493
LIGHTS
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
HEADLIGHTS
LED headlight (where fitted)
The LED headlight is a projector style which uses a
LED module without serviceable parts.
CAUTION
•
To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to
modify or disassemble the LED headlights as-
sembly.
•
If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop.
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
CAUTION
•
High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside
the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the
glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is
dropped.
•
When handling the bulb, DO NOT TOUCH THE
GLASS ENVELOPE.
•
Use the same number type and wattage as
originally installed.
•
Aiming is usually not necessary after replac-
ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-
essary, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop.
•
Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight
reflector for a long period of time as dust,
moisture or smoke may enter the headlight
body and affect the performance of the head-
light.
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb
can be replaced from inside the engine compart-
ment without removing the headlight assembly.
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop, if
you need assistance for bulb replacement.
High beam bulb replacement:
1. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet
release” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
2. Disconnect the negative (—) battery cable.
3. When the broken bulb is located in the headlight
assembly under the air duct, carefully remove the
air duct, see “Air duct removal” earlier in this
section.
4. Remove the connector from the back of the cover
assembly
j1.
5. Turn the cover assembly 1/4 of a turn in the anti
clockwise direction and remove the cover by dis-
connecting the internal connector
j2.
6. Push and turn the retaining pin to loosen it j3.
7. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or ro-
tate the bulb when removing it.
8. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of re-
moval.
9. Re-install the covers internal connector on the
back of the bulb.
10. Re-install the cover by turning the cover assem-
bly 1/4 of a turn in the clockwise direction.
11. Re-install the connector on the back of the cover
assembly.
12. Where removed (step 3.), re-install the air duct,
bolt and clips in the reverse order of removal.
13. Reconnect the negative (—) battery cable and
close the bonnet.
Low beam bulb replacement:
1. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet
release” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
2. Disconnect the negative (—) battery cable.
3. When the broken bulb is located in the headlight
assembly under the air duct, carefully remove the
air duct, see “Air duct removal” earlier in this
section.
4. Remove the connector from the back of the bulb
assembly
j4.
5. Turn the bulb assembly 1/8 of a turn in the anti
clockwise direction and remove the headlight
bulb
j5.
6. Install the new bulb in the headlight body by turn-
ing it clockwise until it is securely sealed within
the headlight body.
7. Re-install the connector on the back of the bulb
assembly.
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8. Where removed (step 3.), re-install the air duct,
bolt and clips in the reverse order of removal.
9. Reconnect the negative (—) battery cable and
close the bonnet.
NOTE
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. The fog
is caused by a temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens. This is not
a malfunction. If large droplets can be seen, then
contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W)
Front combination light
Headlight (Low beam: H11
type)
55
Headlight (High beam: H7
type)
60
Headlight (Low or high beam:
LED type, where fitted) *1
LED
Front turn signal light 21
Front side light *1 LED
Front fog light (H8 type, where
fitted) *1
35
Side turn signal light *1 LED
Rear combination light
Turn signal light 21
Stop/Tail light *1 LED
Reverse light *1 16
High-mounted stop light *1 LED
Number plate light 5
Rear fog light 21
*1: If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage
(W)
Room light/Map lights (where fitted)
Foot well light (where fitted)
5
3
Room light — rear (where fitted) 5
Reading lights — rear (where fitted) 8
Luggage compartment light 5
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
LIGHT LOCATIONS
j
1
Side turn signal light
j2
Room light/Map lights (where fitted)
j3
Low beam headlight
j4
High beam headlight
j5
Front side light
j6
Front turn signal light
j7
Front fog light (where fitted)
j8
Footwell light (where fitted)
j9
Room light (where fitted)
j10
High mounted stop light
j11
Number plate light
j12
Rear fog light (where fitted)
j13
Reverse light
j14
Stop light
j15
Tail light
Replacing procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover.
m
REMOVE
m
INSTALL
NDI1453
Light locations
NDI707
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
NDI1437
Front turn signal light
NDI740Z
Room light / Map lights (where fitted)
NDI739Z
Room light — rear (where fitted)
NDI933
Reading light — rear (where fitted)
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
NDI1097
Foot well light (where fitted)
NDI1457
Luggage compartment light
NDI1458
Number plate light
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
In case of a flat tyre, see “Flat tyre” in the “6. In case
of emergency” section.
TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE
Periodically check the tyre pressure (including the
spare tyre). An incorrect tyre pressure may ad-
versely affect tyre life and vehicle handling. After
adjusting the tyre pressure, perform a TPMS tem-
perature calibration (see “TPMS temperature
calibration” in the “5. Starting and driving” section).
NOTE
Incorrectly inflated tyres can also lead to poor
steering ability and make the driver suspect a
steering problem: keep the vehicle’s tyres in-
flated to the correct pressure at all times.
The tyre pressure should be checked when tyres
are COLD. Tyres are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for three or more hours, or
driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile). COLD tyre pres-
sures are shown on the tyre placard affixed to the
driver’s side centre pillar.
Insufficient pressure can lead to an overheating of
the tyre and subsequent internal damage. At high
speeds, this could result in tread separation and
even bursting of the tyre.
TYPES OF TYRES
CAUTION
•
When changing or replacing tyres, be sure all
four tyres are of the same type (i.e., summer,
all season or snow) and construction.
NDI1480
Reverse light, and/or rear fog light (where fitted)
NDI1438
Rear turn signal light
WHEELS AND TYRES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
•
A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop may
be able to help you with information about
tyre type, size, speed rating and availability.
•
Replacement tyres may have a lower speed
rating than the factory equipped tyres, and
may not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rat-
ing of the tyre.
All season tyres
NISSAN specifies all season tyres on some models
to provide good performance for use all year around,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All season
tyres are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tyre sidewall. Snow tyres have better snow
traction than all season tyres and may be more ap-
propriate in some areas.
Summer tyres
NISSAN specifies summer tyres as standard fit.
These tyres provide superior performance under
typical mild weather conditions.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW
or ALL SEASON tyres on all four wheels.
Snow tyres
If snow tyres are needed, it is necessary to select
tyres equivalent in size and load rating to the original
equipment tyres. If you do not, it can adversely af-
fect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tyres will have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tyres and may not match the
potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the
maximum speed rating of the tyre.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tyres
may be used. However, some provinces and states
prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tyres. Skid and trac-
tion capabilities of studded snow tyres, on wet or
dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-stud-
ded snow tyres.
SNOW CHAINS
Use of snow chains may be prohibited in some ar-
eas. Check the local laws before installing snow
chains. When installing snow chains, make sure they
are of proper size for the tyres on your vehicle and
are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s
suggestions. Use chain tensioners when recom-
mended by the snow chain manufacturer to ensure
a tight fit. Loose end links of the snow chain must be
secured or removed to prevent the possibility of
whipping action damage to the fenders or undercar-
riage.
In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,
your vehicle can be damaged and/or vehicle han-
dling and performance may be adversely affected.
Snow chains must be installed only on the front
wheels and not on the rear wheels.
CAUTION
•
Never install snow chains on a temporary-use
or small size spare tyre.
•
Do not drive with snow chains on paved roads
which are clear of snow. Driving with chains in
such conditions can cause damage to the
various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress. When driving on clear paved
roads, be sure to change to 2WD mode, see
“Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
TYRE ROTATION
NISSAN recommends that tyres be rotated every
10,000 km (6,000 miles) for Two-Wheel Drive
(2WD) vehicles and 5,000 km (3,000 miles) for
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles. After rotating
tyres and adjusting the tyre pressure, perform a
TPMS temperature calibration (see “TPMS tem-
perature calibration” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section).
See “Flat tyre” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec-
tion for tyre replacing procedures.
NDI762Z
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WARNING
•
After rotating the tyres, adjust the tyre pres-
sure and perform a TPMS temperature cali-
bration.
•
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle
has been driven for the first 1,000 km (600
miles) (also in cases of a flat tyre, etc.).
•
Do not include the temporary-use spare tyre
in the tyre rotation.
•
Incorrect tyre selection, fitting, care or main-
tenance can affect vehicle safety with risk of
accident and injury. If in doubt, consult a
NISSAN dealer or the tyre manufacturer.
TYRE WEAR AND DAMAGE
Tyres should be periodically inspected for wear,
cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If
excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are
found, the tyre should be replaced.
The original tyres have a built-in tread wear indica-
tor
j1 . When the wear indicator is visible, the tyre
should be replaced.
The wear indicator locations are indicated by the
location marks
j2.
TYRE AGE
Remember tyre age. Never use a tyre over six years
old, regardless of whether they have been used or
not.
Tyres degrade with age as well as the use they are
subjected to. Have the tyres checked and balanced
frequently by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop. Report all accidents where the tyre is knocked
even if it is minor.
CHANGING TYRES AND WHEELS
WARNING
Do not install a deformed wheel or tyre even if it
has been repaired. Such wheels or tyres could
have structural damage and could fail without
warning.
When replacing a tyre, use the same size, speed
rating and load carrying capacity as originally
equipped. Recommended types and sizes are men-
tioned in “Wheels and Tyres” in the “9. Technical
information” section.
The use of tyres other than those recommended or
the mixed use of tyres of different brands, construc-
tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling,
ground clearance, body-to-tyre clearance, snow
chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight
aim and bumper height.
WARNING
Some of these effects may lead to accidents and
could result in serious personal injury.
If the wheels are changed for any reason, always
replace with wheels which have the same offset
dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause
early tyre wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling
characteristics and/or interference with the brake
discs. Such interference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) MODELS
CAUTION
•
Always use tyres of the same size, brand, con-
struction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and
tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do
so may result in a circumference difference
between tyres on the front and rear axles
which will cause excessive tyre wear and may
damage the transmission, transfer case and
differential gears.
•
ONLY use spare tyres specified for the four
wheel drive (4WD) models.
SDI1663Z
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
WHEEL BALANCE
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and
tyre life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out
of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as
required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with
the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front
wheels on the vehicle could lead to transmission
damage.
SPARE TYRE
The temporary-use spare wheel/tyre can be identi-
fied by the temporary-use spare tyre label which
contrasts to the standard road wheels. If in doubt,
contact a NISSAN dealer, qualified workshop or
see “Spare tyre” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section.
Emergency tyre puncture repair kit
(where fitted)
The emergency tyre puncture repair kit is supplied
to the vehicle instead of a spare tyre. The repair kit
must be used for temporarily fixing a minor tyre
puncture. After using the repair kit, see a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as possible for
tyre inspection and repair/replacement.
CAUTION
Do not use the emergency tyre puncture repair
kit under the following conditions. Contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop or profes-
sional road assistance.
•
when the sealant has passed its expiration
date (shown on the label attached to the seal-
ant bottle)
•
when the cut or the puncture is approximately
4 mm (0.16 in) or longer
•
when the side of the tyre is damaged
•
when the vehicle has been driven with a con-
siderable loss of air from the tyre
•
when the tyre is completely displaced inside
or outside the rim
•
when the tyre rim is damaged
•
when two or more tyres are flat
See “Spare tyre” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for more details.
CARE OF WHEELS
For details, see “Care of wheels” in the “7. Appear-
ance and care” section.
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
9 Technical informationTechnical information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ........... 9-2
Fuel information .................................................. 9-4
Recommended SAE viscosity number................. 9-4
Engine ..................................................................... 9-5
Wheels and Tyres.................................................... 9-5
Dimensions.............................................................. 9-6
When travelling or transferring your registration to
another country........................................................ 9-6
Vehicle identification ................................................ 9-6
Vehicle identification plate................................... 9-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) (chassis
number).............................................................. 9-7
Engine serial number .......................................... 9-7
Tyre placard ....................................................... 9-8
Air conditioner specification label (where
fitted).................................................................. 9-8
Approval numbers.................................................... 9-8
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS), Intelligent
or remote keyless system.................................... 9-8
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(Transmitter) ....................................................... 9-9
The following values are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different from them. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (approximate)
Recommended specifications
Litre Imp measure
Fuel 55 or 65 12.1gal or 14-1/4 gal See “Fuel information” later in this section
.
Engine oil (Refill)
With oil filter replacement
HRA2DDT 4.63 4–1/8 qt
HRA2DDT engine:
Genuine NISSAN engine oil 5W40 *1
ACEA A3/B4 *1
MR20DD engine:
Genuine NISSAN engine oil 5W40 *1
ACEA A3/B4 *1
Genuine NISSAN engine oil 5W30 DPF *1
ACEA C4 *1, SAE 5W30 Low SAPS
R9M engine:
Genuine NISSAN engine oil 5W30 DPF *1
ACEA C4 *1, SAE 5W30 Low SAPS
MR20DD 4.4 3–7/8 qt
K9K 4 6*5 4 qt*5
R9M 5.5 4–7/8 qt
Without oil filter replacement
HRA2DDT 4.3 3–3/4 qt
MR20DD 4.2 3–3/4 qt
K9K 4.4 *5 3–7/8 qt *5
R9M 5.1 4–1/2 qt
Engine coolant
Genuine NISSAN engine coolant or equivalent in its quality *2
HRA2DDT 6.4 5–5/8 qt
MR20DD 7.1 6–1/4 qt
K9K 6.3 5–1/2 qt
R9M
MT models 7.3 6–3/8 qt
XTRONIC models 7.9 7 qt
Reservoir Max level 0.57 4/7 qt
Differential gear oil 0.55 1/2 qt
Genuine NISSAN Differential oil or API GL5. viscosity SAE
80W90
Transfer gear oil
MR20 0.33 3/8 qt
Genuine NISSAN Differential oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W90 or
PI GL5. viscosity SAE 80W90
R9M 0.36 3/8 qt
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS
9-2 Technical information
Capacity (approximate)
Recommended specifications
Litre Imp measure
Manual transaxle gear oil
R9M 4WD 1.7 1–1/2 qt
NISSAN MT-XZ Gear Oil Sports and Off-Road Vehicles or API GL-4 Viscosity
SAE 75W-85
R9M 2WD 1.7 1–1/2 qt
K9K
MR20
HRA2DDT
2.0 1–3/4 qt NISSAN MT-XZ Gear Oil TL/JR Type or API GL-4 Viscosity SAE 75W-80
XTRONIC Transmission (CVT) fluid
R9M with 2WD – –
Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid NS-3 *3 *4
HRA2DDT with 2WD – –
MR20 with 2WD – –
MR20 with 4WD – –
Brake & clutch fluid
Refill to the correct level according
to the instructions in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
Genuine NISSAN brake fluid or equivalent. DOT 4 (US FMVSS No. 116)
Multi-purpose grease – – NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant – –
HFO-1234yf (for Europe)
HFC-134a (R-134a) (except for Europe)
Air conditioning system lubricants – –
ND-12 oil or equivalent (for Europe)
ND-8 oil (Except for Europe)
*1: For further details, see “Recommended SAE viscosity number” later in this section.
*2: Use Genuine NISSAN engine coolant, or equivalent in its quality, in order to avoid possible aluminium corrosion within the engine cooling system caused by the use of non-genuine
engine coolant. Note that any repairs for the incidents within the engine cooling system while using non-genuine engine coolant may not be covered by the warranty, even
if such incidents occurred during the warranty period. Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for more information regarding the coolant type and capacity.
*3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the war-
ranty.
*4: Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for details or servicing.
*5: K9K engine with DPF.
Technical information 9-3
FUEL INFORMATION
Petrol engine
CAUTION
Do not use leaded petrol. Using leaded petrol will
damage the catalytic converter.
MR20DD engine:
Use UNLEADED REGULAR petrol with an octane
rating of at least 91 (RON).
HRA2DDT engine:
Use UNLEADED PREMIUM petrol with an octane
rating of at least 95 (RON).
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel above 51 cetane and with less than 10
ppm of sulphur (EN590 and Euro 5 specification)
must be used.
If two types of diesel fuel are available, use summer
or winter fuel properly according to the following
temperature conditions.
•
Above –7°C (20°F)...Summer type diesel fuel.
•
Below–7°C(20°F)...Wintertypedieselfuel.
If you are in any doubt, please consult a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop.
CAUTION
•
Do not use home heating oil, petrol or other
alternate fuels in the diesel engine, this can
cause engine damage.
•
Do not add petrol or other alternate fuels to
diesel fuel.
•
Do not use summer fuel at temperatures be-
low −7°C (20°F). Cold temperatures will cause
wax to form in the fuel and may prevent the
engine from running smoothly.
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY
NUMBER
Petrol engine oil
5W-40 is preferable. If 5W-40 is not available,
select the viscosity from the chart, that is suit-
able for the outside temperature range.
Diesel engine oil
•
K9K engine with DPF:
ONLY use 5W30 Low SAPS
•
R9M engine:
ONLY use 5W30 DPF Low SAPS
STI0589
Petrol engine oil
9-4 Technical information
Unit: mm (in)
Item Size Offset
Road
wheel
Steel
16 x 6.5J
40
(1.57)
16x4T*1
Aluminium*
17 x 7.0J
18 x 7.0J
19 x 7.0J
Tyre size
Conventional
215/65R16
215/60R17*
215/55R18*
225/45R19*
Spare
Conventional *
T145/90R16 *1
* : where fitted
*1: Temporary-use spare tyre (where fitted)
Model MR20DD K9K HRA2DDT R9M
Type Petrol, 4—cycle Diesel, 4–cycle Petrol, 4–cycle Diesel, 4–cycle
Cylinder arrangement 4–cylinder in–line 4–cylinder in–line 4–cylinder in–line 4–cylinder in–line
Bore x Stroke mm (in)
84 x 90.1
(3.31 x 3.55)
76.0 x 80.5
(2.992 x 3.169)
72.2 x 73.1
(2.84 x 2.88)
80 x 79.5
(3.15 x 3.13)
Displacement
cm
3
(cu
in)
1,997 (121.86) 1,461 (89.15) 1,197 (73.0) 1,598 (97.51)
Idling speed rpm
MT
700 ± 50
850±50 * 850±50
XTRONIC in N
position
———
Ignition timing
(BTDC)
degree
MT
9±5°
———
XTRONIC in N
position
———
Spark plug Standard PLZKAR6A–11 — * —
Spark plug gap mm (in) 1.1 (0.043) — * —
Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing belt Timing chain Timing chain
* Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for details.
ENGINE WHEELS AND TYRES
Technical information 9-5
Unit: mm (in)
Model mm (in.)
Overall length 2WD/ 4WD 4379 (172.3)
Overall width 2WD/ 4WD 1806 (71.1)
Overall height 2WD 1590 (62.6)
4WD 1595 (62.8)
2WD 1624 (63.9)*1
4WD 1630 (64.2)*1
Front tread 2WD/ 4WD 1560 (61.4)
Rear tread 2WD 1560 (61.4)
2WD*2/4WD 1550 (61)
Wheelbase 2WD/ 4WD 2646 (104.2)
*1 : with roof rail
*2: models with Independent Multi-link type suspen-
sion (where fitted)
When planning to travel in another country, you
should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with too low octane/cetane rating may
cause engine damage. Therefore, avoid taking your
vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not avail-
able.
When transferring your vehicle registration to an-
other country, check with the appropriate authori-
ties that the vehicle complies with the requirements
as it may not be possible to adapt it. In some cases,
a vehicle cannot meet the legal requirements and in
other cases, it may be necessary to modify the ve-
hicle to meet specific laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission
control and safety standards vary according to the
country; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience
when the vehicle is taken and registered into an-
other country. The necessary modifications,
transportation and registration are the owner’s
responsibility.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE
The plate is affixed on the B pillar as shown.
Built date
Built date is stamped on the vehicle identification
plate or on a build date plate. The built date means
the calendar month and the year in which the body
shell and power train sub-assemblies are conjoined
and the vehicle is driven or moved from the produc-
tion line.
NTI266
DIMENSIONS WHEN TRAVELLING OR TRANS-
FERRING YOUR REGISTRATION
TO ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
9-6 Technical information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) (chassis number)
The VIN number is located as shown.
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
NTI267
NTI265
HRA2DDT engine
NTI099Z
K9K engine
NTI193
R9M engine
NTI097Z
MR20DD engine
Technical information 9-7
TYRE PLACARD
1
Right Hand Drive models
2
Left Hand Drive models
The cold tyre pressure is shown on the tyre placard
fixed to the side of the driver’s side centre pillar.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL (where fitted)
Open the bonnet. The label is affixed at the front
section of the bonnet.
All radio frequency or audio frequency products fit-
ted to the NISSAN range during production con-
form to the requirements of the R&TTE Directive.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
(NATS), INTELLIGENT OR REMOTE
KEYLESS SYSTEM
Remote keyless entry system
(where fitted)
Hereby, ALPS ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. declares that
Keyless Transmitter, model TWB1G767 is in com-
pliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
CAUTION
•
Do not expose to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
•
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type.
m
Intelligent Key system (where fitted)
•
Intelligent Key (where fitted):
– Manufacturer name:
Continental Automotive GmbH
– Model name:
S180144104
•
Alarm (Siren) system (where fitted):
– 116RAI-002868
– 116RI-002869
NTI268
APPROVAL NUMBERS
9-8 Technical information
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)
immobilizer
Hereby, Continental Automotive GmbH declares
that this ANT ASSY-IMMOBILISER model
S180192102 is in compliance with the essential re-
quirements and other relevant provisions of Direc-
tive 1999/5/EC.
m
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (Transmitter)
Hereby, Continental Automotive GmbH, declares
that this S180052048/S180052050 is in compli-
ance with the essential requirements and other rel-
evant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC
NTI269 NTI250
Technical information 9-9
NTI251
9-10 Technical information
NOTE
Technical information 9-11
NOTE
9-12 Technical information
NOTE
Technical information 9-13
NOTE
9-14 Technical information
NOTE
Technical information 9-15
NOTE
9-16 Technical information
10 IndexIndex
A
Active engine brake ............................................................. 5-63
Active ride control ............................................................... 5-64
Active trace control ............................................................. 5-62
Air cleaner filter ................................................................... 8-23
Air conditioner
– Air conditioner filter .............................................. 4-19, 4-22
– Air conditioner specification label ..................................... 9-8
– Automatic air conditioner ............................................... 4-20
– Heater and air conditioner .............................................. 4-15
– Manual air conditioner ................................................... 4-16
– Servicing air conditioner ....................................... 4-19, 4-22
Air duct removal .................................................................. 8-21
Alarm system ...................................................................... 3-12
Antenna .............................................................................. 4-23
Anti-hijack – unlock mode ...................................................... 3-5
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ......................................... 5-59
Anti-Theft System (NISSAN) ................................................ 3-13
Approval numbers ................................................................. 9-8
Armrest ................................................................................. 1-5
Around View Monitor ............................................................. 4-4
– Around View Monitor settings ........................................ 4-13
– Moving object detection (MOD) ..................................... 4-12
– Operating tips ............................................................... 4-13
Around view monitor operation .............................................. 4-7
Audible reminders, warning/indicator lights ............................ 2-4
Audio
– Audio operation precautions .......................................... 4-23
– Audio system ................................................................. 4-23
– AUX socket ................................................................... 4-30
– Bluetooth® audio streaming main operation ................... 4-34
– FM AM radio with CD player ......................................... 4-24
– iPod® player operation .................................................. 4-31
– NissanConnect .............................................................. 4-38
– Steering-wheel switch for audio control ......................... 4-38
– USB Memory operation ................................................. 4-30
B
Battery ....................................................................... 5-66, 8-16
– Caution label ................................................................. 8-16
– Integrated keyfob battery replacement ........................... 8-18
– Intelligent Key battery discharge .................................... 5-14
– Intelligent Key battery replacement ................................. 8-18
– Vehicle battery ............................................................... 8-16
Before starting the engine ..................................................... 5-2
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
– BSW driving situations .................................................. 5-32
– BSW system operation .................................................. 5-30
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system ..................................... 5-30
Bluetooth® .......................................................................... 4-39
– Bluetooth® mobile phone feature .................................. 4-39
– Bluetooth® operation .................................................... 4-32
– Bluetooth® settings ....................................................... 4-32
Bonnet release .................................................................... 3-14
Boot .................................................................................... 2-47
Brake .................................................................................. 8-13
– Brake booster ............................................................... 8-14
– Brake fluid ..................................................................... 8-14
– Brake precautions ......................................................... 5-58
– Brake system ................................................................ 5-58
– Checking brake pedal ................................................... 8-13
– Checking parking brake ................................................. 8-13
– Parking brake ................................................................ 3-16
– Trailer brakes ................................................................ 5-55
C
Cable slots .......................................................................... 2-43
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ......................... 9-2
– Fuel information ............................................................... 9-4
Car phone or CB radio ........................................................ 4-45
Care when driving ............................................................... 5-10
Cargo compartment
– Cargo floor .................................................................... 2-47
CENTRE mark on rear centre seat ...................................... 1-12
Changing
– Changing engine coolant ................................................. 8-6
– Changing engine oil ......................................................... 8-9
– Changing engine oil filter ............................................... 8-10
– Changing tyres and wheels ........................................... 8-35
Chassis control ................................................................... 5-62
Checking
– Checking brake pedal ................................................... 8-13
– Checking engine coolant level ......................................... 8-6
– Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-8
– Checking parking brake ................................................. 8-13
Child restraint anchorage .................................................... 1-22
Child restraint and ISOFIX information ................................. 1-16
Child restraint installation using 3-point type seat belt .......... 1-25
Child restraint installation using ISOFIX ............................... 1-23
Child restraint systems (CRS)
– ISOFIX .......................................................................... 1-17
– Recommended .............................................................. 1-17
– Suitable ......................................................................... 1-17
Child restraints .................................................................... 1-15
Child safety .................................................................. 1-14, 1-9
Cleaning
– Alloy wheels .................................................................... 7-3
– Chrome parts .................................................................. 7-3
– Exterior ............................................................................ 7-2
– Glass ....................................................................... 7-3, 7-5
– Interior ............................................................................ 7-4
– Plastic parts .................................................................... 7-5
– Rear-view camera lens .................................................... 7-3
– Removing spots ............................................................... 7-2
– Underbody ...................................................................... 7-3
Clutch fluid .......................................................................... 8-14
Coat hooks ......................................................................... 2-44
Cold weather driving ........................................................... 5-66
Console box ........................................................................ 2-43
Continuously variable transmission
– Continuously variable transmission fluid ......................... 8-13
– Driving with continuously variable transmission ............. 5-18
Coolant
– Changing engine coolant ................................................. 8-6
– Checking engine coolant level ......................................... 8-6
– Engine coolant ............................................................... 5-66
– Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-3
– Engine cooling system ..................................................... 8-6
Corrosion protection .................................................... 5-67, 7-5
– Environmental factors ...................................................... 7-5
Cruise control ..................................................................... 5-36
Cruise control system operations ......................................... 5-37
CVT
– Driving with XTRONIC transmission .............................. 5-18
D
Defogger switch
– Outside mirror defogger ................................................ 2-35
– Rear window defogger .................................................. 2-35
10-2 Index
Difference between predictive and actual distances ............... 4-9
Dimensions ........................................................................... 9-6
Door locks ............................................................................ 3-8
– Back door ..................................................................... 3-11
– Child safety rear door locks ........................................... 3-11
– Locking/unlocking with the key — vehicle dead battery .... 3-9
– Power door lock switch ................................................. 3-10
– Remote keyless entry system ........................................... 3-4
– Super Lock system .......................................................... 3-8
– When leaving the vehicle ............................................... 3-10
Drive belts ........................................................................... 8-20
Driving
– Care when driving ......................................................... 5-10
– Cold weather driving ..................................................... 5-66
– Driving four-wheel drive (4WD) safely ............................ 5-28
– Driving on wet road ....................................................... 5-10
– Driving the vehicle ......................................................... 5-17
– Driving under winter conditions ...................................... 5-10
– Driving with manual transmission ................................... 5-17
– On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ................. 5-9
– Precautions when starting and driving .............................. 5-3
– Stop/Start System ......................................................... 5-22
E
ECO mode system .............................................................. 5-65
Electric power steering system ............................................ 5-57
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system ...................... 5-60
– ESP OFF switch ........................................................... 5-61
Emergency tyre puncture repair kit ............................... 6-8, 8-36
Emergency/mechanical key ................................................... 3-3
Engine
– Before starting the engine ................................................ 5-2
– Changing engine coolant ................................................. 8-6
– Changing engine oil ......................................................... 8-9
– Changing engine oil filter ............................................... 8-10
– Checking engine coolant level ......................................... 8-6
– Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-8
– Data ................................................................................ 9-5
– Engine cold start period ................................................. 5-10
– Engine compartment .............................................. 0-11, 8-5
– Engine coolant ............................................................... 5-66
– Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-3
– Engine cooling system ..................................................... 8-6
– Engine oil ........................................................................ 8-8
– Engine overheat ............................................................. 6-13
– Engine serial number ....................................................... 9-7
– Fuel filter (Diesel engine models) ................................... 8-13
– Starting engine .............................................................. 5-15
Exhaust gas (Carbon Monoxide) ............................................ 5-3
Exterior lights ...................................................................... 8-29
F
Filter
– Air cleaner filter ............................................................. 8-23
– Air conditioner filter .............................................. 4-19, 4-22
– Fuel filter (Diesel engine models) ................................... 8-13
Floor mats ............................................................................. 7-4
Fluid
– Brake and clutch fluid .................................................... 8-14
– Continuously variable transmission fluid ......................... 8-13
– Window washer/headlight cleaner fluid .......................... 8-15
Fog light
– Front fog light ................................................................ 2-38
– Rear fog light ................................................................. 2-39
Forward emergency braking system .................................... 5-40
Four-wheel drive (4WD) ...................................................... 5-26
– Driving four-wheel drive (4WD) safely ............................ 5-28
– Four-wheel drive (4WD) model (Tyres) .......................... 8-35
– Four-wheel drive mode indicator light ............................. 5-28
Index 10-3
Fuel
– Bleeding the fuel system ................................................ 8-13
– Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................... 9-2
– Draining water (Fuel filter) .............................................. 8-13
– Fuel filter (Diesel engine models) ................................... 8-13
– Fuel gauge ...................................................................... 2-2
– Fuel information ............................................................... 9-4
Fuel filler lid
– Cap ............................................................................... 3-15
– Opener lever ................................................................. 3-15
Fuses .................................................................................. 8-25
– Engine compartment ...................................................... 8-26
– Passenger compartment ................................................ 8-25
G
Gauges
– Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-3
– Fuel gauge ...................................................................... 2-2
– Meters and gauges .......................................................... 2-2
Glass roof ........................................................................... 2-49
– Sunshade operation ...................................................... 2-50
Glove box ............................................................................ 2-42
Guide lines ............................................................................ 4-7
H
Hazard warning flasher switch ............................................... 6-2
Head restraint
– Adjustment ...................................................................... 1-6
Headlight
– Headlight aiming control switch ..................................... 2-39
– Headlight and turn signal switch .................................... 2-36
– Headlight cleaner .......................................................... 2-40
– Headlight switch ............................................................ 2-36
– Headlights (bulb replacement) ....................................... 8-28
– Replacement (bulb) ....................................................... 8-28
– Turn signal switch .......................................................... 2-38
Heated seats ....................................................................... 2-41
Heater and air conditioner ................................................... 4-15
Hill Start Assist (HSA) system ............................................. 5-64
Horn ................................................................................... 2-41
How to adjust the screen view ............................................. 4-13
I
Ignition
– Ignition switch ............................................................... 5-11
Ignition switch ..................................................................... 5-12
Ignition switch positions ...................................................... 5-13
Immobilizer
– NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) ............................... 3-12
Indicator lights ....................................................................... 2-4
Injured persons ................................................................... 1-10
Inside rear-view mirror ......................................................... 3-18
Instrument and control layout .......................................... 0-8, 0-9
Integrated keyfob (remote control system) ............................. 3-4
– Battery replacement ...................................................... 8-18
– Ignition switch ............................................................... 5-11
– Keyfob operation failure ................................................... 3-5
– Locking the doors ............................................................ 3-5
– Setting the unlock mode .................................................. 3-5
– Super Lock system .......................................................... 3-5
– Unlocking the doors ......................................................... 3-5
Intelligent Key operating range ............................................... 3-6
Intelligent Key system ................................................... 3-6, 5-12
– Anti-hijack mode .............................................................. 3-7
– Battery replacement ...................................................... 8-18
– Intelligent Key battery discharge .................................... 5-14
– Locking/unlocking ........................................................... 3-7
10-4 Index
– Starting the engine .......................................................... 3-8
Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) ............................................. 5-46
Interior lights .............................................................. 2-50, 8-29
iPod® player operation ........................................................ 4-31
ISOFIX ................................................................................ 1-19
ISOFIX child restraint system .............................................. 1-21
J
Jump-starting .............................................................. 6-11, 8-18
K
Key ....................................................................................... 3-2
– Immobilizer ...................................................................... 3-2
– Integrated keyfob (remote control system) ....................... 3-4
– Intelligent Key battery discharge .................................... 5-14
– Intelligent Key operating range ......................................... 3-6
– Intelligent Key system ............................................. 3-6, 5-12
– Key positions (Ignition switch) ........................................ 5-11
– NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) ................................. 3-2
– NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) key ........................... 3-2
– Radio approval number and information ........................... 9-8
– Remote keyless entry system ........................................... 3-4
– Using Intelligent Key system ............................................ 3-6
L
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) .......................................... 5-33
– LDW system operation .................................................. 5-34
Legal requirements .............................................................. 1-15
Light
– Exterior lights ................................................................. 8-29
– Fog light switch ............................................................. 2-38
– Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................... 6-2
– Headlight aiming control switch ..................................... 2-39
– Headlight and turn signal switch .................................... 2-36
– Headlight cleaner .......................................................... 2-40
– Headlight switch ............................................................ 2-36
– Headlights ..................................................................... 8-28
– Interior lights ........................................................ 2-50, 8-29
– LED headlight ................................................................ 8-28
– Light locations ............................................................... 8-30
– Luggage compartment ................................................... 2-51
– Map lights ..................................................................... 2-50
– Rear room/reading light ................................................. 2-51
– Trailer direction indicator light ........................................ 5-56
– Turn signal switch .......................................................... 2-38
– Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ................ 2-4
Lock
– Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ................................... 5-59
– Back door lock .............................................................. 3-11
– Child safety rear door locks ........................................... 3-11
– Door locks ....................................................................... 3-8
– Power door lock switch ................................................. 3-10
– Steering lock ........................................................ 5-11, 5-14
– Super Lock system .......................................................... 3-8
– Unlocking with inside door handle .................................. 3-10
Luggage compartment
– Luggage floor ................................................................ 2-47
M
Maintenance
– Camera unit maintenance .............................................. 5-33
– General maintenance ....................................................... 8-2
– Maintenance precautions ................................................. 8-4
– Maintenance requirements ............................................... 8-2
– Multi-sensing camera unit .............................................. 5-35
Manual transmission
– Driving with manual transmission ................................... 5-17
Index 10-5
Map lights ........................................................................... 2-50
Maximum load limits (for Australia) ....................................... 5-55
Mechanical/emergency key ................................................... 3-3
Meter and gauges
– Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-3
– Fuel gauge ...................................................................... 2-2
– Speedometer .................................................................. 2-2
– Tachometer ..................................................................... 2-2
Meters and gauges ............................................................... 2-2
Mirror .................................................................................. 3-18
– Automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror ....................... 3-19, 7-5
– Inside rear-view mirror ................................................... 3-18
– Outside rear-view mirrors .............................................. 3-19
– Vanity mirror .................................................................. 3-20
Mobile phone integration for FM AM radio with CD player ... 4-39
Monitor display
– Monitor display’s maintenance ......................................... 7-4
– Rear-view monitor ............................................................ 4-2
Moving object detection (MOD) ........................................... 4-12
N
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) .............................. 3-2, 5-12
– NATS key ........................................................................ 3-2
– NATS security indicator light .......................................... 3-13
– Radio approval number and information ........................... 9-8
O
Odometer/twin trip odometer ................................................ 2-2
Oil
– Changing engine oil ......................................................... 8-9
– Changing engine oil filter ............................................... 8-10
– Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-8
– Engine oil ........................................................................ 8-8
– Recommended lubricants ................................................ 9-2
– Recommended SAE viscosity number .............................. 9-4
On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ....................... 5-9
Overheat
– Engine overheat ............................................................. 6-13
P
Parcel shelf
– Installation ..................................................................... 2-45
– Removal ........................................................................ 2-45
Parking ............................................................................... 5-43
– Ultrasonic parking sensors ............................................. 5-45
Parking brake switch ........................................................... 3-16
Phone
– Bluetooth® .................................................................... 4-39
– Mobile phone integration for FM AM radio with CD
player ............................................................................ 4-39
Power
– Electric power steering system ...................................... 5-57
– Power door lock switch ................................................. 3-10
– Power outlet .................................................................. 2-42
Pre-tensioner seat belt system ............................................. 1-13
Precautions
– Audio operation precautions .......................................... 4-23
– Brake precautions ......................................................... 5-58
– Cruise control precautions ............................................. 5-36
– Maintenance precautions ................................................. 8-4
– On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ................. 5-9
– Operating precautions (trailer) ....................................... 5-54
– Precautions on push-button ignition switch operation ..... 5-12
– Precautions on Supplemental Restraint System ............. 1-29
– Safety precautions ........................................................... 4-2
– Towing precautions ....................................................... 6-14
– When starting and driving ................................................ 5-3
Precautions on child restraints ............................................. 1-15
10-6 Index
Predictive course lines
– Around View Monitor settings ........................................ 4-13
Pregnant women ................................................................. 1-10
Protect
– Protect the environment ................................................. 8-12
– Protect your vehicle from corrosion .................................. 7-6
Push-button ignition switch .................................................. 5-12
Push-starting ....................................................................... 6-13
R
Radio
– FM AM radio with CD player ......................................... 4-24
– NissanConnect .............................................................. 4-38
Rear parcel shelf ................................................................. 2-45
Rear seat .............................................................................. 1-5
Rear window defogger ........................................................ 2-35
Rear-view monitor ................................................................. 4-2
– Operating tips ................................................................. 4-3
– Rear-view monitor setting ................................................ 4-3
Recommended SAE viscosity number ................................... 9-4
Remote control system (integrated keyfob) ............................ 3-4
Repair and replacement procedure ...................................... 1-37
Repairing flat tyre .................................................................. 6-8
Roof
– glass ............................................................................. 2-49
Roof rail .............................................................................. 2-45
Room light control switch .................................................... 2-50
Running-in schedule .............................................................. 5-2
S
Safety
– Child safety ..................................................................... 1-9
– Child safety rear door locks ........................................... 3-11
– Head restraints adjustment .............................................. 1-6
– Safety chains (Trailer) .................................................... 5-55
Seat
– Armrest ........................................................................... 1-5
– CENTRE mark on rear centre seat ................................. 1-12
– Child restraint installation using 3-point type seat belt ..... 1-25
– Front seats – Adjustment ................................................. 1-3
– Head restraints adjustment .............................................. 1-6
– Rear seat ......................................................................... 1-5
– Seat heater ...................................................................... 1-4
– Seat heating .................................................................. 2-41
– Seats .............................................................................. 1-2
– Three-point type seat belts ............................................. 1-11
– Universal child restraints for front seat and rear seats ..... 1-16
Seat belt
– CENTRE mark on rear centre seat ................................. 1-12
– Child safety ..................................................................... 1-9
– Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................................... 1-13
– Seat belt warning .......................................................... 1-10
– Seat belt warning light ..................................................... 2-4
– Seat belts ................................................................. 1-8, 7-5
Seat belt(s)
– Child restraint installation using 3-point type seat belt ..... 1-25
– Child safety ................................................................... 1-14
– Infants ........................................................................... 1-14
– Larger children .............................................................. 1-14
– Seat belt maintenance ................................................... 1-12
– Shoulder belt height adjustment ..................................... 1-12
– Small children ................................................................ 1-14
– Three-point type seat belts ............................................. 1-11
Security system ................................................................... 3-12
– Alarm system ................................................................. 3-12
– NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) ............... 3-12, 3-13, 3-2
Servicing air conditioner ............................................. 4-19, 4-22
Shoulder belt height adjustment (for front seats) .................. 1-12
Snow chains ....................................................................... 8-34
Index 10-7
Spare tyre ............................................................................. 6-2
Spark plugs (Petrol engine models) ..................................... 8-21
Speed limiter ....................................................................... 5-38
Speed limiter operations ...................................................... 5-39
Speedometer ........................................................................ 2-2
Starting
– Before starting the engine ................................................ 5-2
– Jump-starting ........................................................ 6-11, 8-18
– Precautions when starting and driving .............................. 5-3
– Push-starting ................................................................. 6-13
– Starting engine .............................................................. 5-15
Steering
– Electric power steering system ...................................... 5-57
– Phone operating buttons ................................................ 4-44
– Steering lock ........................................................ 5-11, 5-14
– Steering wheel adjustment ............................................. 3-18
– Steering wheel switches for hands-free telephone
control ........................................................................... 4-44
– Steering-wheel switch for audio control ......................... 4-38
– Telephone button ........................................................... 4-39
Stop/Start System ............................................................... 5-22
Storage ............................................................................... 2-42
– Bottle holder .................................................................. 2-44
– Coat hooks ................................................................... 2-44
– Console box .................................................................. 2-43
– Cup holder .................................................................... 2-44
– Glove box ...................................................................... 2-42
– Luggage hooks ............................................................. 2-47
– Luggage/boot compartment ........................................... 2-47
– Map pockets ................................................................. 2-44
– Roof rail ........................................................................ 2-45
– Seat pockets ................................................................. 2-44
– Storage trays ................................................................. 2-42
– Sunglasses holder ......................................................... 2-43
Sun visors ........................................................................... 3-18
Sunshade
– Sunshade operation ...................................................... 2-50
Super Lock system ............................................................... 3-8
– Emergency situations ....................................................... 3-9
– Power door lock switch ................................................. 3-11
Supplemental Restraint System ........................................... 1-29
Supplemental Restraint System (air bag system)
– Air bag system .............................................................. 1-29
Switch
– Defogger switch ............................................................ 2-35
– Fog light switch ............................................................. 2-38
– Front passenger air bag switch ...................................... 1-34
– Headlight and turn signal switch .................................... 2-36
– Headlight cleaner switch ................................................ 2-40
– Ignition switch positions ................................................. 5-13
– Ignition switch push button ............................................ 5-12
– Power door lock switch ................................................. 3-10
– Precautions on push-button ignition switch operation ..... 5-12
– Push-button ignition switch ............................................ 5-12
– Room light control switch .............................................. 2-50
– Wiper and washer switch .............................................. 2-32
Switch - Defogger switch
– ThermaClear ................................................................. 2-34
System operation ................................................................ 5-41
T
Tachometer ........................................................................... 2-2
Temporary-use spare tyre ...................................................... 6-2
ThermaClear Heated Windscreen
– ThermaClear Heated Windscreen button ....................... 2-34
Three-point type seat belts .................................................. 1-11
Three-way catalyst (Petrol engine models) ............................. 5-9
Tilting steering wheel ........................................................... 3-18
Towing
– Recommended towing for four-wheel drive (4WD)
models .......................................................................... 6-15
10-8 Index
– Recommended towing for two-wheel drive (2WD)
models .......................................................................... 6-15
– Tow bar Installation ....................................................... 5-56
– Tow truck towing ........................................................... 6-14
– Towing eye .................................................................... 6-16
– Towing precautions ....................................................... 6-14
– Trailer towing ................................................................ 5-54
Trailer
– Trailer brakes ................................................................ 5-55
– Trailer detection ............................................................. 5-56
– Trailer direction indicator light ........................................ 2-12
– Trailer towing ................................................................ 5-54
Transmission
– Continuously variable transmission fluid ......................... 8-13
– Driving with manual transmission ................................... 5-17
– Manual transmission (ignition switch) ............................. 5-11
– XTRONIC (ignition switch) ............................................ 5-11
Travelling or transferring your registration to another country .. 9-6
Trip computer ...................................................................... 2-27
Turbocharger system (Diesel engine models) ....................... 5-10
Turn signal switch ............................................................... 2-38
Tyre
– Changing tyres and wheels ........................................... 8-35
– Emergency tyre puncture repair kit ......................... 6-8, 8-36
– Flat tyre ........................................................................... 6-3
– Repairing flat tyre ............................................................ 6-8
– Spare tyre ..................................................................... 8-36
– Temporary-use spare tyre ................................................ 6-2
– Types of tyres ................................................................ 8-33
– Tyre age ........................................................................ 8-35
– Tyre equipment .............................................................. 5-66
– Tyre inflation pressure ................................................... 8-33
– Tyre placard .................................................................... 9-8
– Tyre pressure (Trailer) ................................................... 5-55
– Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....................... 6-7
– Tyre rotation .................................................................. 8-34
– Tyre wear and damage .................................................. 8-35
– Wheels and tyres ................................................... 8-33, 9-5
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ............................. 5-4
U
Ultrasonic sensor
– Alarm sensor ................................................................. 3-12
– Parking sensor .............................................................. 5-45
Universal child restraints for front seat and rear seats .......... 1-16
USB Memory operation ....................................................... 4-30
Using Intelligent Key system .................................................. 3-6
V
Vehicle identification .............................................................. 9-6
– Vehicle identification number (VIN) (chassis number) ....... 9-7
– Vehicle identification plate ................................................ 9-6
Vehicle information display .................................................. 2-13
Vehicle information display warnings and indicators ............. 2-21
Vehicle security .......................................................... 3-12, 5-57
– Alarm system ................................................................. 3-12
Vents .................................................................................. 4-14
W
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ...................... 2-4
Washing ............................................................................... 7-2
Waxing .................................................................................. 7-2
Wheel
– Blocking the wheels ........................................................ 6-3
– Care of wheels ................................................................ 7-3
– Changing tyres and wheels ........................................... 8-35
– Getting the tools and spare wheel .................................... 6-3
– Installing the wheel .......................................................... 6-5
Index 10-9
– Removing the wheel ........................................................ 6-4
– Removing the wheel cover ............................................... 6-4
– Stowing the wheel and tools ............................................ 6-6
– Wheel balance .............................................................. 8-36
– Wheel lock bolts ....................................................... 6-4, 6-6
– Wheel lock key code ....................................................... 6-6
– Wheels and tyres ................................................... 8-33, 9-5
Wheel lock bolts ................................................................... 6-6
Windows ............................................................................. 2-48
– Auto-reverse function ..................................................... 2-48
– Automatic function ......................................................... 2-48
– Locking passengers’ windows ....................................... 2-48
– Power windows ............................................................. 2-48
– Reinitialisation procedure after battery reconnection ....... 2-49
– Window reinitialisation procedure after battery
reconnection ................................................................. 2-49
Winter (Special winter equipment) ....................................... 5-67
Wiper
– Back door window wiper replacement ........................... 8-24
– Front window wiper replacement ................................... 8-24
– Rain sensor ................................................................... 2-33
– Rear window wiper and washer switch .......................... 2-33
– Washer nozzle ............................................................... 8-25
– Window washer/headlight cleaner fluid .......................... 8-15
– Windscreen wiper and washer switch ............................ 2-32
– Wiper blades replacement ............................................. 8-24
X
XTRONIC transmission
– Continuously variable transmission fluid ......................... 8-13
– Driving with XTRONIC transmission .............................. 5-18
10-10 Index
FUEL INFORMATION
Petrol engine
CAUTION
Do not use leaded petrol. Using leaded petrol will
damage the catalytic converter.
MR20DD engine:
Use UNLEADED REGULAR petrol with an octane
rating of at least 91 (RON).
HRA2DDT engine:
Use UNLEADED PREMIUM petrol with an octane
rating of at least 95 (RON).
For further details, see “Fuel information” in the
“9. Technical information” section.
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel above 51 cetane and with less than 10
ppm of sulphur (EN590 and Euro 5 specification)
must be used.
For further details, see “Fuel information” in the
“9. Technical information” section.
CAUTION
•
Do not use home heating oil, petrol or other
alternate fuels in the diesel engine, this can
cause engine damage.
•
Do not add petrol or other alternate fuels to
diesel fuel.
•
Do not use summer fuel at temperatures be-
low −7°C (20°F). Cold temperatures will cause
wax to form in the fuel and may prevent the
engine from running smoothly.
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL*
HRA2DDT engine
•
Genuine NISSAN engine oil 5W40
•
ACEA A3/B4
MR20DD engine
•
Genuine NISSAN engine oil 5W40
•
ACEA A3/B4
K9K engine
•
Genuine NISSAN engine oil 5W30 DPF
•
ACEA C4, SAE 5W30 low SAPS
R9M engine
•
Genuine NISSAN engine oil 5W30 DPF
•
ACEA C4, SAE 5W30 low SAPS
* For further details, see “Capacities and recom-
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical
information” section.
COLD TYRE PRESSURE
See the tyre placard affixed to the driver’s side
centre pillar.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERN
BLUE CITIZENSHIP
Today, the efforts made by NISSAN to fulfil our
responsibilities to protect and sustain the environ-
ment are far-reaching. Within NISSAN, we promote
the highest levels of practice in every region and in
every area of operations.
COMPLIANCE AT EVERY STEP
NISSAN focuses on ensuring that end of life vehicle
components are reused, recycled or recovered, and
guarantees compliance with EU legislation (the End
of Life Vehicle Directive).
WE BUILD OUR VEHICLES WITH
RECYCLING IN MIND
Reducing landfill waste, emissions, conserving natu-
ral resources, and enhancing recycling activities are
emphasised daily in our manufacturing, sales and
service operations and in the disposal of end of life
vehicles (ELV).
Design phase
To reduce environmental impact we have developed
your NISSAN vehicle to be 95% recoverable. We
mark the components to facilitate dismantling, recy-
cling and to reduce hazardous substances. We
carefully verify and control substances of concern.
We have already reduced to a minimum the cad-
mium, mercury and lead in your NISSAN vehicle.
NISSAN includes recycled material in your vehicle
and looks for opportunities to increase the percent-
age of recycled materials used.
PETROL STATION INFORMATION ENVIRONMENT (End of Life
Vehicles)
Manufacturing phase
NISSAN plants based in the UK and Spain already
achieve a recycling rate of over 90% and are look-
ing for further improvements. The UK plant installed
10 wind turbines to cut carbon dioxide emissions at
power plants by more than 3,000 tonnes per year.
NMISA (Spain) uses a solar panel water heating
system to save energy. This will generate 33% of
the energy consumed in the baths during the paint-
ing of your vehicle.
Production and distribution phase
Using resources efficiently to reduce the amount of
waste generated during the production and distribu-
tion stage. NISSAN promotes activities based on
Reducing, Reusing, and Recycling materials when-
ever possible. NISSAN’s goal is to achieve a 100%
recycling rate for operations in Japan and globally.
Use and service phase
NISSAN dealers are our window to you, our cus-
tomer. In order to meet your expectations they pro-
vide not only high quality services but are also envi-
ronmentally responsible. NISSAN promotes activi-
ties to recycle the waste generated as a result of
service centre activities.
Disposal phase
Recycle your end of life vehicle or its components.
When your NISSAN reaches the end of its life, and
is no longer suitable for daily use, it still has value.
You can help prevent waste affecting the environ-
ment by bringing your NISSAN to be recycled at our
collection networks in your area. Our collection net-
works guarantee no cost for the treatment of your
ELV. For further information on how and where to
dispose of your ELV refer to your local NISSAN
dealer or consult: www.nissan-europe.com or con-
sult: www.nissan-global.com.
PROTECT THE ENVIRONMENT
WHEN DRIVING
Your driving behaviour has significant impact on fuel
economy and the environment. Follow the tips be-
low for better fuel-efficiency, better driving habits,
and to be environmentally friendly by reducing emis-
sions:
Fuel efficient driving
Anticipating traffic conditions and acting accordingly
reduces fuel consumption, helping to protect of our
natural environment. Take your foot off the accelera-
tor while approaching traffic lights and avoid last
minute braking when the light turns red.
Avoid speeding, harsh acceleration, and strong
braking. The gain in time does not offset pollution of
the environment. Try to maintain speed when driving
uphill to reduce fuel consumption and pollution.
Maintain speed or allow the vehicle to go slower
where traffic allows.
Close windows when driving
Driving with a window open at 100 km/h (62 MPH)
increases fuel consumption by up to 4%. Driving
with the windows closed allows for better fuel
economy.
Use the roof rack only when necessary
Only install the roof luggage system when you really
need it, otherwise put it inside the vehicle or store it
in your garage. Do not drive around with an empty
roof rack, kayak holder, or ski rack, this will reduce
your aerodynamic drag significantly.
Optimise the use of air conditioning
The air conditioning system has a positive effect on
driving and vehicle safety through comfort cooling
and dehumidifying, drivers are more alert and have
better visibility when window demisting/defogging
becomes necessary. However, use of the air condi-
tioning system will increase fuel consumption sub-
stantially in an urban environment. Optimise the use
of air conditioning by using the vents as much as
possible.
Use the parking brake on slopes
Use the parking brake when holding your vehicle on
a slope. Avoid using the clutch (manual transmis-
sion) or the accelerator (continuously variable trans-
mission) to hold your vehicle as this leads to unnec-
essary fuel consumption and wear.
Maintain a safe distance
Anticipate traffic conditions for a smoother drive and
to assure comfort and safety during your trip. Drive
and maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
while in traffic. This will help reduce fuel consump-
tion as you will not be constantly tapping your
brakes.
Check your tyre pressure
Low tyre pressure increases fuel consumption as
well as the use of non-recommended tyres. Correct
tyre pressure will maximise the grip of your vehicle
and optimise fuel consumption.
Have your car serviced regularly
Regular service allows you to run your vehicle in
optimal condition and with the best fuel efficiency.
Have your vehicle serviced by your NISSAN dealer
or a qualified workshop to ensure that it is main-
tained to its original standard.
m
AIRBAG LABEL (where fitted)
m
•
In case of emergency ... 6-2
(Flat tyre, engine will not start, overheating,
towing)
•
How to start the engine ... 5-15
•
How to read the meters and gauges ... 2-2
•
Maintenance and do-it-yourself ... 8-2
•
Technical information ... 9-2
QUICK REFERENCE
SECURITY INFORMATION
As owner of this vehicle important codes have
been supplied to you that may be required by
your NISSAN dealer to duplicate keys or re-
pair the radio.
Please fill in the allocated areas or attach stick-
er(s) if available. Remove this page and keep
it in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
When selling your vehicle, we kindly request
you to hand over this page to the buyer.
SECURITY INFORMATION
Radio security code
(where fitted)
Key number
Wheel lock key code
(where fitted)
Remove this page from the manual and keep it in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
When selling your vehicle, we kindly request you to hand over this page to the buyer.
